Home

R&S FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating

1. INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT cetus eoa roster vetare tet a tera eee et dee Eae Ea INPut DIQISRAT INFWEESO TT r ll Sg MR EE e E INPut EATT STATe INPULGAIN S WAT 6 E S INPUES Be H leg New 0s EIER EEN INS N t GE EE MMEMOoSry LOADiO STAT KC MMEMory SELect ITEM VIQData MMEMorv SGTObRelO COMM MMEMory STORGIO FORMAL lt ccicccscccscesesscsteccessccuetsceteneaoteassctvescensendensdesectsasanecobsexeabadieteaacsasssecabsssevhieeabens MMEMory STORe IQ STATS eek re eege deed dE gd ll lee Ee ER e OUT ts E le DEE OUTPut DIQ CDEVice STATus QUEStionabl CONDItiOn 3 2 rii creo Eee ttes dee deeg d e unen e ed STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType2 CONDition sese 321 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType ENABle essen 322 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt NTRaAnsition 0 0 eee cee eeeeecneeeseeeseeeeneeeeaes 322 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n ResultType PTRansition eene 323 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt EVENt STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CONDiition ssssssssssssssssseseeee enne enne nennen tnter 319 STATusOUEGtonable MODu
2. see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 311 To edit a predefined pattern 1 2 3 4 5 In the VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description Press Pattern Settings Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns Press Edit Pattern Change the settings as required as described in To create a new pattern on page 196 To delete a predefined pattern 1 2 3 4 In the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description Press Pattern Settings Select the pattern from the list of All Patterns Press Delete Pattern The pattern is removed from the list of available patterns and can no longer be assigned to any standard Any existing assignments to other standards are removed as well To remove a predefined pattern from a standard 1 2 3 In the VSA Settings Overview menu select Signal Description Press Pattern Settings Select the pattern from the list of Standard Patterns Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 198 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis REENEN Configuring VSA measurements 4 Press Remove from Standard The pattern is deleted and removed from the list of Standard Patterns but is still available for assignment from the list of All Patterns 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files For various vector signal analysis functions the measured sign
3. 336 5 9 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register eese 337 5 1 STATus QUEStionable Register This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the instru ment is operated without meeting the specifications or defined limits It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable CONDition and STATus QUEStionable EVENt Table 5 1 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning 0to2 These bits are not used 3 POWer This bit is set if a questionable power occurs see STATus QUEStionable POWer register 4 TEMPerature This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs 5 FREQuency The bit is set if a frequency is questionable see STATus QUEStionable FREQuency register 6 Not used v MODulation The bit is set if a limit violation occurs after demodulation see STATus QUEStionable MODula tion lt n gt Register 8 CALibration The bit is set if a measurement is performed unaligned UNCAL display 9 LIMit device specific This bit is set if a limit value is violated see STATus QUEStionable LIMit register 10 LMARgin device specific This bit is set if a margin is violated see STATus QUEStionable LMARgin register 11 SYNC device specific This bit is set if in measurements or pre measurements synchronization to m
4. aaa Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 274 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 275 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change OCCUIS Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 274 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digital UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see
5. a SENSe subsystem FORMat Order OFFSet OQPSK DPI4 PI 4 DQPSK Setting parameters Name NORMal DIFFerential DPI4 OFFSet RST NORMal Example DDEM FORM QPSK Switches QPSK demodulation on DDEM QPSK FORM DPI4 Switches pi 4 DQPSK demodulation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 147 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO lt RecLengthAuto gt This command switches the automatic adaptation of the capture length on or off The automatic adaptation is performed so that a sufficient capture length is set as a function of result length burst and pattern search and network specific characteristics e g burst and frame structure Setting parameters lt RecLengthAuto gt ON OFF RST ON Example DDEM RLEN AUTO OFF Does not set RLENgth automatically Mode VSA Manual operation See Capture Length Auto on page 157 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue lt RecordLength gt This command defines the capture length for further processing e g for burst search The RLENgth is given in time S or symbols SYM As a result of a query the value is given in time Note that the maximum record length depends on the capture oversampling rate see Capture Oversampling on page 158 For the default value 24 the maximum is 50 000 For larger oversample rates the maximum record length can be calculated as Recordlengthyx 200 000 Capture ove
6. 204 Settings Overview An overview of the current and required settings is available using the Settings Over view softkey in the VSA menu see Settings Overview on page 113 The overview visualizes the data flow in the Vector Signal Analyzer summarizes the current settings and provides a convenient way to configure all measurement settings From the overview you can access the individual settings dialog boxes by clicking the required topic For details on the displayed information see the description of the indi vidual dialog boxes below To reset the instrument to the default settings of the default standard click Set to Default Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 145 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 3 1 1 Configuring VSA measurements Settings Overview x Modulation QPSK Symbol Rate 3 84 MHz TX Filter RRC Capture Length 8000 Alpha BT 0 22 Center Freq 15 0 GHz Oversampling D Signal Type Continuous Ref Level 10 0 dBm Dig Filter BW 1 229E 07 Burst Length 102 1600 Attenuation 10 dB Trigger Mode Free Run Pattern Preamp 0 Trigger Offset 0 0 sym Modulation ff Signal Description Res Length 800 Reference CAPTURE Alignment LEFT Screen A I Q Const Meas amp Ref Demodulation Result Range Screen B Result Summary Meas Filter RRC Entire Result Range Screen Mag CapBuf Alpha 0 22 Screen D
7. lt Name gt string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern GSM_TSCO Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Edit on page 167 See New on page 167 See Name on page 169 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate lt NState gt This command selects the degree of modulation number of permitted states The pat tern must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 The number of permitted states depends on the modulation mode Setting parameters lt NState gt numeric value Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the GSM TSCO pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00010001 Enters 00010001 as data DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 Sets the degree of modulation Mode VSA Manual operation See Mod order on page 169 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern ADD lt AddPattern gt This command adds a pattern to the current standard Using the DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL command only those patterns can be selected which belong to the current standard see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 310 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 309 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt AddPattern gt string Example DDEM PRES TETRA NCDO
8. sesssusssss 306 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 383 R amp S FSV K70 Index Copying remote control sueessssssss 307 Cr atin M 167 Defining m ep Defining remote control Deleting ET Deleting remote control his Ee Ile EE Enabling EE List des e OI Te ae BEE pur m Offset remote control se et Removing from standard ssssssssss 167 Removing from standard remote control 310 MIN S 114 Selecting remote control 309 310 DOMINOS de Text remote control stet Working Ku WE Pattern Search Activating remote control Auto configuration ccceccceeeeeeceeteeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee Enabling EE UO Correlation Threshold EE PEAKSEARCGCH inire riprese estere tetas Phase Error RRESUIPTY DG E ee eh EE daar 92 Phase shift keying Dk 21 Phase Unwrap RRESUILTY PE T dk eege dani 78 Phase Wrap RRESUIETY PE iui e adie dane 77 polarity external trigger cccceeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteeeee 130 161 trigger edge iisisti rinna aiaia iraia Preamplifier B22 e ele ET Printing aC M 110 S reerishols sirsiran eter irae as 110 PSK mixed fortis ierit reet rnnt 28 R R amp S Digital UO Interface B17 143 273 280 R amp S Support SOMKGY APT anna a eoa E aie 142 144
9. Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold Specify the expected position of the pattern within the burst by adjusting the Offset parameter Message Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols Note Note that this message does not necessarily indicate a problem Its purpose is to inform you that you might have the opportunity to get a more stable demodulation and or better measurement results by improving your setup Synchronization in the R amp S FSV K70 is performed in two stages coarse synchronization that precedes the reference signal generation and fine synchronization based on the reference signal e The coarse synchronization stage can work data aided i e based on a known pat tern or non data aided i e based on the unknown data symbols The default is a non data aided coarse synchronization In the case that a pattern is part of signal the user can switch to data aided synchronization e The fine synchronization stage always works data aided Sync Prefers More Valid Symbols indicates that one of the synchronization stages has too few symbols to ensure that the synchronization is robust The message is given if e Coarse Synchronization Non Data Aided User Pattern for Sync Off Estimation range shorter than 40 symbols see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 57 e Fine Synchronization Estimation range shorter than 10 symbols see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 57 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02
10. TR 4d4 R 4 24 RB 04 06 08 12 14 16 18 Frequency in feymbol 0 2 100 EDGE Wide Pulse Shape H H H H H ap D Ee e mm 1 D D 1 D Bee ee ee ee 20 ee ee eer cb gp eee eee D T 4 1 eee eed eee eee ey RAT es ee eee eee eer pees EE ess e Y apnyubeyy p 4 f EE EE 80 1 D Frequency in 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 f ymbol Annex Formulae and Abbreviations R amp S FSV K70 Abbreviations Half Sine ee zm zm sm ss kb a zm wm zm zm zm d a zm mm mm zm e T 4 R 24 1 D 1 1 H H 1 D 1 D 1 D D 1 D 1 D 1 D r H 1 D D D D D 1 D 1 D 1 L 1 D D 1 D D Ah i SI fe DN Te OU LR RC REOR DEET dO LA LITIILILICITII FETT Poem eee que eee en E far E VI AD Kess BD gp epnuufea 04 06 08 0 2 80 100 Frequency in kat Linearized GMSK D D D D D 1 E 1 D 1 D 1 D 4 D D D D 1 D 4 1 D D D D D E beers qp 2 4 2 2 BpR Q4 2 202 BR 2 2022 0 22 24 2 2 2 p 22 24 2 2 A 40 ee gp apnyubeyy Limbo Frequency in 7 2 Abbreviations The following abbreviations are commonly used in the description of the R amp S FSV K70 option 372 Frequency Shift Keying FSK c o 2 o o o o o o L o d o o Se ss
11. ssseeeene nnn 125 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu R amp S FSV K70 sssse eene 128 Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu R amp S FSV K70 sene 131 Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S FSV K70 sse 132 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu R amp S FSV K70 cccccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeettaeeeeeeeaas 135 Setting Limits Softkeys of the Lines Men 137 Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S FGVROOL ee eeeeeeee eect ee eettteeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 140 Softkeys of the Save Recall Menu R amp S FSV K70 se 143 Available Context Menus tere eeneeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeaeeeeeseeeeaaeeereeseeeaaaees 144 Configuring VSA measurements eese enne nnn 145 Settings Cwvervlew e 145 Defining the Result Range 186 Changing the Display Scaling eene 189 Managing standard settings fies men 192 Working with Pattern Gearches A 194 Managing Patterns nete nnne aea ases ar ENa K danni 196 Working With Known Data Eiles mmn 199 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements 204 Further Information e eeecieeeeee n terere tere eren urna cre reo nasa Dea ra Fog aD e crveteennendds 205 Trace Mode Cvernview eene nemen nen rene enden 205 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data 206 Measurement Result Display Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available You select the display using the Display Config softkey in the VSA
12. ttt DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL cett ttt DiSblautWlNDowensTRACestsNTSCALetAUTOTVALuel ttt DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE ttt DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel ettet DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition ttt DiSblautWINDowensTRACestsNTSCAL el BVAlue ttt DiSblautWINDowensTRACestsNTSCALeltP ivisiont tne DISPlay WINDowens TR CeebD STAT arta apt Y d etat da TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 376 R amp S FSV K70 List of Commands DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA ccccccececeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeecaeesaeecaeecaeeceseeenaeeseaeeeaeeeaeeseseeseeessneeeeaees 267 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATE cccccceccceeceeeseeeeceeeseeceaeeceeeseaeceaeeseaeecaeeseaeesaeeseaeeeaeesaeeseaeseeeeeeaeeeeees 267 FORMat DEXPort DSEPA rtalor ici iid ied ee ke at Edge Ehe dE FORMat ege EE FORMat DE NbortMODE RM INN EE INITiate lt n gt CON Cm 2 aa INI Tiatesns CONTIBUOUS oet treten het decere te eed edat INMMiate lt n gt SIMMEGiate ic e c 9 Jo T S NEED E HE INPUtATTen ation AUTO DEE Jl fi COU PING D INPUT elle ei wl INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling ll Sud alle Hasc EB rd
13. 3 Enter a reference value for the y axis in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Reference Position see Y Axis Reference Posi tion on page 117 5 Enter the position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis The position is a percentage of the entire length where 100 refers to the top edge 6 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Range see Y Axis Range on page 116 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 189 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Example If you want the to analyze errors greater than 95 you can define the y axis range as 5 and position the y axis to start at 95 To do so enter the reference value 95 and the reference position 0 A EYM Error 1 Clrw 2 Clrw Start 151 0 sym Stop 299 0 sym Fig 3 32 Defining the y axis scaling using a reference point To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT Ranges Y Axis Autorange see chapter 3 2 3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 115 The y axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynam ically 3 3 3 2 Scaling Statistics Diagrams Statistic diagrams show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars You can define the number of bars to be displayed i e the granularity of classifications Addit
14. Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 90 90 180 Fig 2 20 Constellation diagram for D8PSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 APCO25 Phase 2 GRAY NATURAL and TETRA Table 2 6 D8PSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 tion MSB LSB Phase shift 0 45 90 135 180 225 270 315 O a MMMM I Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 27 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis EE UU m Symbol Mapping Table 2 7 D8PSK GRAY Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 tion MSB LSB 010 011 100 101 110 111 Phase shift 0 45 135 90 270 315 225 180 Table 2 8 D8PSK VDL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indica 000 001 tion MSB LSB 010 011 100 101 110 111 Phase shift 0 45 135 90 315 270 180 225 2 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation Phase differential modulation is frequently combined with an additional phase shift e g 1 4 DQPSK 11 4 phase shift modulation differential modulated 4PSK
15. 01 11 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing IQ Demodulation Bandwidth Bandwidth umo B Equalizer Filter Halfband Filter Decimation Filter Optional IF Filter i e g j Measurement Filter Digital IF Baseband Baseband ameti Baseband Analog Section Digital Hardware Section DSP Section Fig 2 3 Block diagram of bandwidth relevant filters for vector signal analysis e After the IF Filter only for RF input operation bandwidth 40 MHz e After the digital hardware section The phase and amplitude distortions of the IF filter have been compensated for Usually the UO data has a usable bandwidth of about 0 8 sample rate 0 8 symbol rate Capture Oversampling For details refer to chapter 2 2 1 I D Bandwidth on page 13 The I Q data s sample rate and bandwidth automatically scale themselves with the set symbol rate For most modulated signals even the smallest allowed value for Capture Oversampling leads to a sufficient UO data bandwidth The whole spectrum of the input signal is captured but most adjacent channels and interferers are effec tively suppressed Only for very wide signals FSK no TX filter used it can be nec essary to try higher values for Capture Oversampling see Capture Oversam pling on page 158 increasing the I Q bandwidth The UO data delivered to the DSP section has no considerable amplitude or phase distorti
16. Compute Meas Frequency i Filter i Jomas MEAS Measured Signal Estimate Gain Amp droop Compute Magnitude Fig 2 56 FSK Estimation Strategy In figure 2 56 MEAS n denotes the sampled complex baseband measured signal waveform The magnitude samples are denoted Ajye s n while the instantaneous fre quency samples of the measured and reference signals are denoted by fugas n and fage n respectively The dashed outline of the Meas Filter block indicates that this operation is optionally de activated based on the corresponding user settings see Measurement Filter on page 178 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 68 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors For the estimation of the magnitude parameters the following least squares criterion is minimized 2 Cyac K Dad Auzas 1 Kg with respect to the model parameters K and a where Tg denotes the sampling period used for estimation see Estimation Points Sym on page 176 For estimation of the frequency parameters the following least squares criterion is mini mized Crreo B fo fast 3 uzas 0 B frer ast fo fa aT with respect to the model parameters B fo fy and 7 The term denotes the reference instantaneous frequency with a possibly fractional delay of samples For FSK modulation the default sampling period used for estimation is the
17. Contents WT 5 1 4 Documentation Overview cessent nennen nien nnnnr nare n etna rennen 5 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation eese rennen 7 1 3 How to Use the Help System sseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneen nennen nennen nnns 8 2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 10 2 4 Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for UO Data 10 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing eene 11 2 3 Symbol Map Pines TTT 21 2 4 Predefined Standards and SettingS cccccccesseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneesseeneeseeeeeeeseeeneneees 41 2 5 Demodulation Overview ccccccccccesseeeenseeeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeneseneeeees 47 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors sees 55 3 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 72 3 1 Measurement Result Display eene nennen nnn nnne nennt 73 3 2 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 112 3 3 Configuring VSA measurements eese nennen nennen 145 3 4 Further Information 1 cce eerte prre nn ELI EES aaa 205 4 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 208 44 Notation Irene AEAEE R ERR EEEged 208 42 ABORtSubsyst
18. D 0 0 01 02 03 DA 05 06 0 08 Rew The table 2 20 illustrates the effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions on a 64QAM signal only the 1st quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is mini mized The table 2 20 shows the signal after scaling Table 2 21 Amplitude transfer functions Amplitude transfer function analyzer Amplitude transfer function transmitter Mtgibute Transts F usctias Tars metien 1 gt T T D 4 D 1 gt 04 02 Fi oa m 02 4 H 04 4 D D 1 1 1 D A A A A A n 2 L w u LU 6 b 4 2 0 Tout Pawer ing Anpitude Taneter Function Analyzer 1 A L A A Al 18 16 M 12 10 4 4 heut Pover hog table 2 21 shows a logarithmic display of the amplitude transfer functions The analyzer trace is shifted against the transmitter trace by this scale factor Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 63 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis m ae ee ee Se Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Distortion Table 2 22 Effect of nonlinear phase distortions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortion analyzer 08 06
19. Left Center C Right Offset 3sym Symbol No Reference 8sym Visualization Fig 3 28 Result Range Alignment Rosul SMU TE 170 og EE 171 ANTON east 171 enc c O hae edhe aed 171 Symbol Number at Reference start ccccccccecceeeesnsceeeeteensteeneedenteeeeetdusnteseeteeene 171 Result Length Defines the number of symbols that are to be demodulated All traces over time are dis played over the result range For example if you have a burst of 100 symbols and you define the result length as 200 symbols you can examine the burst ramps in detail by selecting the alignment Burst Center The maximum result length depends on the CPU board indicated in SETUP System Info Hardware Info FMR 7 10000 symbols FMR 9 20000 symbols Remote command SENSe DDEMod TIME on page 315 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 170 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DREES Configuring VSA measurements Reference Defines the reference for the result range alignment The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Capture the capture buffer Burst the detected burst Pattern the detected pattern Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust VALue on page 256 Alignment Defines the type of alignment of the result range to the reference source The resu
20. See also chapter 3 3 7 1 Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data on page 199 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 100 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 1 2 B Bit Error Rate Bit Error Rate Total of Errors Total of Bits Measurement Result Display Current Minimum Maximum Accumulative 0 000 000 000 0 000 000 000 0 461 711 705 0 003 577 107 D 0 205 216 444 444 444 59940 The following information is provided in the BER result display in full view e Bit Error Rate error bits number of analyzed bits e Total of Errors number of detected bit errors known data compared to symbol decisions e Total of Bits number of analyzed bits For each of these results the following values are provided BER Result Description Current Value for current result range Minimum Minimum Current value during the current measurement Maximum Maximum Current value during the current measurement Accumulative Total value over several measurements for BER Total of Errors Total of Bits similar to average function SCPI commands CALC F X ED XTIM DDEM MACC T to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt F ED on page 249 CALC FORM BER to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 CALC BER to query the results see CA
21. 9 szOOdv T 3NON SCOOdV aen emdeo ooz zo ou ZH18 y MSdOQ EI 9 szOOdV SzOOdV Je Seo ISI MOT A Gm ye1 esio oH XI e9 As xL jemdeo 008 000Z VINGO ZHIN 88zz l MSdO eso 000ZVINGO Je Seo ISI MOT _ QM ye QM XL a ZER ama x emdeo 008 000Z VINGO ZHIN 88ZZ SdO ooozynao VINO T oud VINGOM v emdeo 008 cn OMM ZHN TS sdo Naom 9 dd9 yuljumoq asia S vulaL OMM VHISL snonunu vez 0 onsng ggz d vulaL gen OMM ZH gt 4SdOG v u 09 WHLAL CS VLIL t yuljumog Jojuo odd Valal snonumnuoo vez 0 onsng 9vz IS WHLAL gen OMM ZHA gL MSdOQF v it saval TER LOSI Wope ueu a903 ege C MSH 3903 esingepiM Jaju29 me Woz adeys esind 4903 usu wv GLZLL y o ueped LL usH 3OGa epi 3903 ZHA Sze Wope Oze 39d3 Joyls seow Buiddew ebuey uybue uJajed ysung JO I4 uonenje 3 juewubiy ynsey uJayed J0 u24eoS 104 uoueeg 1g eudiv juisue4j ayesjoquiAs uonejnpoW pjuepuejs JopjoJ Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Predefined Standards and Settings 45 KI 9UON JBanjeN 00 Weg Jojue2 MSd8 334 o usng 000L OL OM ZH 00 Sd8 Kale 3389lZ MSd ue bf O zs and Sd ende 06 Seo bf ZHW OZ xSdO O Ce ga ve ASdY ze cS Sand Ver oud Keze sdvz ende DIS Gen OMM ZHW0z Wvt
22. B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 277 Input Coupling Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Remote command INPut COUPling on page 272 Attenuation Mode Toggles the attunuation mode In automatic mode the RF attenuation is automatically set as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting In manual mode the specified RF attenuation is used irrespective of the reference level see RF Attenuation on page 155 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 272 RF Attenuation For Attenuation Mode Manual this value defines the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is enabled option R amp S FSV B25 only Attenu ation Mode Auto this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 155 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Configuring VSA measurements The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly Note Values under 10 dB can only be entered via the numeric keypad or via remote control command in order to protect the input mixer agai
23. E o O 222 S S48 o o amp e o Y o OG T ros g 6 0 c E wg H EL s gt E E a o Go o c ss E E o D D gt c 2 GEI 9 E oO e Se E c o og2 2 2 u SG Eei ES c o 2 S gt o p JF qin RA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Abbreviations Abbreviation ISI free demodulation Meaning Demodulation structure in which the signal is no longer influenced by adjacent symbols at the deci sion instants after signal adapted filtering See section System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MEAS filter Measurement Filter Weighting filter for the measure ment System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters MSK Minimum Shift Keying Modulation mode Minimum Shift Keying MSK NDA Demodulator Non Data Aided Demodulator Demodulation without any knowl edge of the sent data contents Demodulation and Algorithms PSK Phase Shift Keying Modulation mode for which the information lies within the phase or within the phase transitions Phase Shift Keying PSK QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation Modulation mode for which the information is encrypted both in the amplitude and phase Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM RMS Root Mean Square Averaging RMS Quantities RX filter Transmit filter Receive Filter Baseband filter in analyzer used for signal
24. EATT AUTO on page 276 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 120 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 276 INPut EATT on page 275 Ref Level Offset Opens a
25. Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 278 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 MMEMory Subsystem Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 144 See IQ Export on page 144 MMEMory STORe IQ COMM Description Defines a description of the export file which is stored with the data and also displayed in the file selection dialog box for UO data import and export Parameters Description Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See Export on page 144 See IQ Export on page 144 MMEMory STORe IQ FORMat Format lt DataFormat gt This command defines the format of the I Q data to be stored Parameters Format FLOat32 INT32 Defines the format of the complex or real data RST FLOat32 lt DataFormat gt COMPlex REAL Defines whether complex or real data is exported RST COMPlex Example MMEM STOR IQ FORM INT REAL Stores real I Q data as integer values to the specified file see MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 278 Mode A CDMA EVDO IQ TDS VSA WCDMA MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe Trace Path This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The
26. Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 133 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe State This command turns marker search limits on and off If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Suffix n Selects the measurement window m marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT lt Limit gt This command sets the left limit of the marker search range If the power measurementin Zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range to the trace Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limit gt Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 0 0 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 244 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a es CALCulate subsystem Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Search Limits on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt
27. Stat Mag CapBuf Evaluation Range I Q Capture Burst Pattern Search Off Off Measurement Filter On Display Configuration Set to Default e Modulation and Signal Description Geitnges eee ceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 146 e Frontend and VG eer e 153 e Burst and Pattern Search Geitngs AAA 162 e Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings sees 169 e Demodulation and Measurement Filter Gettmgs AAA 173 QE ras Pm 179 Modulation and Signal Description Settings You describe the properties of the signal to be measured in the Modulation and Signal Description Settings dialog box This dialog box is displayed when you select Modula tion Signal Description in the Settings Overview The dialog box contains the following tabs e Modulation on page 146 e Signal Description on page 150 e Known Data on page 152 Modulation The Modulation tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box contains mod ulation and Transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation l Qtrace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings The preview area is not editable directly Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 146 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Modulation Modulation Settings Type FSK
28. The phase of the signal the display is not limited to 180 180 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input Eval Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 4 Result display Phase Unwrap in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM UPHase to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 5 Frequency Absolute The instantaneous frequency of the signal source the absolute value is displayed in Hz Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal e Capture Buffer Meas amp Ref signal FREQ yras 0 5 ZMEAS 2 z dt with tn T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 Capture buffer l d FREQ cyrr r org ZCapt t Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 79 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display When evaluating the capture buffer the absolute frequency is derived from the
29. Trace Wizard Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the reference signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the signal source see Source on page 181 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 127 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Preset All Traces Trace Wizard Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step Trace 1 Clear Write Trace 2 6 Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Select Max Avg Min Trace Wizard Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Trace 4 6 Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Select Max CirWrite Min Trace Wizard Configures several traces to predefined display modes in one step Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Trace 4 6 Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 ASCII Trace Export Opens the ASCII Trace Export dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Various options are available to configure the stored data e Mode Stores raw UO data or trace data e Header Includes a h
30. Uit LIB Ou RAD FULL O01 00 00 00 01 00 01 Stop 8000 0 sym 100 01 90 01 00 01 00 00 Start 0 0 sym Distinction between Source Result type and Result type transformation The Display Config dialog provides the following settings e Source Here you can choose the data source for which you want to display the results e Result type Here you can specify the way you want to look at the Source For example select Magnitude Absolute to see the magnitude of your measurement signal The avail able choices depend on the selected source For example an eye diagram of the inphase component can only be selected if the source for the current screen is Meas amp Ref Signal e Result type transformation For certain result types it is not only possible to see the common over time repre sentation of the measurement but also the spectrum or the statistics in form of a histogram Furthermore it is possible to specify how many points i e samples per symbol should be displayed For example it might make sense for certain measure Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 74 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 1 1 1 Measurement Result Display ment results to only display the symbol instants In this case the parameter Display Points Sym should be set to 1 Result EE 75 e Normal Time Symbol Depbewe ze iacet Leitner iacent rsen 101 Spectral DISplays ocio tent tt r
31. Unit Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 96 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display FSK modulation A Result Summary current Mean Peak StdDev eene Unit e Frequency Error RMS Peak Shows the average RMS and peak frequency error in The frequency error is the difference of the measured frequency and the reference frequency The frequency error is normalized to the estimated FSK deviation SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor on page 230 Magnitude Error RMS Peak Shows the average RMS and peak magnitude error in 96 The magnitude error is the difference of the measured magnitude to the magnitude of the reference signal The magnitude error is normalized to the mean magnitude of the reference signal SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor on page 234 FSK Deviation Error Shows the deviation error of FSK modulated signals in Hz The FSK deviation error is the difference of the FSK deviation of the measured signal and the FSK reference deviation you have set SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror on page 229 FSK Meas Deviation Shows the estimated deviation of FSK modulated signals in Hz SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation on page 231 FSK Ref Deviation Sho
32. 0 11 2 rr or 317 2 This offset can only be detected and eliminated if a pattern was successfully detected at symbol level see also chapter 2 5 4 Pattern Sym bol Check on page 54 If modulation types are used where the information is represented by the phase transition e g differential PSK or MSK the absolute phase position is not an issue Thus the ambi guity of the starting phase does not have an influence on the symbol decisions If the measurement signal contains a known pattern it is also possible to use a data aided DA estimator at this stage This means that the estimator operates on a known data sequence i e the pattern If the signal contains a pattern it is possible to choose between the above described non data aided estimator and the data aided estimator with the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern If the data aided estimator is employed the phase ambiguitiy can be resolved at this stage Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 52 Demodulation Overview Demodulation amp Symbol Decision Senge 1Q Samples Result Range From Extract Result Range IQ Meas with corrected timing Scaling Recovery Phase amp Frequency Recovery IQ Meas with corrected timing phase frequency offset scaling Symbol Decision IQ Meas corrected IQ Symbols Passed on to Pattern Symbol Check Fig 2 44 Demodulation and Symbol Decision algorithm R a
33. 53 values FSK modulation returns 42 values The unit of each value depends on the particular result Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number Setting parameters lt Trace gt TRACe1 TRACe2 TRACe3 TRACe4 TRACe5 TRACe6 TRACe1R TRACe1 TRACe2R TRACe21 TRACe3R TRACe3l TRACelQCX TRACelQCY TRACe1 2 3 4 5 6 The complete data from the corresponding trace TRACe1R TRACe2R TRACe3R The real data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types TRACelI TRACe2I TRACe3l The imaginary data from the corresponding trace The parameters are available for the Real Imaginary result types Example TRAC TRACE1 Queries data from trace 1 Mode VSA TRACe IQ WBANGQ STATe State Acti vates or deactivates the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 if installed Sample rates higher than 128 MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth extension Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 326 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 15 TRIGger subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF ON If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is installed and no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restric tions on page 14 it is activated by default Thus sample rates up to 1 28 GHz and an UO bandwidth up to 160 MHz are possible Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spurious e
34. BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IO IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters ee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 209 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 REESEN Notation Special Characters A selection of key words
35. CDMA2000 1X Forward q 2 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 2 2 2B 2 20 4 2 2 2 22 24 2 2 2p 2 22 24 2 2 20 e zm mm zm mm mm d e zm mm mm zm mm eee ee ee ee m 4 2 2 KETTEN vie mm mm zm mr ellen e 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 d 4 RB 24 2 4 KETTER e zm zm mm ss e ms zm mm mm zm le mm mm zm zm wm slk a mm mm mm mm wm d a mm mm mm zm zm ZO ege JB ess e Y gp apnyiubeyy mm mm le e o mm er a mm D D p 4 80 100 f ymbol Frequency in Formulae CDMA2000 1X Reverse 20 o T4 DEER sl wm zm zm zm zm wk e zm zm mm zm mm d e mm zm mm zm R 4 2 4 DH DH D D r 1 D DH D DH D D DH L DH D D r DH 1 DH D i r DH DH D D L D D D DH DH r DH DL DH D D D ot DH D ee a ss mm zm da ms zm zm mm zm sl zm sm zm mm zm sw mm sl wm mm mm mm wm wm le mm e mm mm mm slk o wm wm wm wed a mm mm mm mm wm wb wm wm wm wm ebore wm wm ll wm mm e mm mm wb wm wm dor i T 2 4 2 Lb 4 20 40 gp apnyiubeyy Jg Pessac 4 ween ek T 4 80 See OTT 100 f ymbol Frequency in EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape D 4 2 1 Ee e mm 1 D D 1 D DU ee a e wn ee mb E mm ai mm 20 T b 4 zzzl 2 20 F 40 Bii oe 8p apnyufeyy
36. DA Imaginary 03 Phase Distortion Transmitter Prase Distomen Analyzer oo 0 06 05 ER 304 1 03 02 L H A o 0 4 05 5 The table 2 22 illustrates the effect of nonlinear phase distortions on a 64QAM signal only the 1st quadrant is shown The transfer function is level dependent the highest effects occur at high input levels while low signal levels are hardly affected These effects are caused for instance by saturation in the transmitter output stages The signal is scaled in the analyzer so that the average square magnitude of the error vector is mini mized The table 2 22 shows the signal after scaling Table 2 23 Phase transfer functions Nonlinear distortions phase distortion transmitter Phase distortions analyzer Phase Trans Function Traneantier O15 J OH 4 00 d Bee a 20 4 HM A 015 02 re A 1 4 L 4 y DD 8 G 4 2 4100 8 6 4 2 0 Irma Power dog Phase Tramster Fincha Anayzer 02 T T T T T T 0 1 005 In Phase Enor 239 8 8 AM 12 0 8 6 Input Pose er og table 2 23 show a logarithmic display of the phase transfer functions The analyzer trace is shifted by the phase described above as against the transmitter trace Ss ee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 64 R amp S FSV K70 2 6 2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Signal Mod
37. DIFFerential TYPE1 NORMal MSK TYPE2 DIFFerential DMSK RST QPSK Example DDEM FORM MSK Switches MSK demodulation on DDEM MSK FORM TYPE2 Switches DMSK demodulation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Order on page 147 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize ADRoop lt CompAmptDroop gt This command switches the compensation of the amplitude droop on or off Setting parameters lt CompAmptDroop gt ON OFF RST ON Example DDEM NORM ADR ON Switches the compensation on Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 174 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 293 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod NORMalize CFDRift lt CarrierFreqDrift gt This command activates or deactivates compensation of the carrier frequency drift Setting parameters lt CarrierFreqDrift gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 174 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize FDERror lt RefDevCompensation gt This command selects the method for calculating the frequency error if you are using FSK modulation Setting parameters lt RefDevCompensatioiON OFF ON Scales the reference signal to the current deviation of the mea surement signal OFF Uses the nominal deviation you have set for the reference signal RST ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 174 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMba
38. Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all Manual operation See Continuous Sweep on page 123 See Single Sweep on page 123 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated number of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 270 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 7 INPut Subsystem In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all INITiate REFMeas Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after chan
39. FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 264 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Phase Wrap The phase or argument of the signal the display is limited to the phase value range of 180 180 Phase ypas Z MEAS t with tzn T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 77 Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF SGL A SE ESEIRSS TH 1M Clrw ACT ITI ONT r LAT Start LIE i2 GE Fig 3 3 Result display Phase Wrap in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM PHASe to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 325 3 1 1 4 Phase Unwrap
40. FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is calculated differently see the R amp S FSQ K70 Software Manual and is comparable to the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSV K70 However while the FSK DEV ERROR in the R amp S FSQ K70 is given in Hz the Freq Err RMS in the R amp S FSV K70 is given in percent i e relative to the FSK Meas Deviation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 355 R amp S FSV K70 Support Frequently Asked Questions Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result dis play Spectrum VSA Ref Level 22 00 dBm Mod QPSK SR 270 833 kHz m el Att 10 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 200 SGL TRG EXT A Freq Error Abs SL Cirw B Phase Error Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym Start 3 sym Stop 203 sym D Yector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw a Sea Stop 5 13 09 30 16 Solution These spikes are usually uncritical and are caused by zero transitions in the 1 Q Plane Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative to Answer Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref calculates the FFT of the result Reallmag Meas amp Ref Reallmag Meas amp Ref has the unit none In this case none means the measured sig nal has been scaled such that it matches the ideal corresponding reference signal as well as possible The reference signal in turn is scaled such that max abs at symbol instants 1 0 Question How can I get the demodul
41. Frequency response EDGE filters 1 1t tette Low ISI filters s Frequency shift keying FSK sss 31 Frontend Roi eX T dance 131 FSK Deviation Error Compensation EE 174 Full Scale Level Digital UO Interface remote control 274 Digital IQ rette terrens 141 H Hexadecimal pi D cee 119 Hysteresis Lower Auto level sseem 122 Upper Auto level ee 122 l VQ bandwidth WE 13 UO Capture Capture Length eene 158 Capture Length remote control 300 Capture Length Auto 157 Capture Oversampling 158 Sample Rate 158 Softkey vs ES 131 Trigger Mode 0 aaaaaa 4 159 Usable UO Bandwidth eesseeseses 158 UO data Block dlagrarm eet eret rrr Ree hee gt Export remote control Export format remote control Import remote control D e OC UO Imbalance Bell LE 174 UO Offset Compensation UO pattern search IEC IEEE bus Command description esee 208 IF Power uc C 129 IF WIDE OUTPUT COMMOCION RR PERDE 159 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 R amp S FSV K70 Index Importing I Q data remote siisii nadsenie 278 Input Coupling RF Settings uit eee te alana tit 155 Input sample rate Digital IQ onini rettet reine 140 Intersymb
42. LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 219 Set to Default Config ModAcc Limits Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy DEFault on page 218 Current Mean Peak Config ModAcc Limits Define and activate the limits for the currently measured value the mean and the peak value on separate tabs Note that the limits for the current and peak values are always the same Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 138 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Il Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Limit Value Current Mean Peak Config ModAcc Limits Define the limit with which the currently measured mean or peak value is to be compared A different limit value can be defined for each result type Depending on the modulation type different result types are available Result type Remote command PSK MSK QAM EVM RMS CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue on page 222 EVM Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue on page 222 Phase Err Rms LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy page 224 Phase Err Peak LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy page 224 Magnitude Err Rms LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy page 223 Magnitude Err Peak LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy on page 223 Carr Freq Err CALCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy on page 221 Rho CALCulate lt n
43. MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue essen nennen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue esses eene nennen 224 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvOOFFesecMEAN MAL ue 224 CAlCulate nz LUIMrMACCuracvOOFFserbEAkKVAL ue 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue esses eene nennen nnne 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv PDERRorPPEakKVAL ue CAlCulate nz LUIMrMACCuracvPERborbRCURrentVAl ue 224 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv PDERRorRMEanVAl ue nennen ener nennen nnn 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue essen eene nnne 224 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue esses eene rennen 225 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue 225 CAL Culate nz LIMIrMACCuracvRHOPDEAKVAL ue 225 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe sessssssesseeeeeeneeneee nennen nennen erster set nenrnssenrr enne nnne 219 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmz AOF F AA 226 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCnon DDEMod GTATieticADbRoop 226 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL 0 cc eee eee cece eeeenee tenes seeeeeeeneeeeseeeneaeees 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror 227 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM cece ceeeeceeeeeeeeeneeteneeseeeeenneeeeaeees 228 CALCulate n2 MARKer m FU
44. Mapping or symbol mapping means that symbol numbers are assigned to points or tran sitions in the UO plane e g PSK and QAM In the analyzer the mapping is required to decode the transmitted symbols from the sampled UO or frequency time data records The mappings for all standards used in the analyzer and for all employed modulation modes are described in the following Unless characterized otherwise symbol numbers are specified in hexadecimal form MSB at the left 2 3 4 Phase Shift Keying PSK With this type of modulation the information is represented by the absolute phase posi tion of the received signal at the decision points All transitions in the UO diagram are Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 21 Symbol Mapping possible The complex constellation diagram is shown The symbol numbers are entered in the diagram according to the mapping rule BPSK NATURAL Fig 2 7 Constellation diagram for BPSK including the symbol mapping QPSK Fig 2 8 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for CDMA2000 FWD and DVB S2 Symbol Mapping Fig 2 10 Constellation diagram for QPSK NATURAL including the symbol mapping Fig 2 11 Constellation diagram for QPSK including the symbol mapping for WCDMA Symbol Mapping 8PSK d X5 F 7 Fig 2 14 Constellation diagram for 8PSK including the symbol mapping for DVB S2 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis
45. Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done Close For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 273 3 2 13 Softkeys of the Save Recall Menu R amp S FSV K70 The Save Recall menu contains the same functions as for the base unit except for the Export submenu Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 143 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 2 14 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 L ASCII Trace EG 144 GI 1 EE 144 L R amp S EE 144 Export Opens a dialog box to configure exports of trace data ASCII Trace Export Export Opens the ASCII Trace Export dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory Various options are available to configure the stored data e Mode Stores raw UO data or trace data e Header Includes a header with scaling information etc e Decimal Separator Defines the separator for decimal values as point or comma Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 268 FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 269 FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 269 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 IQ Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select
46. Mode remote control sssssss 298 299 Gap length sed gtet nain Geiss eked Kelt VE Ile 175 Minimum gap remote control E Offset EVM D Rising edge remote control Order remote control eeeessseeese 299 ec neadan 132 Demodulation order Tolerance Ain Remote control ne ete 297 298 Tolerance remote control sessssse 304 Differential PSK Dk 26 Burst Signal 5 eee ete erts 151 DiglConf SOMKCY CT 142 Digital Baseband Info Remote control 1 intrent 280 Digital IQ data pi be 140 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 381 R amp S FSV K70 Index Digital IQ Info Ixemote control 1 niente iii 273 cy 143 Digital Standards SONK EE 113 Display Configuration Result TYPO 5 dd ttes ee rus 181 Result Type Transformation sss 182 Softkey Source Display Points Symbol sssssssss 183 remote Control nire rere 259 Display range Frequency is iie irte An Added 115 E EDGE filters Frequency response eene rnnt nnn nnns 366 El Attenuation RF SetlingS M sedans 156 Electronic input attenuation E 275 Error model FSK testes ceca Ee 67 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Ixesult TY DO sas ets coerente ree een btts 89 Estimation eg KEEN
47. NONE Example DISP TRAC X VOFF 20 Adds an offset of 20 to the number of symbols Mode VSA Manual operation See Symbol Number at Reference start on page 171 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe Range This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SPACing on page 267 Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t irrelevant Parameters Range Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 263 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El DISPlay subsystem Manual operation See Ranges on page 116 See Y Axis Range on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO VALue This command automatically scales the vertical axis of the specified screen Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO Auto scaling for screen B Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Ranges on page 116 See Y Axis Autorange on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL This command automatically scales the vertical axis of all screens Suffix lt n gt 1 4 t 1 6 Example DISP WIND2 TRAC Y SCAL AUTO ALL
48. Opens a submenu that allows you to restore all standards and pattern settings on the instrument to the values predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Restore Standard Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 287 Restore Pattern Files Restore Factory Settings Restores the pattern files predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 287 3 2 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu R amp S FSV K70 The FREQ key opens the RF Settings tab of the Frontend amp UO Capture Settings dialog box and displays the Frequency menu which contains the following softkeys Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 114 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 2 3 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 P EE 115 Stepsize AuUtD M este er RR PRI MR n RR REN MINE ER AM CXER MR MARINE 115 E ecl I LA 115 gie AUI Em 115 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 316 Stepsize Auto Man Toggles between automatic step size or a fixed manually defined step size CF Steps ize for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency
49. Order 4FSK Mapping NATURAL FSK Ref Deviation 2 0 SR Symbol Rate 3 84 MHz TX Filter Type Alpha BT Trace Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 12 5 MHz Stop 12 5 MHz Modulation RK C M 147 Mod latioli Ordet E 147 PS Ref EIC EE 148 Modulaton D Ee Uer DEE 149 EE eege ege 149 Transmit fiter Typa TE 149 L koad User Filenin aa aae iaa Euan a ana 149 ENEE Ee 150 Modulation Type Defines the modulation type of the vector signal The following types are available PSK MSK QAM FSK UserQAM Remote command SENSe DDEMod FORMat on page 288 Modulation Order Depending on the Modulation Type various orders of modulation are available Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 147 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Type Available orders PSK BPSK QPSK Offset QPSK DQPSK 3Pi 4 QPSK Pi 4 DQPSK 8PSK D8PSK 3Pi 8 8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Pi 4 QPSK MSK MSK DMSK QAM 16QAM Pi 4 16QAM 32QAM Pi 4 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM UserQAM 4ary 16ary 32ary Remote command SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 297 SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat on page 299 ENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat on page 293 ENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat on page 298 FSK Ref Deviation The
50. PSD Standard deviation of maximum SNR values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt MarkerCoupling gt With this command markers between several screens can be coupled i e use the same stimulus All screens can be linked with an X axis scaled in symbols or time except those showing the capture buffer If several capture buffer measurements are visible their markers are coupled too Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 238 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt m gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt MarkerCoupling gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Couple Screens On Off on page 133 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 m 1 4 Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Max Peak on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current position i e in descending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is
51. R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DEE Configuring VSA measurements 1 Define the Result Length i e the number of symbols from the result that are to be analyzed see Result Length on page 170 Note that when you use Known Data files as a reference the Result Length speci fied here must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file lt ResultLength gt element See chapter 3 3 7 1 Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data on page 199 2 Define the Reference for the result range i e the source to which the result will be aligned see Reference on page 171 The reference can be the captured data a detected burst or a detected pattern 3 Define the Alignment of the result range to the reference source i e whether the result starts at the beginning of the reference source ends with the reference source or is centered with the reference source see Alignment on page 171 4 Optionally define an offset of the result range to the reference source e g to ignore the first few symbols of the captured data see Offset on page 171 5 Optionally define the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the refer ence source to change the scaling of the x axis see Symbol Number at Reference start on page 171 This offset is added to the one defined for the signal description see Offset on page 152 Operating Manual 1176 757
52. RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value 220 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El CALCulate subsystem Query parameters lt LimitResult gt NONE PASS FAIL MARGIN NONE No limit check result available yet PASS All values have passed the limit check FAIL At least one value has exceeded the limit MARGIN currently not used RST NONE Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON Switch limit check ON INIT IMM WAI do single measurement CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR RESULT query result Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy CFERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the limit for the current peak or mean center frequency error limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1000 0 mean 750 0 Default unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC
53. X SLIMits RIGHT Limit This command sets the right limit of the marker search range If the power measurement in zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range to the trace Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix n Selects the measurement window m irrelevant Parameters Limit Range 1e9 to 1e9 RST 800 0 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Search Limits on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits ZOOM State This command sets the limits of the marker search range to the zoom area Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix n irrelevant m irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK X SLIM ZOOM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 245 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Search Limits
54. a eS SS SSS e Symbol Mapping 2 3 2 Rotating PSK A rotating PSK modulation is basically a PSK modulation in which additional phase shifts occur These phase shifts depend on the symbol number e g for a rr 4 QPSK the third symbol has an additional phase offset of 3 1 rr 4 This offset has the same effect as a rotation of the basic system of coordinates by the offset angle after each symbol The method is highly important in practical applications because it prevents signal tran sitions through the zeros in the I Q plane This reduces the dynamic range of the modu lated signal and the linearity requirements for the amplifier In practice the method is used for 311 8 8PSK for example and in conjunction with phase differential coding for rr 4 DQPSK Symbol mapping The logical constellation diagram for 311 8 8PSK comprises 8 points that correspond to the modulation level see figure 2 15 A counter clockwise offset rotation of 3171 8 is inserted after each symbol transition Fig 2 16 DO symbol stream after 3778 rotation in I Q plane if the symbol number 7 is transmitted six times in a row Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 25 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 3 3 Symbol Mapping Fig 2 17 Constellation diagram for 37 4 QPSK including the symbol mapping for EDGE 3 Fig 2 18 Constellation diagram for 77 4 QPSK Natural including the symbol mapping Differential
55. menu see chapter 3 3 1 6 Dis play Configuration on page 179 or by pressing the MEAS key Which result types are Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 73 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis EH Measurement Result Display available depends on the selected data source Furthermore for some result types you can display either spectral statistical or time domain results You can define which part of the signal is to be evaluated and configure the alignment of the result range see chapter 3 3 1 4 Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings on page 169 You can also define how detailed the trace is displayed Display Points Sym parameter in the Display Configuration dialog vsa To Analyzer C9 Ka Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 10 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF A I Q Vector Meas amp Ref iM Clrw B Result Summary 6 13 6 14 12 76 13 01 Phase Error RMS 3 48 3 49 7 31 7 45 Frequency Error 33 87 34 20 0 996279 0 996261 43 11 42 76 Gain Imbalance 0 12 0 13 Quadrature Error 0 17 0 19 Amplitude Droop 0 000 0 000 27 21 27 21 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 00 01 CR UO toa foafoa ooto oo o oo 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 RR a RUN 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 00 01 00 01 l l 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 Modis MAEN AF n 01 00 01 01 00 00 l T ldi T
56. 1176 7578 02 01 317 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem Setting parameters lt Counter gt CAPTure STATistics STATistics Returns the number of result ranges that have been evaluated CAPTure Returns the number of used capture buffers evaluated RST STATistics Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable Subsystem The following commands can be used to query the contents of the status registers specific to the R amp S FSV K70 option For details see chapter 5 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 on page 331 ag Ree Eeler ler 318 EU ee EVENIT eege e etuer eet adnot tanta tane enee 319 STATuesOUEG onabie MODulation nz ENADle eene nennen nnn 319 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CONDition 12 eee eei eese eene nh nan nnn nnns 319 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENIt J eeeseeeesseeseseeee nnne 319 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n NTRansition e eeeeeeeee eee 320 STATueOUESponabie MODulatton nz PD Raneiton eee eene 320 STATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz HResultTwvpeztEVENUN 321 STATusOUEGtonable MODulatton nz HResultTwvpez CONDiton nene 321 STATusOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz HResultfvpez ENADle esses 322 STATusOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz HResultTvpezN Ransiton nene 322 STATusOUEGtonabie MODulatton nz HResultTvpez P Ransition nene 323 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDIION 0
57. 27 3 4 3 99 2 72 4 87 4 5 4 15 2 64 4 64 5 6 4 43 2 54 4 33 8 9 4 49 2 53 4 30 OOK OOK stands for On Off Keying and is often also referred to as binary Amplitude Shift Keying ASK With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 39 Symbol Mapping Fig 2 39 Constellation diagram for OOK 4ASK 4ASK is a 4 ary Amplitude Shift Keying mapping type With this type of modulation the information is solely represented by the absolute amplitude of the received signal at the decision points R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Predefined Standards and Settings Fig 2 40 Constellation diagram for 4ASK 2 4 Predefined Standards and Settings In the Digital Standards menu predefined basic settings for standards can be selected and user defined standards stored see Digital Standards on page 113 The most common measurements are predefined as standard settings for a large number of mobile radio networks The instrument comes prepared with the following settings for those standards e Capture length and result length e Signal description Modulation e Transmit filter and measurement filter Burst Pattern search configuration e Result range alignment e Evaluation range settings Display configuration The standard settings are grouped in folders to facilitate sele
58. 3 2 14 Available Context Menus on page 144 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 107 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 1 6 Measurement Result Display Label Description Ref Level Reference level see Reference Level on page 116 Offset Reference level offset if defined see Ref Level Offset on page 121 Att Attenuation see chapter 3 2 3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 115 Freq Frequency see Center on page 115 Std Digital standard see Digital Standards on page 113 Mod Modulation type if no standard is active or default standard is changed see Modulation Type on page 147 Res Len Result Length see Result Length on page 170 Cap Len Capture Length instead of result length for capture buffer display see Capture Length on page 158 SR Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 149 Input Input type of the signal source see chapter 3 2 12 Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 140 SGL Single sweep mode cannot be edited directly Burst Burst search active see Auto On Off on page 163 Pattern Pattern search active see Auto On Off on page 165 Stat Count Statistics count for averaging and other statistical operations see Statistics Count on page 123 cannot be edited directly Capt Count Capture count the current number of captures performed if several cap
59. 4 Setting parameters StatisticsNofColumnssumeric value Range 2 to 1024 RST 101 Default unit NONE Example CALC STAT SCAL X BCO 10 Sets the number of columns to 10 Mode VSA Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See X Axis Quantize on page 117 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y LOWer lt Value gt This command defines the lower limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Value gt 1E 9 to 0 1 RST 1E 6 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y LOW 0 001 Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See y Axis Min Value on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UNIT lt Unit gt This command defines the scaling type of the y axis Suffix lt n gt selects the screen Parameters lt Unit gt PCT ABS RST ABS Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UNIT PCT Sets the percentage scale Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See y Unit Abs on page 118 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 254 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 LEE EEE eee CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe Y UPPer lt Value gt This command defines the upper limit for the y axis of the diagram in statistical meas urements Since probabilities
60. Auto Man on page 115 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 316 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ELLE SENSe subsystem SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command defines the frequency offset Parameters lt Offset gt Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Default unit Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 115 SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue lt SweepCount gt This command sets the statistics count Entering 0 as a parameter activates Auto mode Entering a number greater than 0 activates Manual mode and sets the statistics count to the corresponding number For more information see e Statistics Count on page 123 Setting parameters lt SweepCount gt numeric value Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 Default unit NONE Example INIT CONT ON Activates continuous sweep mode SWE COUN 0 Records the UO data continuously and uses a sliding window length for averaging of 10 INIT CONT OFF Activates single sweep mode SWE 5 Records UO data until 5 evaluations have finished Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA Manual operation See Statistics Count on page 123 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent lt Counter gt This command queries the current statistics counter value which indicates how many result ranges have been evaluated For results that use the capture buffer as a source the number of used capture buffers can be queried Operating Manual
61. CENTer STEP AUTO on page 316 CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to define the fixed step size for the center frequency The softkey indicates the current setting This function is only available if Stepsize Auto Man on page 115 is set to Man Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 316 Frequency Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency offset that shifts the displayed frequency range by the specified offset The softkey indicates the current frequency offset The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 317 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 When you click the AMPT key the Amplitude menu is displayed which provides the following softkeys Reference Levob MR 116 Cio MT EE 116 EO 11 1 MENORES 116 L Y Axis Reference WING RPM TER 116 L Y Axis Reference Pollionis ice aene renta ecco ead dad 117 L3 GE EE 117 Ranges Statistic messifermief ts eeepc rident Ree E Ra e id dtes 117 mor ETE e MM 117 L X Axis Reference Value eese tenente tenni 117 S Cir is NERO E 117 Ly Akis Mane VIS Lusso ipsae eege eer 118 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 115 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Er LE E 118 Ani E FI NENNEN 118 L Default Sefitae
62. Clo ij T O 141 S Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control 275 pilam 140 Save As Standard ucl aE TaS 113 Saving ege cC 110 occa c 110 le EH 110 scaling 2 ME 190 EE 189 190 SCPI Conformity information eesseeesesese 208 Screens Display Configuration 180 Screenshots PGW Gs Se Space eat decet Ma 110 search lee EE 137 POA euer egen 136 Search DING CUO WE 136 Direction Real or Imag eeeeeeess 136 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 R amp S FSV K70 Index Ic C M 136 Tolerance Burst Search 163 Settings Overview e aree iere tdi et pria 113 131 Signal Description Continuous Burst Signal ccecceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 151 uci 151 SOMKCY E 131 Signal Mappirig 2 prete KAREN EEN 149 Signal Source etc Remote control eTo A vaeeieaes softkey All Marker Off terere trente 135 CF Stepsize remote control sss 316 Continue Single Sweep remote control 269 270 Continuous Sweep remote control 270 Cont Meas remote Control Default Settings remote control Deviation Lin Log remote control 267 El Atten Mode Auto Man seee 120 Export remote control E Frequency
63. Cosine Filter The roll off parameter Alpha is set according to the Transmit filter if the Auto according to Transmit filter option is enabled see Auto on page 179 Otherwise it must be set manually If the Transmit filter is also a Root Raised Cosine filter with the same roll off parameter the resulting system is inter symbol inter ference free USER User defined filter Define the filter using the Load User Filter on page 179 function or the SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER command For details see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 19 NONE No measurement filter is used The frequency response of the available standard specific measurement filters is shown in chapter 7 1 6 2 Measurement Filter on page 366 Customized Filters The analytical filter types RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and GAUSSIAN as well as the most important standard specific filters are already integrated in the R amp S FSV K70 In addition it is possible to use user defined measurement and Transmit filters Customized filters may be useful for the following purposes e Development of new networks and modulation methods for which no filters are defined yet e Measurements of transmitter characteristics with slightly modified e g shortened transmitter filters An external program FILTWIZ is offered to convert user defined filters This program generates filter files vaf which can be transferred
64. DDEMod MFILter STATe lt MeasFilterState gt Use this command to switch the measurement filter off To switch a measurement filter on use the SENSe Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt Example Mode Manual operation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 DDEMod MFILter NAME command ON OFF OFF Switches the measurement filter off ON Switches the measurement filter specified by SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on However this command is not nec essary as the SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME command automatically switches the selected filter on RST ON SENS DDEM MFIL STAT OFF Deactivates the measurement filter VSA See Type on page 179 292 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod MFILter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects the user defined measurement filter For details on creating user defined filters see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 19 Setting parameters lt FilterName gt Name of the user defined filter Example SENS DDEM MFIL NAME USER Selects user filter mode for the meas filter ENS DDEM MFIL USER D MMyMeasFilter Selects the user defined meas filter Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod MSK FORMat Name This command defines the specific demodulation mode for MSK Setting parameters Name TYPE1 TYPE2 NORMal
65. Errors 2 6 1 3 Modulation Errors Error vector EV Fig 2 47 Modulation error error vector The error vector is the difference between the measurement signal vector Meas vector and the reference signal vector Ref vector Error Vector Magnitude EVM Fig 2 48 Modulation error EVM magnitude error phase error The magnitude of the error vector in the diagram is specified as the error vector magnitude EVM It is commonly normalized to the mean reference power The EVM should not be confused with the magnitude error see below Magnitude Error The magnitude error is defined as the difference between the measurement vector mag nitude and the reference vector magnitude see figure 2 48 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Phase Error Fig 2 49 Modulation error Phase error error vector phase The phase error is the phase difference between the measurement vector and the ref erence vector PHASE _ERR t PHASE yras t PHASE pep r This measurement parameter is of great importance for MSK modulation measurements The phase error should not be confused with the error vector phase The error vector phase is the absolute phase of the error vector see figure 2 49 The effects of the different modulation errors in the transmitter on the result display of the analyzer are described on the next pages Al
66. FSK Reference Deviation sets the deviation to the reference frequency Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 148 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Configuring VSA measurements In case of 2FSK it indicates the distance from the reference frequency to the positive negative deviation frequency and in case of 4FSK the distance to the outer positive negative deviation frequency Select Relative from the dropdown menu next to the input field to set the deviation as a multiple of the symbol rate x SR If you want to set the deviation as an absolute value in Hz select Absolute from the dropdown menu Note that this parameter is available only in combination with FSK modulated signals Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue on page 252 CALCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence RELative on page 251 Modulation Mapping The available mapping types depend on the Modulation Type and Modulation Order For more information on the modulation mapping refer to chapter 2 3 Symbol Mapping on page 21 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue on page 291 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog on page 291 Symbol Rate The symbol rate also determines the UO bandwidth of the data recording and demodu lation You can change the default rate by entering a value in Hz For details on the possible values see table 2 1 Remote command SENSe DDEM
67. Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 Configuring VSA measurements Frontend amp I Q Capture i x I Q Capture Data Capture Settings Jeun s 2 083 ms Capture Ov SampleRate 15 36 MHz 12 288 MHz Auto 40MHz On Usable I Q Bandwidth Maximum Bandwidth Swap I Q e off Trigger Settings Cosm Trigger Mode Trigger Offset Trigger Level Pos Neg 3 0 dB 150 0 ns Trigger Polarity Trigger Hysteresis Trigger Holdoff Mag CapBuf 109 6 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 8000 sym Capture Lengih AUG EE 157 Capture e E 158 Capture ee e e DEE 158 Sample EE 158 Usable MQ Ee r cic stein tie cade aa 158 Maximum SVG VII Lu DEE 159 E o E EEN 159 Togor Oe CEET 159 TAJGO ONSE oieri ETE EEEE AET 160 RK ere E 161 TAG GS POA TEE 161 Tagger KE 161 Reeg e 161 Capture Length Auto Defines the Capture Length automatically according to the burst and pattern length set tings and the statistics count see Signal Description on page 150 Thus a minimal Capture Length is used which improves performance Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth AUTO on page 300 157 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DEENEN Configuring VSA measurements Capture Length Defines the capture length in symbols or seconds if not defined automatically Capture Length Auto The sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth are di
68. K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 b ee rr ru SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM SEAR BURS CONF AUTO ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 163 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt GLENgth MINimum lt MinGapLength gt This command defines the minimum time between two bursts A minimum time with decreased level must occur between two bursts The default unit is a symbol The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MinGapLength gt numeric value Range 1 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS GLEN 3US Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 163 See Min Gap Length on page 163 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MAXimum lt MaxLength gt This command defines the maximum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that fall below this length The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt MaxLength gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1600 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS LENG MAX 156 us The maximum burst length is 156 us Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt LENGth MINimum lt UsefulLength gt This command defines the minimum length of a burst Only those bursts will be recog nized that exceed this length The defa
69. Manual 1176 7578 02 01 234 R amp S FSV K70 RE EN SS SS EEE ee N Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt power measurement for current sweep AVG Average of power measurement over several sweeps RPE Peak of power measurement over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of power measurement PCTL 95 percentile value of power measurement RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic 0OFFset lt type gt This command queries the results of the UO offset measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Origin offset error for current sweep AVG Average origin offset error over several sweeps RPE Peak origin offset error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of origin offset error PCTL 95 percentile value of origin offset error RST PEAK Query only 235 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee see e L ci R mQsaq CALCulate subsystem Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor type This command queries
70. Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 11a b g j n e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chapters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 6 R amp S FSV K70 Preface 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The
71. O1 00 00 00 00 Fig 3 11 Result display for Symbols in binary mode If a pattern search is active a found pattern is indicated in the symbol table as well SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM SYMB to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Error Vector Magnitude EVM Displays the error vector magnitude as a function of symbols or time EVM t SE with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 The normalization constant C is chosen according to the EVM normalization By default C is the mean power of the reference signal C x Eiern and T duration of symbol periods Note that k 0 5 n T for Offset QPSK with inactive Offset EVM Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 89 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF Start 0 0 sym Stop 148 0 sym Fig 3 12 Result display Error Vector Magnitude in normal mode Available for source types e Error Vector SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR VECT to define the required source
72. ON Example DISP WIND1 STAT ON Activates window 1 Mode VSA Manual operation See Screen X active on page 180 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 259 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 DISPlay subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on page 317 command Note that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps Manual operation S
73. Ref Level 4 00 d m a Att 16 dB Modulation Signal Description SGL BURST PATTERN Signal Type AEVM Continuous Signal e Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 us Max Length 148 sym 546 462 us Run In B sym 11 077 us Run Out 3 sym 11 077 us w Pattern EE 5 Start 13 sym Name 0 JPattem settings m w Offset 58 sym 214 154 us Description K Burst Length Offset Sup 1500 syiti Fig 6 9 The red circle shows the place where you can specify a pattern Solution Select an existing pattern or create a new pattern that you expect to be within the signal For more information see e Signal Description on page 150 chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range A pattern can only be found if it is entirely within the result range Therefore this error message always occurs with a Pattern Not Found error Solution Choose the pattern as reference of your result range alignment Then the pat tern will be forcefully part of your result range and the pattern search can succeed For more information see e Result Range on page 169 e chapter 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range on page 186 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fail The R amp S FSV performs the pattern search in two stages e Stage 1 involves the generation of an I Q pattern wavefo
74. Result Range E g is our burst actually larger Increase the Result Range to at least 8xModulation Order 2256 WENN o back to Do you transmit uncor related random bits on the physical level s your Result Range large than 8xModulation Order e g 8x4 32 for QPSK no Hard to find the origin of the problem It might be that Your DUT suffers from massive impairments Your DUT suffers from a severe symbol rate error The adjacent channel power is very high Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 348 R amp S FSV K70 Support no From 1 Frequently Asked Questions Is your yes no signal bursted oes your signal contain pattern Does this pattern matter to you E g do you want to align your result to the pattern or check whether the pattern is transmitted correctly Does your signal consist of ranges with different modulation types no keen 0000000000 zi EDGE Teco 214 154 us Name yes Iv Offset v in the Si Make sure your Signal Type dialog is a Burst Signal Make sure the pattern is indicated in the Signal Description dialog ignal Description spen Steen Use the parameter Offset and Result Length in the Result Range Make sure the burst search is switch
75. Settings Signal Description Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw eT n Li KO LOE E B E i A i 120 dBm peg Start 0 sym Stop 3500 sym Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 162 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Configuring VSA measurements PUTO OOM ER 163 Meas only if burst was fouhid uncta POI Hte deeem Ede ENTE 163 Auto RHEIN ER 163 DE NS CIS NERONE 163 L Mir Gap e uo CNET 163 Auto On Off Enables or disables burst searches If Auto is selected burst search is enabled only if Bursted Signal is selected in the Signal Description tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 151 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO on page 301 Meas only if burst was found If enabled measurement results are only displayed and are only averaged if a valid burst has been found For measurements of burst signals that are averaged over several Sweeps this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE on page 303 Auto Configuration Configures the burst search automatically If enabled the Search Tolerance and Min Gap Length settings are not available Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO on page 301 Search Tolerance Auto Configurat
76. Symbols Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM MAGNItude Real Imag UO RIMag Vector UO COMP Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 250 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 RRE CALCulate subsystem Source Type Result Type Parameter Modulation Errors Magnitude Error MAGNitude Phase Error PHASe Frequency Error Absolute FREQuency Frequency Error Relative FREQuency Modulation Accuracy Bit Error Rate BERate Whether the result type shows absolute or relative values is defined using the DISP WIND TRAC Y MODE command see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 264 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Format gt MAGNitude PHASe UPHase RIMag FREQuency COMP CONS IEYE QEYE FEYE CONF COVF IQCorr RCONStellation RSUMmary BERate NONE Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the measurement signal CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase measurement CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects the spectral evaluation Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Type on page 181 CALCulate n FSK DEViation COMPensation lt RefDevCompensation gt This command selects the method for calculating the frequency error for FSK modulation Suffix n 1 4 Setting parameters lt RefDevCompensatioiON OFF RST ON Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence RELative lt FSKRefDev
77. TRACE key Press the ASCII Trace Export softkey Specify the file location to store the data to Select the Mode Trace If you only want to save the I Q samples of your capture buffer select RAW 76 7578 02 01 111 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 6 To include all your parameter settings select Header On 7 Select the format of the Decimal Separator 3 1416 or 3 1416 8 Press Save To export the data via remote control TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Example SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load GSM Normal Burst Standard INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Switch to single sweep mode INITiatel IMMediate Perform single sweep TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in screen D 3 2 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analy sis R amp S FSV K70 This chapter describes the softkeys available for the R amp S FSV K70 option e Softkeys of the VSA menu R amp S FSV K70 sse 112 e Softkeys of the Frequency Menu R amp S FSV K70 sese 114 e SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 sssssss 115 e Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu R amp S FSV K70 eee inen 121 e Softkeys of the Sweep Menu R amp S FSV K70 esencia 122 e Softkeys of the Trace Menu R amp S FSV KT70
78. The MARKER gt key displays the Marker To menu which contains the following soft keys US ELEME 135 Select Mkr and Trace 135 VE ENNIO 135 L Move Marker to Trace 135 GEdcH SEIT E 136 L Search Ditection uau eec ttti ta t dent sre Exe xc cde eb Ended 136 L Marker Real Marker mag 136 BE cocido CPP ERES 136 E E EUM 136 EE 136 Max PGK EE 136 Ee aca salted dan ahs cated det tntasaudeceaanatucataiecuanata sete ER 137 ld GE 137 Select 1 2 3 4 A Selects the normal marker or the delta marker and activates the marker A stands for delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 246 Select Mkr and Trace Opens the Select Marker and Trace tab of the Marker To Settings dialog box Marker Select Mkr and Trace Enables and defines the setting for the individual markers The marker value is defined in the x axis unit The selected marker can be moved to a specific trace using the Move Marker to Trace function Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 243 Move Marker to Trace Select Mkr and Trace Moves the marker selected under Marker to the trace selected here The marker changes to the selected trace but remains on the previous symbol Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 243 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 135 R amp S FSV K70 Instrume
79. UO Data The following sections describe the digital hardware used to capture UO data for vector signal analysis with the R amp S FSV K70 Block Diagram for RF Input The following block diagram provides an overview on how RF input is processed in the R amp S FSV K70 option Digital Down Converter 200 MSamples Clock Halfband Equalizer dowrsampling decmabon by factor 1102 2 n sampling rate 100 Hz to 45 MHz no BTO installed 100 Hz to 128 MHz B70 installed Fig 2 1 Block diagram of digital hardware for RF input in vector signal analysis After having passed several RF IF and filter stages the RF input signal is converted to an IF of 96 MHz and applied to an A D converter with a sample frequency of exactly 128 MHz The digitized signal is then routed through two ICs for resampling conversion of sample rate by a real factor and for filtering and decimation reduction of sample rate by an Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 10 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing integral factor An equalizer filter before the resampler compensates for the frequency response of the analyzer s analog filter stages which would otherwise add to the modu lation errors During operation the filters and decimation factors of the instrument are set so that a sample frequency is obtained at the output of the decimation stage whi
80. Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Y Axis Auto Range All Screens on page 122 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE Mode This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SvYySTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix n window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix n is irrelevant t irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 264 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Parameters lt Mode gt Example DISPlay subsystem ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS DISP TRAC Y MODE REL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Range This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all diagrams where possible Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Setting parameters lt Range gt Example Mode 1 4 1 6 irrelevant numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 100 Default unit NONE DISP TRAC1 Y PDIV 2 dB VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt Exam
81. a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch lt MarkReallmag gt This command specifies whether the marker search works on the real or the imag trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Setting parameters lt MarkReallmag gt REAL IMAG RST REAL Example CALC4 MARK SEAR IMAG Mode VSA Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Marker Real Marker Imag on page 136 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 242 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example C
82. a reference deviation error C is a carrier frequency offset in radians per second D is a frequency drift in radians per second per second Tis a timing offset in seconds and is a phase offset in radians Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 67 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis a SS SSE SSS SE M M Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors For the above phase model an equivalent frequency distortion model may be expressed as fois B fener t t fo fat with B is the scaling factor which results in a reference deviation error fo C 2 77 is a carrier frequency offset in Hz fo D 2 T7 is a frequency drift in Hz per second and Tis the timing offset in seconds The measured signal model in terms of the instantaneous frequency and all distortion parameters is given by l pon B feer ut dur fort V frt MEAS E emt gl e Ze n 2 6 2 2 Estimation The estimation of the distortion parameters listed previously is performed separately for the magnitude and phase frequency distortions as illustrated in figure 2 56 It is noted that the estimation of the timing offset is performed only on the frequency of the signal as the reference magnitude is assumed to be constant over the estimation range For details on the estimation range see chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 57 Compute Reference Waveform Estimate Timing Ref deviation Carrier offset Carrier drift
83. amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Ich Measurement Result Display Table 3 4 Available spectral displays depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag UO Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag UO Error Vector EVM Real Imag UO Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative For real input signals the spectrum between the frequencies 0 and symbol rate capture oversampling 2 is displayed for complex input signals REAL IMAG and Error REAL IMAG the spectrum between symbol rate capture oversampling 2 is displayed The input signal is subjected to a fast Fourier transformation FFT with 4096 points and the magnitude is calculated and displayed If the basic result display is too long the total length is divided into several subblocks of 4096 points each and the results are averaged The subblocks overlap each other by 25 of the block length In addition the input signal or the subblocks are evaluated with a FLATTOP window If the valuation range is active the FLATTOP window is also restricted to the area inside the evaluation lines Following the FFT the spectrum magnitude is calculated and dis played figure 3 19 an
84. are specified on the y axis the entered numeric values are dimensionless Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 1E 8 to 1 0 RST 1 0 Example CALC STAT SCAL Y UPP 0 01 Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See y Axis Max Value on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet lt FitOffset gt This command shifts the display range relative to the reference time by the number of given symbols The resolution is 1 symbol A value gt 0 results in a shift towards the right and a value lt 0 results in a shift towards the left Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters lt FitOffset gt numeric value Range 8000 to 8000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Example CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 5 The display range is shifted by 5 symbols towards the right Mode VSA Manual operation See Offset on page 171 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault Alignment This command defines where the relevant event reference point is to appear in the result range Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 255 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee eee ee CALCulate subsystem lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Alignment gt LEFT CENTer RIGHt LEFT The reference point is displayed at the left edge of the result range CENTer T
85. are using the I Q input Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 86 Measurement Result Display MSK QPSK B I Q Vector Meas amp Ref B I Q Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw M1 1 0 715 0 698 103 000 sym Stop 2 43 SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM COMP to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 14 Constellation Frequency The instantenous frequency of the source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal C Const Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Mi 1 249 5108 kHz 9 000 sym E Start 727 5 kHz Stop 727 5 kHz SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis BEE Measurement Result Display to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM CONF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 15 Vector Frequ
86. as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 272 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut
87. dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents e To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign e Todisplay a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed e Tochange to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics e To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys e To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 8 R amp S FSV K70 Preface How to Use the Help System Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Selectthe suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Setthe z
88. digital input via the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 327 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 329 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in s or in symbols offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggerna sweep time When using the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or I
89. gt Determines whether the EVENt bit of the associated status register for the result type contributes to the sum bit of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation register Each bit of the EVEN part is ANDed with the associated ENABle bit The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the event sum bit via an OR function Suffix n lt ResultType gt Setting parameters lt Mode gt Usage Mode 1 4 CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well Query only SCPI confirmed VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt NTRansition lt Mode gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the associated status register for the result type is changed from 1 to 0 the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix lt n gt lt ResultType gt Setting parameters lt Enable gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo M
90. gt This command sets the relative reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK mod ulation The reference is in relation to the symbol rate Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 251 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Setting parameters lt FSKRefDev gt numeric value Range 0 1 to 15 RST 1 Default unit NONE Mode VSA Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt FSK DEViation REFerence VALue lt FSKRefDevAbsResult gt This command sets the absolute reference value of the frequency deviation for FSK modulation Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters FSKRefDevAbsResultameric value Range The range depends on the symbol rate and has to be between 0 1 to 15 times the symbol rate RST 100e3 Default unit Hz Mode VSA Manual operation See FSK Ref Deviation on page 148 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the calculation of the statistical distribution of magnitude phase or frequency values on or off Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC STAT CCDF ON Switches the statistic measurements on Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 182 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE lt StatisticMode gt This command defines whether only the symbol point
91. gt it MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue on page 225 IQ Offset CALCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue on page 224 FSK modulation only Freq Err Rms LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy page 223 Freq Err Peak LCulate lt n gt it MACCuracy page 223 Magnitude Err Rms CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue on page 223 Magnitude Err Peak CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue on page 223 FSK Dev Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue on page 223 Carr Freq Err CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy CFERror CURRent VALue on page 221 Check Current Mean Peak Config ModAcc Limits Considers the defined limit value in the limit check if checking is activated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe on page 219 se Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 139 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 12 Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S FSV K70 The INPUT OUTPUT key displays the In Output menu which contains the following softkeys SIGMA SOURCE m E 140 eil dc NN c 140 L Connected Davite esee reete cte ska der nu 140 L Input Sample Hate 140 L Full 1r MEMINI 141 Ue E EE 141 L Adjust Refe
92. in GSM In case the pattern is short or the pattern does not have good synchronization properties e g a pattern that consists of only one symbol that is repeated this parameter should be set to Data Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 176 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Note In previous versions of the R amp S FSV K70 application this setting was referred to as Use Pattern For Sync The former setting True corresponds to the new setting Pattern The former setting False corresponds to the new setting Data If Auto mode is selected the detected data is used Data Default the detected data is used for synchronization i e unknown symbols Pattern Known symbols from a defined pattern are used for synchronization Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO on page 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe on page 305 Fine Synchronization In addition to the coarse synchronization used for symbol decisions a fine synchroniza tion is available to calculate various results from the reference signal e g the EVM However when the signal is known to have a poor transmission quality or has a high noise level false symbol decisions are more frequent which may cause spikes in the EVM results To improve these calculations the reference signal can be estimated from a smaller area that includes a known symbo
93. instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 7 R amp S FSV K70 Preface How to Use the Help System The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and general help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help
94. is only available if Known Data is selected for Fine Synchronization You can define a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data Thus if a wrong file was mistakenly loaded or the file proves to be unsuitable it is not used for synchronization Otherwise the results would be strongly distorted If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 289 Measurement Filter The Measurement Filter tab contains the settings for the measurement filter In addition a link to the Modulation Settings tab of the Modulation and Signal Description Set tings dialog box is provided see Modulation on page 146 A live preview of the trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly For details on measurement filters see chapter 2 2 6 Measurement Filters on page 17 The Measurement Filter tab is also displayed when you select the Demod Meas Fil ter softkey in the Meas Config menu see Demod Meas Filter on page 132 3 Demodulation amp Measurement Filter Measurement Filter Measurement Filter Auto according to TX Filter 0 3 Related Settings Modulation Settings IZQ Constellation Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 3 51 Stop 3 51 Operating Manual 1
95. lt startstop gt 1 2 Irrelevant Setting parameters Auto ON OFF ON The evaluation range extends from the start value defined by CALC ELIN1 VAL to the stop value defined by CALC ELIN2 VAL see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 248 OFF The complete result area is evaluated RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Entire Result Range on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue lt LeftDisp gt Defi ines the start and stop values for the evaluation range see CALCulate lt n gt ELIN startstop STATe on page 248 Suffix n 1 4 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 248 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem lt startstop gt 1 2 1 start value 2 stop value Setting parameters lt LeftDisp gt numeric value Range 0 to 1000000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Mode VSA Manual operation See Start on page 172 See Stop on page 172 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Feed gt Selects the signal source to be displayed Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Feed gt XTIM DDEM MEAS XTIM DDEM REF XTIM DDEM ERR MPH XTIM DDEM ERR VECT XTIM DDEM MACC XTIM DDEM SYMB TCAP XTIM DDEM MEAS Measured signal XTIM DDEM REF Reference signal XTIM DDEM ERR VECT Error vector XTIM DDEM ERR MPH Modulation errors XTIM DDEM MACC Modulation accuracy XTIM
96. more information refer to chapter 2 5 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 52 e chapter 2 5 2 I Q Pattern Search on page 51 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 54 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Pattern Symbol Check ze Symbol Decisions Result Range Pattern Start as Detected by the IQ Pattern Search Check for all Rotated Versions of the Pattern QPSK Modulation with Gray Mapping H Rotated versions of the Mapping IO Meas Symbol Decisions 273 0 0 1 3 2 Passed on to HADIR Reference Signal Generation 1 0 3 3 2 0 1 Rotated versions of the Pattern 012 111 3 2 0 Fig 2 45 Pattern Symbol Check algorithm 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors This section describes the signal and error models used within the R amp S FSV K70 VSA option The estimation algorithms used to quantify specific modulation errors are then outlined The chapter is divided into two parts 2 6 14 PSK QAM and MSK Modulatton sese nme nnns 56 K DN NEE ele EE 56 20 1 2 Tue EE 57 2 0 1 3 Modulation Errors ee eer gt ce tee cr baee obo ee cokes siaaueesedeeadis 58 2 6 2 FSK TE EE 65 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis DEE Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors 26241 Error MOGI EE 67 26 22 EStimMmatioN miseen anna aa a a 68 2 0 2 3 Modulation tte E 69 2 6 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulati
97. ms e e be e em mm ms mr d e zm ms mr e zm cb ms wm mm a ms mr ee e mm mm sc be mm mm mm mr d e mm mm e ei Amman em mmm eben de mmm ee Aas e e mm mm le e e mm e e be mm mm mm ms de e zt kg Se BI Hece 8p apnpube DEET See eee eee eee EEEEERN 80 14 16 1 6 1 2 04 06 O86 0 2 100 Frequency in feymbol ISI Filters Low The following frequency responses are obtained when using a low ISI measurment filter and the Transmit filter indicated in the title of each diagram Formulae APCO25 CAFM q 4 2 2 pBp 2 2 24 2 2 22 2Bp 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2 2p 2 22 24 20 D D D D D 4 1 D 1 D D D E 1 D 1 D 1 D 4 D D D D D D 4 1 D 1 J 1 D 1 D D D 4 D 1 D 1 D 4 D D 1 D D D D 4 D D D M B 2 2 2 2 2 24 pBp 2 224 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 24 R 20 gp apnyiubeyy deber wm wm mm d a mm pel wm wm wm mm mm wm wm wm mm wm wm dore mm wb wm wm wm wm dor 40 GO ei SE EE e 80 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 fsymbol Frequency in D8P SK Narrow APCO25 H q 4 2 pBp 2 2 2 2Q4 2 2 2 22 B 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2p 2 2 2 4 20 8p apnyufeyy 42 22 22 qe BR K E i S A0 H 7 ae e 80 04 06 08 0 2
98. n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the UO imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 233 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem lt none gt IO imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average UO imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak UO imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of UO imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of UO imbalance error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor type This command queries the results of the magnitude error measurement of digital demod ulation Suffix n m Query parameters type Usage Mode 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt magnitude error for current sweep AVG Average magnitude error over several sweeps RPE Peak magnitude error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of magnitude error PCTL 95 percentile value of magnitude error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer lt type gt This command queries the results of the power measurement of digital demodulation Operating
99. numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon Table 3 8 ASCII file format for VSA trace data export File contents Description Header Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 45 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 206 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Further Information File contents Screen A Description Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Y axis reference value Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Data section Trace 1 Trace number Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace x unit sym Result mode Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 691 Number of measurement points 10000 10 3 15 7 10130 11 5 16 9 10360 12 0 17 4 Measured values lt x value gt lt y1 gt lt y2 gt lt y2 gt being available
100. nzLlMirMACCuracvGTATe eene nn rnnt rn ren h nnne nnns 219 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracv HResutfvpez LimitfvpesSTATe reene eroree ennn 219 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType2 RESUIt sss 220 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvCFERror CURRentVAl ue 221 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 217 CALCulate subsystem CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvCFERrorMEAN VAL ue 221 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvCFERror PEAKVAL ue 221 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue eeeseseseseeeee eene 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue essent 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue seessseeees eese enne entrent 222 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracvEVMRCUbRrentVAl ue nennen 222 CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvEVMRMEanVAL ue 222 CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvEVMRPESakKVAL ue 222 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALUC ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeeeeneneees 222 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvFDERrorMEAN VAL ue 222 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvFDERror PEAKVAL ue 222 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue essere 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue sese 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue sess 223 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvFERRorbRCUlbrentVAl ue rennen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue cesses 223 CA
101. of Vector Signal Analysis mmm d A H n mic Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors where g and gq are the gain of the inphase and the quadrature component and 6 rep resents the quadrature error The UO imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the UO imbalance does not affect the EVM Note that the I Q imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal Amplitude Droop The decrease of the signal power over time in the transmitter is referred to amplitude droop o E 2 T ji Magnitude of Meas Signal relative CH O 1 e N i 1 L 0 50 100 150 200 Time Symbols Fig 2 53 Effect of amplitude droop Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 62 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis b M M Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Gain Distortion Table 2 20 Effect of nonlinear amplitude distortions Amplitude distortion analyzer Nonlinear distortions amplitude distortion transmit ter Gain Distortion Traesmater 08 E D 0 D r d 4 2 08r OS f e 2 04 s 03 e a 02 H Ea ER 1 C 4 7 C 04 05 06 O ry Rea Gain Distortion Analyzer 07 g 066p 05 4 4 E 3 04 E o3 4 e D 0 01 s
102. on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a marker The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode if necessary To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix n Selects the measurement window m Selects the marker Return values Result The measured value of the selected marker is returned Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 133 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 135 4 3 4 Other CALCulate commands GA Gulat em TE 247 CALCulatesnms iDDEM SPECtr ti STATE DEE 247 CALCulate ns EEIN amp startstop S TAT6 iiec iecur inttr ea ka Genser 248 CALGulatesns ELINsstartstop VALue erre nine enin rtr RR nne n nn 248 egets FEED MM MD 249 EE Eege eege deeg d ree rb geg 250 CAL Culate nzF kDEViaton COMbensation eene snnt nnns 251 CALCulate n FSK DEViation RE terence REI ative nenne 251 CALOCulate n FSK DEViation REFerence VALue eee 252 CALCulate n STATistics CCDF STATe eicere eter RER anaE iaa 252 GALGulate n STATisl
103. online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all available options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is installed on the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the
104. only in continuous sweep mode Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 131 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 2 9 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 For details on the available settings see Q Capture on page 156 Config Pattern Displays the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box see Advanced Settings on page 166 Burst Pattern Search Displays the Burst Pattern Search dialog box The Burst Search tab contains the settings for burst searches A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined evaluation ranges see Evaluation Range on page 171 The preview area is not edit able directly The Pattern Search tab contains the settings for pattern searches For details on the available settings see Burst Search on page 162 and Pattern Search on page 164 Range Settings Displays the Result Range tab of the Result Range Evaluation Range dialog box A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box For details on the available settings see Result Range on page 169 and Evaluation Range on page 171 Demod Meas Filter Displays the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box The Demodulation tab contains the setting
105. only with detector AUTOPEAK and containing in this case the smallest of the two measured values for a measurement point SS ee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 207 R amp S FSV K70 4 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 4 12 4 13 4 14 4 15 4 1 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Notation Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 This chapter lists and describes all remote control commands specific to this software application For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the correspond ing subsystem in the base unit description Notation A ae EEA 208 ABORI Subsystem irca Eaa aE 211 CALCulate SUDSY Ste IM i 0 cccccictecccecesiiteceeneeesidienenevesicteeseentedcieceeeeesbitedeeeeestcteeseeeeeneoeen 211 CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem ce eeeceeeeee eee eeeteeeeee eee eettaeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeaaas 211 CALCulate LIMit MACCuracy subsvstem eee 217 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem nennen nennen 225 Other CALCulate commande 246 DISPlay SUDSYSt M N 258 FORMat s bsystem crie reete iie rrnd eite IER ER RIED Y EENS 268 INITiate Subsystem rire eroi euer itera e nete erue tnra rt rione irai ana irn 269 INPUt SUDSYSte Mics 271 INSTrument Subsystem essere nnne nnne nnne inneren nennen nnn 277 MME Mon Subs
106. produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAN LEFT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value to the left of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Search Direction on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the marker to the next smaller trace maximum Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 239 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Peak on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions a marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e in ascending X values If no next smaller maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX RIGH Positions marker 2 to the next lower maximum
107. screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Min Value see y Axis Min Value on page 118 3 Enter the lower limit in the current unit 4 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Max Value see y Axis Max Value on page 118 5 Enter the upper limit in the current unit The y axis is adapted to display the specified range Probabilities of occurrence loca ted outside the display area are applied to the bars at the left or right borders of the display To restore the default scaling settings 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Default Settings see Default Settings on page 118 The x and y axis scalings are reset to their default values Managing standard settings files Various predefined settings files for common digital standards are provided for use with the VSA option In addition you can create your own settings files for user specific meas urements For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter 2 4 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 41 To load predefined settings files 1 In the VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Load Standard 2 Inthe file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings you want to load To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 192 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal An
108. screen configurations All available configurations are displayed in the Predefined tab The current screen configuration is indicated under Current at the top of the list R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Display Configuration x Predefined A MagRel Meas amp Ref B Result Summary C Mag CapBuf D Symbol Table FSK typical configuration A Freq Error Rel B Result Summary C Mag CapBuf D FreqCons Meas amp Ref MSK typical configuration A Phase Error B Result Summary C Mag CapBuf D Freq Error Rel Add Opens an edit dialog box to enter a name for the current screen configuration The con figuration is then stored and added to the list Apply Applies the currently selected configuration from the list to the current display Remove Removes the currently selected configuration from the list Restore Restores the default Display Configuration Existing settings with the default names are replaced 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range You can define which part of the source signal is analyzed Result Range with refer ence to the captured data a found burst or a found pattern You configure the result range and evaluation range settings in the Result Range and Evaluation Range dialog box in the Settings Overview see also chapter 3 3 1 4 Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings on page 169 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 186
109. sesenta 125 e Softkeys of the Trigger Menu R amp S EGVKROO 128 e Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu R amp S FSV K70 seen 131 e Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S FSV K70 seem 132 e Softkeys of the Marker To Menu R amp S FSV K70 esee 135 e Setting Limits Softkeys of the Lines Men 137 e Softkeys of the Input Output menu R amp S FSV K70 sess 140 e Softkeys of the Save Recall Menu R amp S FSV K70 eese 143 e Available Context Menge zeegt renidet erret e Fabio E otio EENEG 144 3 2 1 Softkeys of the VSA menu R amp S FSV K70 The VSA menu provides basic functions for vector signal analysis For information on configuring VSA measurements see chapter 3 3 Configuring VSA measurements on page 145 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 112 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 The following softkeys are available in the VSA and MEAS menus SOO LENS CVI VIO sie T 113 Didka Stata ra TE 113 L E EE 113 L Save E E ME 113 L D lete i EE 113 L Standard Defatilke tumori ae ttis eR ud ts bon ilUs 114 L Restore Standard Fil amp s cse tratta tte tt tra ae na denn 114 Geer Foldet Aas ett 114 RI GOMNG EE 114 Ee le E 114 L Restore Standard Elles esee nne 114 L Restore Patter
110. softkey in the base unit description Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Manual operation See Free Run on page 129 See External on page 129 See IF Power Baseband Power on page 129 See Trigger Mode on page 159 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 330 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 Ech 9 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument e g information on errors or limit violations which have occurred This infor mation is stored in the status registers and in the error queue The status registers and the error queue can be queried via IEC bus In this section only the new and altered status registers bits for the VSA option R amp S FSV K70 are described Detailed information on the status registers of the base system is given in the section Status Reporting System in chapter 5 of the Operating Manual on CD Description of the Status Registers In addition to the registers provided by the base system the following registers are used in the VSA op
111. symbols CALC TRAC ADJ TRIG Defines the capture buffer as the reference for the result range Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 188 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deeg Configuring VSA measurements CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT Aligns the result range to the left edge of the capture buffer CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG OFFS 1 Defines an offset of 1 symbol from the capture buffer start DISP TRAC X VOFF 1 Defines the symbol number 1 as the capture buffer start 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling Depending on the type of display time spectrum or statistics various scaling functions are available to adapt the result display to the current data Scaling functions are located in the Ranges submenu of the Amplitude menu see chapter 3 2 3 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 115 3 3 3 1 Scaling Time and Spectrum Diagrams The range of the displayed y axis for time and spectral diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the range size reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value and a position at which this value is to be displayed on the y axis 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Y Axis Reference Value see Y Axis Reference Value on page 116
112. the R amp SGEx UO Box External Signal Interface Module Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital output to a connected device Transmitter Type RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 141 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument The SupportSave df1 file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later Remember to set the sweep mode to Single Sweep beforehand as Continuous S
113. the scale of the horizontal axis is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt PDiv gt numeric value numeric value Example DISP TRAC X PDIV 20 Sets the scaling of the Y axis to 20 DIV Mode VSA Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See X Axis Range on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RPOSition lt RPos gt This command defines the position of the reference value for the X axis Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 261 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El DISPlay subsystem Setting the position of the reference value is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt RPos gt numeric value lt numeric_value gt Example DISP TRAC X RPOS 30 PCT The reference value is shifted by 30 towards the left Mode VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue lt RVal gt This command defines the reference value for the X axis of the measurement diagram Setting the reference value of the x axis is possible only for statistical result displays All other result displays support the query only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt RVal gt numeric value Referen
114. the selected trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt m gt 1 4 Usage Event Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 212 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee see e L ci R mQsaq CALCulate subsystem Mode all CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is acti vated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum The cor responding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MAX NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next smaller maximum value Manual operation Se
115. through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncritical spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero has in fact limited significance but still influences the result of the current frequency measure ment Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 92 R amp S FSV K70 3 1 1 21 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Freq Error Abs MH I II Mr Fig 3 15 Result display Frequency Error Absolute in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Frequency Error Relative Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modulated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals FREQ _ERR FREQ uras FREQgep t with t2n T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defin
116. to the analyzer with a USB device for example The program can be downloaded together with a detailed description as a precompiled MATLAB file MATLAB pcode on the Internet at http www rohde schwarz com search term FILTWIZ Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 19 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Rohde amp Schwarz Filter Wizard Version 1 5 WS zl xl File operations Tools Display File name MyFilter vaf r Time domain Load Save Save as Exit Analytic design C Time domain Highlight Conv TX RX C Frequency domain Description File info j ser specific filter mm 0 035 RRC alpha 0 22 L 10 ISI_LSNR 16 5 dB 0 03 0 025 0 02 0 015 hit 0 01 tin T symbol Fig 2 6 FILTWIZ filter tool for the R amp S FSV K70 It is possible to load customized transmit filters and customized measurement filters If a customized transmit filter is selected the internal receive filter coefficients are calculated automatically on the fly Note that this is different to the R amp S FSQ K70 where it is necessary to also transfer a user receive filter If you upload a customized transmit filter and leave the measurement filter set to auto matic the internally calculated receive filter will be used as measurement filter Note that this filter is not necessarily suitable for your specific signal The filter is opti
117. tool during recording e Analyzed Sequences number of data sequences analyzed since the tool was started e Different Sequences number of unique sequences detected in the measured data e Last New Sequence Found time that has passed since the most recent unique sequence was found e Throughput current data processing speed of the tool Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 201 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis BREET Configuring VSA measurements Note that while the tool is running the R amp S FSV is set to remote mode i e the manual interface is not available As soon as the tool is closed the remote mode is automat ically deactivated 5 When all known possible sequences have been found or when a significantly large amount of time has passed so as to assume no more sequences will be found stop the tool by selecting Stop 6 e fthe results are acceptable select Store for K70 to store a valid xml file with the recorded data sequences on the instrument A file selection dialog box is displayed in which you can select the storage location and file name You can also add an optional comment to the file e Otherwise reset the tool to start a new recording possibly after changing the demodulation settings or input data 7 Close the tool window to return to normal operation of the R amp S FSV K70 application The created xml file can now be loaded in the R amp S FSV K70 application as descr
118. type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 18 Magnitude Error Displays the magnitude error of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time MAG _ ERR t MAG gs MAG pep t with tzn T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 90 3 1 1 19 Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input Fig 3 13 Result display Magnitude Error in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Phase Error Displays the phase error of the measuremente signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time PHASE _ERR t PHASE yas t PHASE pep t with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample
119. useful part of the burst in the signal description see Offset on page 152 and align the result to the pattern the Symbol Number at amp lt Reference amp gt start refers to the first symbol of the useful part of the burst not the first symbol of the pattern Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe VOFFset on page 263 Evaluation Range In the Evaluation Range tab you define which range of the result is to be evaluated either the entire result range or only a specified part of it The calculated length of the Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 171 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Configuring VSA measurements specified range is indicated beneath the entries The selected evaluation range is dis played in the visualization area A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range E X Evaluation Range Evaluation Range E Entire Result Range O sym 148 sym Start 3 0 sym Stop 89 75 sym Length 87 0 sym 321 231 us Visualization Entire Result Range If enabled the entire result range is evaluated Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe on page 248 Start Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is started The start symbol itself is included in the evaluatio
120. which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description Boolean This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 numeric value num These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 210 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 1 ABORt Subsystem e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value e DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e UP This keyword increments the parameter value e DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by add ing the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotatio
121. with Pattern Searches on page 194 Further pattern settings are located in the Pattern Search on page 164 dialog box see chapter 3 3 1 3 Burst and Pattern Search Settings on page 162 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern on page 311 Pattern Settings Displays the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box see Advanced Settings on page 166 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 151 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Offset The offset of the pattern is defined with respect to the start of the useful part of the burst see also the note in Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 151 If the position of the pattern within the burst is known it is recommended that you define the offset That will accelerate the pattern search and enhance the accuracy of the burst search Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe on page 313 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OF FSet VALue on page 313 Known Data In the Known Data tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box you can load a file that describes the possible data sequences in the input signal see chapter 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files on page 199 Additional information provided by the loaded file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box This information is not editable directly Modulation amp Signal Description amp DI Known Da
122. with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage lt 1 4 gt TYPE VIDeo LINear i Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well 0 Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions
123. 0 ciscctedccccssesdscadecstvanecedacescvedeadsdecestdaneededeass 323 STATus QUESTonable SYNCGENABBle 5 2 e petet neutre derer sien 323 STATus QUEStionable SYNG NTRansIllon i cerei natn NEES ESEAEEEENE EENEG 324 STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition 2 ci ccessea esee nube enean nk aka pcnc r noA da dann 324 HR eeh d le Ch KE 324 STATus QUEStionable CONDition This command queries the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable register This part contains the sum bit of the next lower register This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Readout does not delete the contents of the CONDition part Example STAT QUES COND Mode all Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 318 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem STATus QUEStionable EVENt This command queries the contents of the EVENt part of the STATus QUEStionable register The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading itis the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it Example STAT QUES Usage Query only Mode all STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt ENABle lt Enable gt Determines whether the EVENt bit of the STATus QUEStionable MODula
124. 0 833 kHz Start 2 0 sym 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz ResLen 158 Input RF 6 1M Cirw Stop 2 0 sym Fig 3 8 Result display Eye Diagram Real I in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM I EYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACI El E to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 9 Eye Diagram Imag Q The eye pattern of the quadrature Q channel the x axis range is from 1 to 1 symbols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 83 R amp S FSV K70 3 1 1 10 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 158 Input RF SGL 1M Clrw 0 737 63 000 sym Stop 2 0 sym Fig 3 9 Result display Eye Diagram Imag Q in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM QEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 E
125. 00 01 00 01 O1 O1 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 oi 00 01 00 01 01 00 00 01 E 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 01 01 CAEDE 00 01 01 01 00 Start ERIK 00 01 01 00 00 Fig 3 25 Coupled markers in screens A B and D Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 238 Link Mkr1 and Delta1 The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1 so if the x axis value of the marker 1 is changed the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x position The link is off by default You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 212 Marker to Trace Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be placed Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m TRACe on page 243 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 134 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 2 10 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 All Marker Off Switches all markers off It also switches off all functions and displays that are associated with the markers delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 226 Softkeys of the Marker To Menu R amp S FSV K70
126. 01 345 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Messages Solution e Ifthe signal contains a pattern set Coarse Synchronization Pattern see Coarse Synchronization on page 176 Example measurement of a GSM EDGE pattern that has a length of 26 symbols C Mag CapBuf i Crw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 d m 60 d m Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 13 03 2010 08 21 13 8 1M Clrw 20 dBm 40 dBny 60 dBm Start 0 sym Stop 200 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 12 03 2010 08 21 35 Fig 6 11 User Pattern for Sync On e Choose a longer Result Range e Ifthe signal is bursted and the bursts are short Make sure your Result Range comprises the entire burst Make sure that Run In Out is not chosen too large since the Run In Out ranges are excluded from the synchronization e Ifthe signal is bursted and contains a pattern Only switch off the burst search if absolutely necessary If you need to switch it off align your Result Range to the pattern make sure it does not exceed the burst ramps and choose Continuous Signal as the Signal Type in the Signal Descrip tion dialog For more information see e chapter 2 5 Demodulation Overview on page 47 Message Sync Prefers Longer Pattern This message can only occur if the coarse synchronization is data aided i e is based on a known pattern In case the pattern is very short pattern bas
127. 100 kg Frequency in APCO25 H DEPSK Wide DH DH D D See eee eee ee eee eee ee eee 20 D D D 1 D 4 D D 1 D D 1 4 D D 1 1 D D 4 D D 1 D D D 4 D D D 1 D J 1 D D D D D 4 D 1 1 D D L ee ee gp apnyiubeyy eee ee ee EE KETTER KL A 80 04 06 08 0 2 100 f ymbol Frequency in Formulae APCO25 H CPM D D See eee eee eee eee eee ee eee 20 e 2 j 2 bR Jd 1 4LB 4 eee eee tee ee ee DEET EE Jg Pessac gp apnyiubeyy de shades niin dodi Jee Mitis icc acci eet deer eendeiteg dace viet 80 100 12 14 16 18 kp 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in APC 025 H DQPSK q 4 2 pBp 2 2 2 2Q4 2 2 2 22 Bp 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 22 24 2 2 2 2 2p 2 2 2 4 20 DH DH DH eee eee eee eee ee TTT D D D DH D D D 1 1 D D D 4 1 D 1 D D 1 4 D D 1 D 1 D 4 D 1 D D D D 4 1 1 D D D J 1 1 D D 1 D D 4 D 1 D 1 D 4 D 1 D D D D DH DH D DH D DH DH r AL wm zm wm zm sl e zm sm zm ss zm wb a wm wm zm mm zm d a mm zm zm mm zm sa zm wm zm dh ss a wm zm mm mm zm sl mm zm mm zm zm ss kb e zm zm mm zm mm d a mm zm mm mm FETT D D D DH r VU H H 1 1 1 D 1 ee c N DU 100 8p apnyufeyy 0 8 04 06 0 2 fsymbol Frequency in
128. 1101 1100 0100 0110 1111 1110 0101 0111 Fig 2 32 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexadec imal and binary 11010 11110 01011 01111 Fig 2 33 Constellation diagram for 32QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexadec imal and binary Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 36 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping e e e e 001000 001001 001101 001100 e e e 001010 001011 001111 001110 H H e 000010 000011 000111 000110 H H H 000000 000001 000101 000100 Fig 2 34 Constellation diagram for 64QAM including the logical symbol mapping for DVB C hexadec imal and binary the binary form shows the upper right section of the diagram only D D D D 0011010 0011011 0001011 0001010 H H H H 0011000 0011001 0001001 0001000 D D H D D H 0010000 0010001 0010101 0010100 0011100 0011101 D D D D D D 0010010 0010011 0010111 0010110 0011110 0011111 H D H H D H 0000010 0000011 0000111 0000110 0001110 0001111 D D D D D D 0000000 0000001 0000101 0000100 0001100 0001101 Fig 2 35 Constellation diagram for 128QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary the figure shows the upper right sections of the diagram only Fig 2 36 Constellation diagram for 256QAM including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal the figure shows the upper right section of the diagram only Operating Manual 1176 7
129. 116 See Y Axis Reference Position on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value The command defines the power value assigned to the reference position in the grid When using a tracking generator this command requires active normalization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 266 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 DISPlay subsystem Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 dB coupled to reference level Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 20dBm Defines a reference position of 20 dBm Manual operation See Ranges on page 116 See Y Axis Reference Value on page 116 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale Manual operation See Units on page 119 See Y Axis Unit on page 119 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Suffix n Selects the measurement window Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2
130. 176 7578 02 01 175 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis BEE Configuring VSA measurements Offset EVM The offset EVM is only available for Offset QPSK modulated signals Unlike QPSK modulation the Q component of Offset QPSK modulation is delayed by half a symbol period against the component in the time domain The symbol time instants of the and the Q component therefore do not coincide The offset EVM controls the calculation of all results that are based on the error vector It affects the EVM Real Imag and Vector UO result displays as well as the EVM results in the Result Summary EVM and MER You can select the way the R amp S FSV calculates the error vector results If Offset EVM is inactive the R amp S FSV substracts the measured signal from the refer ence signal to calculate the error vector This method results in the fact that the error vector contains two symbol instants per symbol period one that corresponds to the component and one that corresponds to the Q component If Offset EVM is active however the R amp S FSV compensates the delay of the Q com ponent with respect to the component in the measurement signal as well as the refer ence signal before calculating the error vector That means that the error vector contains only one symbol instant per symbol period Estimation Points Sym The estimation points per symbol affect and control synchronization of the signal Yo
131. 176 7578 02 01 178 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 3 1 6 Configuring VSA measurements DICH tcc EA dE 179 NET 179 Lg User PIE onc Edge 179 PERSE uoi Escudo duties D A E Cid 179 Auto The measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the Transmit filter specified in the Modulation tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Transmit filter Type on page 149 Note If a user defined Transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is cal culated and used Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO on page 291 Type Defines the measurement filter type if the Auto setting is not enabled An overview of available measurement filters is provided in table 2 4 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe on page 292 To turn off the measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 292 To define the name of the measurement filter Load User Filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined measurement filter to be used For details see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 19 Remote command SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME on page 292 Alpha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for Transmit filter is
132. 285 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm Manual operation See Settings on page 121 See Upper Level Hysteresis on page 122 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation Duration This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters Duration numeric value in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Manual operation See Settings on page 121 See Meas Time Manual on page 122 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSV determines the length of the measurement that is performed while determining the ideal reference level Parameters Mode AUTO Automatically determines the measurement length MANual Manual definition of the measurement length RST AUTO Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 284 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR MODE MAN Specifies manual definition of the measurement duration ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 Specifies the duration manually SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates aut
133. 2APSK 34 Selects the mapping DVB S2 32APSK 34 Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 315 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a SS SS SSS SS SS a M SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod UQAM NSTate This command returns the order of the active UserQAM Usage Query only Mode VSA SENSe FREQuency CENTer Frequency This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring frequency time domain Parameters Frequency Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax iS specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz Manual operation See Center on page 115 See Frequency on page 154 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz Manual operation See CF Stepsize on page 115 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command links the step width to the current standard ON or sets the step width entered using the FREQ CENT STEP command OFF see SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 316 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span Manual operation See Stepsize
134. 5 3 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register This register comprises information about any limit violations that may occur after demod ulation in any of the four windows It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CONDition on page 319 and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt on page 319 Bit No Meaning 0 Error in EVM evaluation Error in Phase Error evaluation Error in Magnitude Error evaluation Error in Carrier Frequency evaluation Error in UO offset or RHO evaluation Error in FSK evaluation These bits are not used Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 334 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register 5 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register This register comprises information about limit violations in EVM evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVM EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 5 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Regis ter Thi
135. 578 02 01 37 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping 2 3 9 User QAM In the case of a User QAM modulation the information can be represented by the signal amplitude and or the signal phase 16APSK 2 Mi 26 03 si B 9 l Fig 2 37 Constellation diagram for 16APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 16APSK mappings the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 depends on the utilized code rate and complies with table 2 17 Table 2 17 Optimum constellation radius ratio y linear channel for 16APSK Code Rate Modulation coding spectral y efficiency 2 3 2 66 3 15 3 4 2 99 2 85 4 5 3 19 2 75 5 6 3 32 2 70 8 9 3 55 2 60 9 10 3 59 2 57 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 38 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping 32APSK Fig 2 38 Constellation diagram for 32APSK including the logical symbol mapping for DVB S2 For DVB S2 32APSK mappings the ratio of the middle circle radius to the inner circle radius y R2 R1 and the ratio of the outer circle radius to the inner circle radius yz depend on the utilized code rate and comply with table 2 18 Table 2 18 Optimum constellation radius ratios y and y linear channel for 32APSK Code Rate Modulation coding Yi Y2 spectral efficiency 2 3 3 74 2 84 5
136. 6 e The current measurement is being performed on a burst that has not been captured completely 1Clrw ETA 01 04 2010 CD Ti 4 43 40 Start 0 sym Stop 3000 sym i 01 04 2010 CD CARD aas Fig 6 4 Example for measurement on complete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings or increase the result length Note however that in this case the results are actually correct and the message can be ignored e The settings do not match the signal Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 339 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Messages In order to allow you to select certain bursts the burst search only searches for bursts that have a length between Min Length and Max Length plus a tolerance that you can set in the Burst Search Dialog In case the burst is e g shorter than the Burst Min Length the burst search fails C Mag CapBuf 1Cirw _ s Modulation amp Signal Description Signal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 738 462 Max Length 300 sym 1 108 m Run In Gsym 511077 3 sym 11 077 Fig 6 5 Example for a failed burst search due too a burst that is too short Solution try one of the following Switch on the Magnitude Capture Buffer result display Move a marker to the start of the burst Move a delta marker to the end of the burst and compare the burst length to the settings in the Signal Desc
137. 6 7578 02 01 357 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Formulae 7 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations The following sections are provided for reference purposes and include detailed formulae and abbreviations Ft cR 358 e REENEN EELER E 372 7 1 Formulae race based Evaluar ceno m E ets 358 e Result Summary Evaluatons A 360 e Statistical Evaluations for the Result Gummanm A 363 race Averagifli EE 364 e Analytically Calculated Filters eese 364 e Standard Speciftc FEBES aee et tp nete torno aded e ee tdt tui eno ad rene Ld denn 365 7 1 1 Trace based Evaluations The trace based evaluations all take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Tp equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Test parameter Formula Error vector EV MEAS REF t Error Vector Magnitude EVM a EVM EV r EVM t with the normalization contant C depends on your setting By default C is the mean power of the reference signal c Xen T duration of symbol periods Magnitude Mag uras t MEAS o Mag grt REF Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 358 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviat
138. 8 02 01 187 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Example Defining the result range Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Result Range Length Result Length 26 042 us Result Range Alignment Reference 9 Capture C Burst C Pattern Waveform Alignment Left Center C Right Offset sym Symbol Number at Capture Start Visualization Fig 3 31 Example Defining the Result Range In figure 3 31 a result range will be defined for the first 100 symbols of the capture buffer starting at the second symbol which has the symbol number 1 the capture buffer starts at symbol number 1 the first symbol to be displayed is the second symbol due to the offset 1 1 2 The result range is indicated by a green bar along the time axis in capture buffer result displays see chapter 3 1 6 Result Ranges and Evaluation Ranges on page 108 Defining an Evaluation Range By default the entire result range is used for evaluation If necessary you can define an evaluation range that differs from the result range For example you can exclude the ramps of a burst for evaluation The used evaluation range is indicated in the result dis play For details see Evaluation Range on page 171 Remote control In order to define the result range via remote control use the following commands SENSe DDEMod TIME 100 Defines the result length as 100
139. 915M 600K ZIGBEE OQPSK 2450M 1M SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat Name Together with DDEMod PSK NST this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate on page 298 Depending on the demodu lation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe Format Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 297 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem NSTATe Format N3Pi8 Order 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt Name gt Example Mode Manual operation NORMal DIFFerential N3Pi8 PIED8PSK RST QPSK DDEM FORM PSK Switches PSK demodulation on DDEMod PSK NST 8 DDEM PSK FORM DIFF Switches D8PSK demodulation on VSA See Modulation Order on page 147 SENSe DDEMod PSK NSTate lt PSKNstate gt Together with DDEMod PSK FORMat this command defines the demodulation order for PSK see also SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat on page 297 Depending on the demodulation format and state the following orders are available NSTATe FORMat Order 2 any BPSK 8 NORMal 8PSK 8 DIFFerential D8PSK 8 N3Pi8 3pi 8 8PSK EDGE 8 PI8D8PSK Pi 8 D8PSK Setting parameters lt PSKNstate gt Example Mode numeric value RST 2 DDEM FORM PSK Switches P
140. AGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVEN bit is set 322 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee see EEE a ee mg r STATus QUEStionable Subsystem Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt PTRansition lt Mode gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the associated status register for the result type is changed from 0 to 1 the PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt ResultType gt CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Setting parameters lt Enable gt 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVEN bit is set Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition l
141. ALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 133 See Marker Norm Delta on page 133 See Select 1 2 3 4 A on page 135 See Select Mkr and Trace on page 135 See Marker on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix n Selects the measurement window m depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters Trace 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Marker to Trace on page 134 See Select Mkr and Trace on page 135 See Move Marker to Trace on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 243 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB sta tistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz
142. Auto is enabled most measurements use the current Capture Oversampling see SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 295 Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per sym bol manually see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 259 Suffix n 1 4 Setting parameters lt DisplayPPSMode gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example DISP WIND2 PRAT AUTO Queries the points per symbol mode Mode VSA R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El DISPlay subsystem Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 183 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue lt DisplayPPS gt This command determines the number of points to be displayed per symbol if manual mode is selected see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 258 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt DisplayPPS gt 1 2 4 8 16 or 32 RST 4 Example DDEM PRAT 8 Sets 8 points per symbol Mode VSA Manual operation See Display Points Sym on page 183 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command configures the measurement display Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Size gt SMALI LARGe LARGe diagram in full screen SMALI split screen diagram and table Mode VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe Active Activates deactivates the window specified by the suffix lt 1 4 gt Suffix n 1 4 Setting parameters Active ON OFF RST
143. Axis Reference Value Ranges Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference value for the y axis in the current unit The y axis is adapted so that the reference value is displayed at the Y Axis Reference Position Note The y axis reference value is maintained even if the Y Axis Range is changed Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 116 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Il Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 For details see chapter 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling on page 189 Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue on page 266 Y Axis Reference Position Ranges Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference position for the y axis as a percentage value where 0 refers to the bottom edge 100 refers to the top edge of the screen The y axis is adapted so that the Y Axis Reference Value is displayed at the reference position For details see chapter 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling on page 189 Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition on page 266 Y Axis Autorange Ranges Adapts the y axis to the current measurement results only once not dynamically in the focussed window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Y Axis Auto Range All Screens func tion For more information see e Y Axis Auto Range All Screens on page 122 Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn T
144. CFER PEAK VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 221 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean EVM peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC EVM RPE VAL 2 define a limit of 296 Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean center frequency deviation error Note that the limi
145. CPI confirmed Mode VSA Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 125 See Evaluation Meas Ref on page 127 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the default unit for angles Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Unit gt DEG RAD RST RAD Example CALC UNIT ANGLe DEG Selects degrees as the default unit Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME lt Unit gt This command selects the unit symbols or seconds for the x axis Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Unit gt S SYM RST SYM Example CALC X UNIT TIME S Sets the unit to seconds Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 257 4 4 DISPlay subsystem Manual operation See Units on page 119 See X Axis Unit on page 119 See Capture Unit on page 119 DISPlay subsystem DiSblavlfWiNDow nztPRATe AUTO 258 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALUG 2 0sec2hccestecdeccenecetesddeceseaentaccedaandidactacasnedtveeesed 259 DISPlayPWMNDoOwWsn SIZE 12er e Eudora true ees T EEEE ANETE E riaa 259 pISPlaypWINDowen S DAT ende citta eoe Pa spat ee renta ebrei debba saecla 259 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE cccecec na aaa aa rrr inniti nnns 260 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t STATe c ceceiieseieseseseeeee en iaa ananas seien nda 260 DISPlayDWINDow n ETRAGesteSYMBDOI oorr apnea iin aet 261 DiSbl
146. Carrier drift Modulator UO Carrier offset i Compensate Auras Timing Gain Fig 7 1 Reconstruction of the reference and measured I Q waveforms for FSK modulation Note that a reference deviation error is corrected in the reference frequency trace This ensures that the frequency deviation in the measured frequency trace corresponds to that of the originally measured signal With respect to the I Q reconstruction the mea sured magnitude is timing compensated using the timing offset estimated from the mea sured instantaneous frequency This ensures that the measured magnitude and fre quency remain synchronized in the reconstructed UO waveform 7 1 2 Result Summary Evaluations The evaluations for the result summary take place at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 This value can be one of the following e 1 only the symbol instant contributes to the result e 2 two samples per symbol instant contribute to the result e the Capture Oversampling rate see Capture Oversampling on page 158 all samples contribute to the result equally The results are determined by the evaluation range The sampling instants at this rate are referred to as t here i e t n Tp where Ty equals the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the Display Points Per Symbol parameter Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 360 R amp S FSV K70 Ann
147. Culate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the upper limit for the current peak or mean UO offset Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 200 0 to 0 0 RST 40 0 mean 45 0 Default unit dB Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC OOFF PEAK VAL 50dB define a limit of 50 dB Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean phase error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 360 RST 3 5 RMS 1 5 Default unit deg Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 224 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands
148. Current tab define limits that the current value should not exceed for any or all of the result types Note the limits for the current value are automatically also defined for the peak value and vice versa However the limit check can be activated individually for current or peak values 5 Select the Check option for each result type to be included in the limit check 6 If necessary define limits and activate the limit check for the mean values of the different result types on the Mean tab 7 If necessary activate the limit check for the peak values of the different result types on the Peak tab 8 Toreset the limits to their default values press Set to Default Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 204 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 1 Further Information 9 Select the Limit Checking On option or press the ModAcc Limits On softkey in the Limits menu The limit check is performed immediately on the current modulation accuracy mea surement results and for all subsequent measurements until it is deactivated The results of the limit check are indicated by red or green values in the result summary Further Information Trace Mode Overvlew nemen nnnnnnnnnnn a SEAE sss sese dada 205 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data 206 Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a mea
149. DDEM SYMB Symbol table TCAP Capture Buffer Example Switch to EVM CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR VECT CALC FORM MAGN Switch to Meas Signal Frequency Relative CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS CALC FORM FREQ DISP WIND1 TRAC1 Y SCAL MODE REL Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 249 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Manual operation See Trace Wizard on page 127 See Evaluation on page 127 See Source on page 181 CALCulate lt n gt FORMat lt Format gt This command defines the result type of the traces Which parameters are available depends on the setting for CALC FEED see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 I Table 4 2 Available result types depending on source type Source Type Result Type Parameter Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Real Imag I Q RIMag Frequency Absolute FREQuency Vector UO COMP Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute MAGNitude Magnitude Relative MAGNitude Phase Wrap PHASe Phase Unwrap UPHase Frequency Absolute FREQuency Frequency Relative FREQuency Real Imag I Q RIMag Eye Diagram Real I IEYE Eye Diagram Imag Q QEYE Eye Diagram Frequency FEYE Constellation UO CONS Constellation UO Rotated RCON Vector UO COMP Constellation Frequency CONF Vector Frequency COVF
150. DDEMeod TEIEter USER oic e otue sais non au roe aaa aa res n n EEn asap dune ndn 315 NIT a RT E 315 E El e Ke el EE 315 SENS DDEMOC UQAM NST etre rM TTE 316 SENSE enee 316 SENSe F REQuency EEN ee HERE eieiei eene 316 SENS FREQ ency CENTSESTEPIAUTO 1 2 e sdk EEEE E n EAEE Enaaak 316 SENSe FREQuency OFF Seliani aaa aiaa aa a a aii aaa 317 SENSe SE enCOUNVAL ue 317 SENSe SWEGp CODNEGCUIRBRDBFIL icini es epe dae pute pa dada d lane ne deu sane sd teued cusam a Dua enhn 317 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer Threshold This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed See SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 285 Parameters Threshold Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm Manual operation See Settings on page 121 See Lower Level Hysteresis on page 122 SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer Threshold This command defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed See SENSe ADJust LEVel on page
151. DEMod P k N Tate ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat cett ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ct SENSe DDEMod QAM NSTAate tette ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat estt ttt ttt ttt ttt ott SENSe DDEMOod RLENGth AUTO ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt ot SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue ett ttt ttt SENS DDEMOHSEANQ euo ases enmt cauce ccm cai ot i en uad pe ette dd SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSEtAUTO ctt ttt ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSEGLENGth MINimum ette 302 ISENSelDDEMod SEARch BURSCLENGgn Maximum 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSELENGth MlNimum ect 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSEMODE ctt ttt ttt tto 303 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSESKIP FALLing ect 303 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESKIP RISing ettet 303 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSESTATe ttt ttt ttt ttt ctl 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance ettet ttt 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO ettet ttti 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO cccccsssssesssssssesssssseessssssessssuvessssisessstieessssteessssussssseessen 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe tetti 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO ettet ttt ttt ttt tto 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATAalog ettet
152. EL Tamarkercmz MiNimumNENT senes nenas 214 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimumf DEA 215 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 215 CALCulates lt n gt DELTamarkenam S PATe cantado ncn eat dde enne anaiai innana aaa 215 CAL Gulate mns DEETamarkeremes2 TRACE 1 12 erret ENEE AE Payne aa EE E 216 GALGulate n DELETamarkeremo X 2 aciei eae reden ka kenn eed e RAS RRRR NAT ee ARA ER ENEE 216 CALCulate n DELTamarker m X ABSolute 2 sseeesssssssesssssesee essen enses nnns 216 CALCulatesmsDEETamarkerem oCRELaliVe 1 ee aset nnana ihanaa 217 GALE GulatesnsDEETatmarker mo 2Y EE 217 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all active delta markers off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT AOFF Switches off all delta markers CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt 1 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON Manual operation See Link Mkr1 and Delta1 on page 134 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum APEak This command positions the active marker or deltamarker on the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of
153. F Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 329 Trigger Offset Unit Toggles between symbols and seconds as the trigger offset unit Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 130 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 8 Softkeys of the Meas Config Menu R amp S FSV K70 The Meas Config menu provides functions for measurement configuration SUNOS VSP VIIa AEeeeE BEE honda ened e dee dE Mediate 131 Modulation Signal Description io iet eterne tpe ec dee epe RE des quea 131 elle TT 131 HELG Ir MERE 131 Conia cu M 132 BUISY PAN BET 132 Range Settings PR E 132 Demods Moas EE 132 Bie ydo rs A 132 Settings Overview Displays the main settings overview that visualizes the data flow of the Vector Signal Analyzer and summarizes the current settings In addition the Settings Overview dialog box provides access to the individual settings dialog boxes and allows you to restore default values For details on configuring the measurement and a description of the individual dialog boxes see chapter 3 3 1 Settings Overview on page 145 Modulation Signal Description Opens the Modulation Signa
154. I Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 C4FM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H CPM Rectangular filter combination without ISI APCO25 H DQPSK Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI EDGE Wide Pulse Shape EDGE HSR Wide Pulse standard specific filter filter combination with ISI User Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination with low ISI Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 15 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters are shown in the table above they can be set in the R amp S FSV using Meas filter AUTO see Auto on page 179 If RC raised cosine RRC root raised cosine and Gaussian filters are used the Alpha RC RRC filters or BT Gaussian filters parameters must be set in addition to the filter character istic roll off factor Typically the Alpha BT value of the measurement filter should be the same as that of the transmission filter For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of the signal not th
155. INDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 260 Clear Write Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Max Hold Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 125 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Min Hold Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals a
156. INt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 128 See Export on page 144 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 268 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 INITiate Subsystem FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt Header gt This command defines if an extended file header including start frequency sweep time detector etc is created or not A short header with the instrument model the version and the date is always transferred Setting parameters lt Header gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FORM DEXP HEAD OFF Only a short file header is transferred Mode VSA Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 128 See Export on page 144 FORMat DEXPort MODE lt Mode gt This command defines whether raw UO data or trace data is transferred Setting parameters Mode RAW TRACe RST TRACe Example FORM DEXP MODE RAW Raw measurement data is transferred Mode VSA Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 128 See Export on page 144 4 6 INITiate Subsystem INI Tiatesmn el 269 INITIale sp CONTIDUDUS 2r aene cioe aane geesde 270 INITlate nzfiMMedatel nene nnnn sentir irt rt rti re eren nnns 270 INi iate E EE 271 INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is resta
157. K modulated signals an estimation algorithm is used in order to obtain estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier frequency error phase error IQ offset gain imbalance quadrature error and the amplitude droop Alternatively it is pos sible to disable the estimation algorithm For FSK modulated signals estimates for the signal amplitude signal timing carrier fre quency error FSK deviation error and the carrier frequency drift are calculated The measurement signal is subsequently corrected with these estimates Compensation for FSK deviation error and carrier frequency drift can be enabled or disabled For more information on synchronization see e chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 57 e Demodulation on page 173 Result Display The selected measurement results are displayed on the screen s Configuration of the screens can be performed via the Display Configuration dialog see chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 179 A more detailed description of the most important stages is given in the following sections Burst Search The burst search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped It is recommended that you switch the burst search on if the signal is bursted This ensures that all internal estimators are operated in time ranges where the burst power ramping is up In order to eliminate amplitude variations caused by noise or the modulation itself the instanta
158. K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Setting parameters lt LimitState gt Example Mode Manual operation CALCulate subsystem ON OFF Activates a limit check for the selected result and limit type RST OFF CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR VAL 100 Hz define a limit of 100 100 CALC2 LIM MACC CFER CURR STAT ON switch limit check ON VSA See Config ModAcc Limits on page 137 See Current Mean Peak on page 138 See Check on page 139 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt RESUIt lt LimitResult gt This command queries whether the limit for the specified result type and limit type was violated Suffix lt n gt lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 window CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PER Ror RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only FERRor Frequency error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCUR Rent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent
159. LCulate lt n gt BERate on page 247 Normal Time Symbol Displays Normal displays show the results in the time domain or as symbols Table 3 3 Available time symbol displays depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag UO Frequency Absolute Vector UO Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative PE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 101 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Measurement Result Display Source Type Result Type Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag UO Eye Diagram Real I Eye Diagram Imag Q Eye Diagram Frequency Constellation UO Constellation UO Rotated Vector UO Constellation Frequency Vector Frequency Symbols Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM Real Imag UO Vector UO Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative Modulation Accuracy Result Summary Bit Error Rate BER 3 1 3 Spectral Displays Spectral evaluations can be carried out for all result displays that show the time or sym bols on the x axis CH Note that the spectrum is only calculated over the evaluation range Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 102 R
160. LOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue sseseseseseeeee eren 223 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracv MERbRor PC UbRrentVAl ue 223 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracv MERbRor PMEanVAL ue 223 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracv MERbRor PPEakVAL ue nnne 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue eese 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue sees 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue essen 223 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALUGC cceeceeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaaneeees 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VAL ue 224 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracvOOFtsetrbEAkKVAL ue enhn 224 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracv PtERborbCUlbrentvVAl ue rennen 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PMEan VALue essere 224 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy PERRor PPEak VALue seseseseseseee eene 224 CAL Culate nzLlMirMACCuracv PtERborRCURrentVAl ue 224 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy PERRor RMEan VALUG ccccceeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeeaeaeeeeenenetenes 224 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracv PERbRorRPEakVAL ue eese 224 CAL Culate nzLIMirMACCuracvRHO CURRentvVAl ue 225 CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvRHOMEAN VAL ue 225 CAL Culate nzLIMIrMACCuracvRHOPDEAK VAL ue 225 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault Restores the default limits and deactivates all checks in all windows Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irreleva
161. M Abker mzMAximum HIGH 240 CAL Culate nzM Abkercmz M ANimum PDEAKT nennen nnn 240 CAL Culate nz M Abkerzmz MiNimum LEET 241 CAL Culate nz M Abkermz MiNimumNENT essen enean ennt s se sese aa as 241 CALCulate n MARKer m MlINimum PEAK eeeessseessseesesenne nennen nen 241 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt sentes nsns na ns 242 CALGCulatesm MARKersm SEARGh i ii idee tein ent deed dde emn EERddEE NAR ARRA RATE deas 242 E e E RN EE 243 GALGulate lt n MARKErsM gt TRACE oniinn inana E a a ai ia E aaa Ei 243 CAL Culate nz M Abkercmz NA 243 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm XS lMitslGTaATel erener ererneororssnrnnnnnnenene 244 CALCu late lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SGLUIMeLEFT nennen nennen nennen nns 244 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzX GLIMmebRIGHT sesenta sns nn nsns 245 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzX GL lMts Z0O0OM sese enn nsn ete ets se sese na s 245 CAE Dulatesns LEE 246 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Manual operation See All Marker Off on page 135 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop lt type gt This command queries the results of the amplitude droop error measurement performed for digital demodulation The
162. Magnitude Absolute Magnitude of the source signal the actual signal amplitude is displayed Mag vas IMEAS o with t n Tp and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 Available for source types Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 75 Measurement Result Display e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 1 Result display Magnitude Absolute in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS I to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM MAGN to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 325 3 1 1 2 Magnitude Relative Magnitude of the source signal the signal amplitude is scaled to the ideal reference signal Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal R amp S FSV K70 3 1 1 3 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF 1M Cirw Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 2 Result display Magnitude Relative in normal mode SCPI commands CALC
163. MoSMFIEteE USER oot leeks dA ceded AEE Dee EEN Ee enr Rr rhon 293 SENSe DDEMOQ MSK FORMEI gege gehae ed Segelen aee ue ee EES 293 SENSeEDDEMod NORMalize ADROOD si ic sescdecteaeseinusieresaventetdccdcanesadetcasdavestadiadadiasa 293 I SENSeT DEBEMod NORMalize CFBINIIE 1 21er ecoute cree Ere epe Dao onte eet amer nets bene rmn uci 294 SENSeE DDEMod NORMalize FDER IO 2 22 o cnadcu tu ineo nonae Re a toque deed 294 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance eesesessseseeeese eene nnne 294 SENSe DDEMo Nr Te EE e el E 294 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALUue erinnere eie iter aaia 295 SENSeFODEMOQ PRATO c Ls 295 SENSeE DDEMOS PRESSUGALGO EE 295 SENSe DEBEModIPIRESSUREEWVOL oireann eara i trie eene Sed eel 296 SENSe DDEMod PRESet S TANdard cce tettte t nens 296 SENS DDEMOd P SIEORMIAlb recen oreet epo tacere eu RED Ie cnce ae PER Ri ride Roh 297 SENSeEDDEMod PSI NS Tale epu cor euo tia a Rb Een Lex Fa a aad DUE ES aaa 298 I SENS amp EDBEMOd QAM FORMAL eiue rr Reiter EA eee trage LR dece vas 298 SENSej DDEMOod QAM NS Tate ececucceesckus cuc ue ethernet eu pen hn ERR Ra Dun e aaa Dn niania andaian ia 299 SENSeEDDEMod QPSK FORMA naini tite ptit ad aee e Etude tene Ree Rec Tene nade a aea Ide RAE 299 I SENSe F DBEModIREENGgIhiAL TQ inire euo te tegere repere nee etui n pron uui ve vec 300 SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue cecencntee te
164. NCtion DDEMod STATistic F DERror sss 229 CAlCulate cnzMAbker mzFEUNGionDDEMod SGSTATsncEGkCEDRU eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeneteneeeeeees 230 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERROr eene 230 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation eese 231 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic F SK RDEViation CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance essen 233 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QIMbalance 00 2 eee eeceeeeeeeeneeteneeeeneeees 233 CALOCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERROr eee 234 CAL Culate nzM Abker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATlsttc MbOWer 234 CAL Culate nzM Abker mz FUNGCion DDEMod GTATlsttcOOFFset 235 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor CAlCulate cnzMAbker mzFEUNGionDDEMod SGSTATieticOERRorg 236 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO essent 237 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR essen 238 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK nennen nenne nn Nana eaaa AEA aa S ssi KE EASE EARE Eii CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAximum APEak nnne CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz MAvimum NENT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM RIGHL 0 0 2 cee eeeee eee eeeee
165. NDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO on page 258 Oversampling Defines the sample basis for statistical evaluation This setting is only available for the Result Type Transformation Statistics Configuring VSA measurements Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF A ebben 6 1M 92M B Stat FreqAbs Meas 69 iM 92M a a 95 rA 76 d Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 562 kHz Start 101 562 kHz Stop 101 56 562 kHz C FreqAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw nh ah de he me h AUT poari La M UD ee 1 1 T ol lt Start 0 sym Stop 148 sym Fig 3 30 Statistics measurement Screen C measured signal symbols highlighted Screen A statis tics for all trace points Screen B statistics for symbol instants only Symbols only Statistics are calculated for symbol instants only See screen B in Statistics measurement Screen C measured signal symbols highlighted Screen A statistics for all trace points Screen B statistics for symbol instants only Infinite Statistics are calculated for all trace points symbol instants and inter mediate times See screen A in Statistics measurement Screen C measured signal symbols highlighted Screen A statistics for all trace points Screen B statistics for symbol instants only auto currently not used Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE on page 252 Predefined You can store and load predefined
166. NSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO lt FineSyncAuto gt If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Setting parameters lt FineSyncAuto gt ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 288 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 177 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel lt SERLevel gt This command is only available if SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE KDAT was per formed It defines a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in reference to the analyzed data If the SER of the measured data exceeds this limit the default synchronization using the detected data is performed Amaximum SER level of 0 means that the file is only used if the measured data is identical to one of the specified data sequences Setting parameters lt SERLevel gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 100 0 RST 10 0 Default unit PCT Mode VSA Manual operation See If SER lt on page 178 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult This command queries whether a loaded Known Data file was used for fine synchroni zation or not If a maximum symbol error rate was specified using the SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel command and exceeded the file is not used Return values lt Usage gt ON 0 The Known Data file was not used do
167. O een nnea en ennns rnnt setenta seitens nnn rnt sn nn nnns nnn CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlexvBCOunt ener enne etras entrer stern sinn nnns r nnn CAL CulatecnzGTATlsticeGCAlevLOwWer nennen ennt nrnnr inn rents irren nnn nen tss nnne CAlLCulate cnz GTATlstceGCAlevUNT there neret nennen nennen ein Eia Earn iaia CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UPPer CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet nennen nennen nnne 255 CALOCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment DEFault seen 255 CAL Culate cnz TR ACectADJustVAl ue 256 CALCulatesn gt iTRAGEStH VALUS E 256 CALCulate n UNIT ANGLe CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME DiSblautWINDowenstPRATe AUTO DISPlayWINDow n PRATe VALue ttt DISPlayWINDow n SIZE ett ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt oct DiSblautWlNDowensl T fe ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt told DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t MODE cnt ttt ttt ttt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SYMBol DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t X SCALe PDlVision ett 261 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RPOSition stt 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RVALue tt ttt 262 DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t X SCALe STARt stt ttt 262 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe VOFFset ettet 263 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing DISPlayWINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe
168. Offset ssssssssssssseeneen Grid Abs Rel remote control 264 Left Limit remote control E m Limits On Off remote Control Link Mkr1 and Delta1 sees Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control n i Manual remote control sse Marker 1 remote control ssessssssss Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker 2 remote control ssesssssss 215 Marker 3 remote control sssssssss 215 Marker 4 remote control z t Marker Norm Delta eese Marker Norm Delta remote control 215 Marker to Trace remote control 216 Meas Time Auto esse 122 284 Meas Time Manual eee 122 284 Min as 137 Min remote control sesssesss 215 241 Next MIM iocur ette tede e ea 137 Next Min remote control 214 241 242 K NT 136 Next Peak remote control 213 214 215 239 240 241 242 EE 136 Peak remote control suussss 213 240 R amp S Support Range Lin Unit remote control 267 Range Linear 96 remote control 267 Range Log remote control Reference Position remote control 266 Ref Level Offset remote control Ref Level Positi
169. PSK With differential PSK the information is represented in the phase shift between two con secutive decision points The absolute position of the complex sample value at the deci sion point does not carry information In the physical constellation diagram the constellation points at the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation are shown as with common PSK methods This diagram corresponds to the display on the analyzer The position of the constellation points is standard specific For example some QPSK standards define the constellation points on the diagonals while other standards define the coordinate axes In table 2 5 the symbols are assigned to phase shifts The QPSK INMARSAT mapping corresponds to simple QPSK with phase differential coding Tables table 2 6 and table 2 7 show two types of differential BPSK modulation Another type of differential PSK modulation is shown in table 2 6 Differential coding according to VDL is shown in table 2 8 It can be used for modulation types with 3 bits symbol e g 8PSK Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 26 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis REENERT Symbol Mapping Other types of modulation using differential coding method are described in chapter 2 3 4 Rotating Differential PSK Modulation on page 28 Fig 2 19 Constellation diagram for DQPSK INMARSAT and NATURAL including the symbol mapping Table 2 5 DQPSK INMARSAT
170. Points per Symbol entr rrr t ee rena neca 176 E RA DP CE 57 Evaluation RAIN EE 172 Range remote control Ixange display delia rne emere a eadera 109 Ixefreshilig aoreet eraa e pena Ren Haa inda Ree a 123 Uc c beet 127 Evaluation Meas Ref Remote control nce rte repara 256 cnl 127 EVM R sult Summary rere eer rrt ente 95 EX IQ BOX EE DIGI COM EE Export VQ data remote mme 278 UE 144 eodein p HU 206 Exporting VQ data remote mme 279 UO data format remote sesseesssse 279 External cll M E 129 Eye Diagram Frequency Ixesult TY DG dese e a etas 84 Eye Diagram Imag Q Ixesult TY DO terr e rit Crete tenure nats 83 Eye Diagram Real I Ixesult type s ccr Red Eeer 82 F Filters Activating remote control 287 292 314 Alpha BT remote control Customized Selecting remote control Fine Synchronization ssssssssssee 177 Folders NOW 114 Free Run iic M AN 129 frequency MUI 115 Frequency iecuc R EM 115 ere EE 154 Frequency Absolute Result type i c tres 79 Frequency Error Absolute Result type inner eorr eser re ires 92 Frequency Error Relative Result type der ric es EE 93 Frequency Relative Result tyDO i2 cnr rr rr rri 80
171. Press the PRINT key again and then press the Print Screen softkey If you selected Print to file a file selection dialog box is opened Specify the file location for your screenshot and press Save store a screenshot via remote control HCOP DEV LANG BMP Selects the data format HCOP DEST MMEM Directs the hardcopy to a file EM NAME C R_S instr user Print bmp Selects the file name If the file Print bmp already exists it is replaced HCOP Saves the hardcopy output into the file Print bmp To save the I Q data to a file and reload it You can store the captured UO data to a file and reload it on the instrument again later 1 2 3 4 5 6 To Select a window that displays I Q data Press the SAVE RCL hardkey and then the Save softkey Define a file name for the data file Select IQ Data from the list of items to be stored Press Save to close the dialog and store the data to the file To load the data again later press the SAVE RCL hardkey and then the Load soft key Select the file name with the stored data d 1 extension export the trace data in ASCII format The R amp S FSV can save your results as plain text in a text file 1 a Bo N Operating Manual 11 Close all screens that are not relevant for your measurement results by disabling the Screen X active option in the Display Config dialog see also Screen X active on page 180 Press the
172. QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register eeeeeeennnenn 334 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register eene 334 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register essss 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register 335 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 336 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 336 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register 336 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register 337 SUPPO e 338 Explanation of Error Messagges eene nnne nnn 338 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting eere nnne nennen 347 Frequently Asked Questions cccccssssecccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaeseeeesneneaaeseeeeseeeeaaaes 349 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations ecce 358 Formulae rH HEU EE DELE UE DELE ee ieee ee Ree eu 358 le iE ri b Ert iE ins 372 List of teuer 374 j de 381 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 4 R amp S FSV K70 Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface When equipped with application firmware R amp S FSV K70 the analyzer performs vecto
173. R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual Start 0 sym Sep 1500 sym Start O sym Stop 200 sym Done 4 r a Y 1176 7578 02 01 Test amp Measurement Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options e R amp S FSV K70 1310 8455 02 This manual describes the following R amp S9FSV models with firmware version 2 0 and higher e R amp S FSV 4 1321 3008K04 e R amp S FSV 7 1321 3008K07 e R amp S FSV 13 1321 3008K13 e R amp S FSV 30 1321 3008K30 R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K39 e R amp S FSV 40 1321 3008K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV K70 Contents
174. R amp S FSV K70 Deeg CALCulate subsystem Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC PERR RPE VAL 1 9deg define a limit of 1 9 deg Mode VSA CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy RHO CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy RHO PEAK VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the lower limit for the current peak or mean Rho limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1 0 RST 0 999 mean 0 9995 Default unit NONE Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC RHO PEAK VAL 0 995 define a limit of 0 995 Mode VSA 4 3 3 CALCulate MARKer subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt sceckaeccececskaedeccaseaeeaccceadesetaddcctiadidaacsensageaceees 226 CAL Culate nzM Abkermz FUNGCHonDDEMod STATlste ADboop nenene 226 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL cccsccccesseceseeceeeeeeees 227 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc CFEbror 227 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepe EVM 228 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepcF Ebror 229 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod S
175. RAC OFF see DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t STATe on page 260 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 126 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis i a a UN NN Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Evaluation Meas Ref Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Defines whether the trace displays the evaluation of the measured signal or the reference signal if Meas amp Ref Signal is used as the signal source see Source on page 181 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue on page 256 Trace Wizard Opens the Trace Wizard dialog For each trace you can define a Trace Mode and an Evaluation type Alternatively you can configure several traces in one step using the predefined settings Trace Wizard Screen B xj Trace Trace Mode Evaluation Trace 3 pta Iesse Trace 4 Blank Meas Ref Trace 5 Blank Trace 6 lank d sst pt Ref CH TER Select Select TER Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min Trace Mode lt Trace Wizard Defines the type of display and the evaluation of the trace Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Average View Blank For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 4 gt Lae Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Evaluation
176. RACe t Y SCALe AUTO VALue on page 264 Ranges statistic measurements Opens a submenu to define the display range for statistic displays see Result Type Transformation on page 182 X Axis Quantize Ranges statistic measurements Defines the number of bars to be displayed in the graph i e the granularity of classifi cations Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt on page 254 X Axis Reference Value Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog field to define a reference value for the x axis in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe RVALue on page 262 X Axis Range Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog field to define the x axis range in the current unit Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision on page 261 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 117 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 y Axis Max Value Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog box to define the upper limit of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCAL
177. Ranges SOUEEN age E de 116 Softkey statistic measurements 117 Softkey Symbol Table 118 Range Settings SOMK CY i reet oet tiere dee 132 Real Imag I Q PRESUIE type ace rrr eere eee tenentes 81 beca 15 Recording tool ler une CC 201 Reference IXesult range sospiro CNEL 171 Reference filter erre retener rt trennen 15 Reference level Iur 121 Offset RF Settings eem 155 Reference Level NIC e HM 141 En EE 116 154 Restore Factory Settings Ee 114 Restore Pattern Files ie 114 Restore Standard Files Cj 114 Result ranges ett Ton aieo t vere E ee tetro reci te Alen die Defining D 2 IRC e RE Offset iu Overlapping serinati 347 Reference EH 171 SGEIOCUNG E 124 Results SAVING EAE m 110 Result Summary ResUlt type sssini andaa ttes 94 Result type 5r iio HH Ere EE eet pre gs 74 Result types Display Configuration 181 OVGrVIGW uisaute eie ain eed en o na genet Transformation Result type transformation sss 74 RF Attenuation RF Settings 323 nro rr ede 155 RF Preamplifier B22 sss 119 155 RF Settings Attenuation Mode c cceeecceee ceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeees 155 EL Attenuation EE 156 T le EE Input Coupling Reference Level A Ref Level Offset A RF Attenuation E ges Rotating PSK e REEEE RRG TEE RX Settings
178. Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COPY lt Pattern gt This command copies a pattern file The pattern to be copied must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 Tip In manual operation a pattern can be copied in the editor by storing it under a new name Setting parameters Pattern string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COPY GSM PATT Copies GSM TSCO to GSM PATT Usage Setting only Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA Data This command defines the sync sequence of a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 Important The value range of a symbol depends on the degree of modulation e g for an 8PSK modulation the value range is from 0 to 7 The degree of modulation belongs to the pattern and is set using the DDEM SEAR SYNC NST command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 309 For details on defining patterns see To create a new pattern on page 196 Setting parameters lt Data gt string Four values represent a symbol hexadecimal format The value range of a symbol depends on the degree o
179. S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Value gt RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all Manual operation See RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual on page 119 See RF Attenuation on page 155 INPut ATTenuation AUTO State This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level Manual operation See RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto on page 120 See Attenuation Mode on page 155 INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 272 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 INPut Subsystem Example INP COUP DC Manual operation See Input AC DC on page 121 See Input Coupling on page 155 INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optiona
180. SK demodulation on DDEMod PSK NST 8 DDEM PSK FORM DIFF Switches D8PSK demodulation on VSA SENSe DDEMod QAM FORMat lt Name gt This command defines the specific demodulation mode for QAM Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 298 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem The current firmware release of the R amp S FSV K70 does not support Differential QAM Setting parameters lt Name gt Example Mode Manual operation SENSe DDEMod NORMal DIFFerential NPI4 MNPI4 RST QPSK DDEM FORM QAM Switches QAM demodulation on DDEM QAM FORM NPI4 Switches Pi 4 16QAM demodulation on VSA See Modulation Order on page 147 QAM NSTate lt QAMNState gt This command defines the demodulation order for QAM NSTate Order 16 16QAM 16 Pi 4 16QAM 32 32QAM 32 Pi 4 32QAM 64 64QAM 128 128QAM 256 256QAM Setting parameters lt QAMNState gt Example Mode numeric value RST 16 DDEM FORM QAM Switches QAM demodulation on DDEM QAM NST 64 Switches 64QAM demodulation on VSA SENSe DDEMod QPSK FORMat Name This command defines the demodulation order for QPSK FORMat Order NORMal QPSK DIFFerential DQPSK Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 299 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ma
181. SK measurement deviation RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the reference deviation of FSK modulated signals Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK measurement deviation RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 232 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 LEE EEE eee CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance lt type gt This command queries the results of the Gain Imbalance error measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Gain imbalance error for current sweep AVG Average gain imbalance error over several sweeps RPE Peak gain imbalance error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of gain imbalance error PCTL 95 percentile value of gain imbalance error RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt
182. Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 3 2 6 Softkeys of the Trace Menu R amp S FSV K70 The TRACE key displays the Trace menu which contains the following softkeys Context sensitive menus for traces Traces have context sensitive menus If you right click on a trace in the display or a trace setting in the information channel bar or touch it for about 1 second a menu is displayed which corresponds to the softkey functions available for traces Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace Bilracep essen 125 e Aid EES 125 EN Cil NOCT 125 Ln TT WEE 126 GT EE 126 GEN 126 LINE o aU D ese xD M I E 126 L Evaluation Measleft tenter tete tenentes 127 ALT es crea V4 EEN 127 L Trace Modi E 127 L EE EG 127 L Preset All Traces trennen 128 L Select Mak Ava EMI EE 128 L Select Max ClrWrite Min 128 ASCI Trace E 128 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the active trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 and opens the Trace Mode submenu for the selected trace The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode the other traces are switched off Blank mode Not all measurement functions support all 6 traces For details see chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 Tip To configure several traces in one step press the Trace Wizard softkey to open a trace configuration dialog See also Trace Wizard on page 127 Remote command DISPlay W
183. TA on page 325 3 1 1 12 Constellation UO Rotated The complex source signal as an X Y plot As opposed to the common Constellation UO display the symbol decision instants including the rotated ones are drawn and not con nected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal This result type is only available for signals with a rotating modulation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 85 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Measurement Result Display C ConstRot I Q Meas amp Ref iM CIrw D Const I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 J Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 Fig 3 10 Result display Constellation I Q Rotated vs common Constellation I Q for 8PSK mod ulation SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM RCON to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 13 Vector UO The complex source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 are drawn and connected The scaling of the capture buffer is e relative to the current reference level if you are using the RF input e relative to the full scale level if you
184. TATistic FSK CFDRift ccccecceeee 230 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERROr 230 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation 231 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation 232 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance 233 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance 233 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepcMERbor 234 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer ccsccescceceeceeeees 234 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc OOFteset 235 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATiepc PERor 236 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzFUNGCHonDDEMod STATispc OERor 236 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzEUNGCHonDDEMod STATlepchRHO 237 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 225 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic NH 238 GALECulatesms MARKersm LUNK is c22 2sccc esacdsecdeessatoadaddewcasnsnedsdedetasstideddseudaantedideecenasas 238 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzMAximum AbDtak sese nn sensns nns 239 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEET 239 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT sese enn nsns te ens sa ash a aas 239 CAL Culate nz
185. The logical mapping diagram corresponds to the diagram for DPSK The physical constellation diagram shows the symbol decision points obtained after ISI free demodulation Fig 2 21 Constellation diagram for 77 4 DQPSK including the symbol mapping for APCO25 Phase 2 NADC NATURAL PDC PHS TETRA and TFTS the 77 4 rotation is already compensated for Table 2 9 7 4 DQPSK NADC PDC PHS TETRA Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 28 R amp S FSV K70 Table 2 10 7 4 DQPSK TFTS Logical symbol mapping Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis SS ES SSS SS SSS ue Symbol Mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 180 45 90 45 90 45 0 45 Table 2 11 7 4 DQPSK Natural Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 180 45 90 45 Table 2 12 7 4 DQPSK APCO25 and APCO25Phase2 Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 00 01 10 11 Phase shift 0 45 90 45 90 45 180 45 2 3 5 Offset QPSK Offset QPSK differs from normal QPSK in the fact that the Q component is delayed b
186. UE IFF gi i UIT 177 717 717 111 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 Data Data 77 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 IUE rt EXE IIT rt AVT Hr VET ILL 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 203 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deeg Configuring VSA measurements 241 264 773 111 337 446 514 600 67 lt Data gt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements The results of a modulation accuracy measurement can be checked for violation of defined limits automatically If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green B Result Summary EE CS te tho H oHset Limits and the limit check are configured in the Limits dialog box that is displayed when you press the Config ModAcc Limits softkey in the Lines menu see Config ModAcc Limits on page 137 To define a limit check 1 Configure a measurement with Modulation Accuracy as the Source in the Display Config dialog box 2 Press the LINES key on the front panel 3 Press the Config ModAcc Limits softkey in the Limits menu 4 Inthe
187. Ucs MODE 22 errorae reina e tea ene kane ke aa Rie ee Dee 252 CAL Culate nz GTATlstcebbRtzet sse ne ens sn seen ii ate nt sse senes aas 253 CAL Culate lt n STATisties SCAMEAUTO EE 253 GALGulate lt n gt STATistics SCALE X BCOUNK 2 00ccccscceneccedecaasecsdancecnessaeceuddcnnaacecandeneaae 254 CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexvLOWer asseessesssseessseee e nnn enne nn rss nnne na as 254 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 246 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CAL Culate nz GTATlstce GCAlexv UNITA 254 GAL Culate lt n STATIisties SCALEFY E GT 255 CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet esses esee nnnns 255 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADJuet AL GnmenttDEF au 255 CAL Culate nzTR ACectADJuetfVAL ue 256 CALCulate n TRAGCe t VALue eiecit tet anarian Eain Eiaa aa 256 GALGulate n UNIT ANGbLe renseigner nadar e oaa Rana kac peo qn eS Aax e aa Xr ena re EE 257 CAME HIE E MB IS onain anaiona aaaea aaa rE ataa T Eaa aa aa EE aa aaa aE E aia 257 CALCulate lt n gt BERate lt Format gt Queries the Bit Error Rate results The available results are described in chapter 3 1 1 23 Bit Error Rate BER on page 100 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Return values lt Format gt Specifies a particular BER result to be queried if no parameter is specified the current bit error rate is returned The parameters for these results are listed in tab
188. VDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Signal Source on page 140 See Connected Device on page 140 See Digital IQ Info on page 143 INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling State If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Signal Source on page 140 See Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level on page 141 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 141 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 274 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 b al a a INPut Subsystem Ex
189. WN Selects the standard TETRA_NCDOWN DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD TETRA S1 Adds the pattern TETRA S1 to the standard Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Add to Standard on page 167 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove This command deletes one or all patterns from the current standard Example DDEM PRES TETRA NCDOWN Selects the digital standard Tetra DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT REM pattern Removes the pattern pattern from the Tetra standard Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Remove from Standard on page 167 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect Select This command selects a predefined sync pattern file Setting parameters Select string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC SEL GSM TSCO Mode VSA Manual operation See Select Pattern for Search on page 166 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe lt PatternSearch gt This command switches the search for a sync sequence on or off Setting parameters lt PatternSearch gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DDEM SEAR SYNC ON Switches the sync search on Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 310 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SS SS SSS SS a n SENSe subsystem Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Pattern Search On on pag
190. adapted filtering Transmitter Filter Digital impulse shaping filter in sig nal processing unit of transmitter System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters System Theoretical Modulation and Demodulation Filters VSA Vector Signal Analysis Measurement at complex modula ted RF carriers TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 373 R amp S FSV K70 List of Commands List of Commands ABOR eset cE a CALC latesn gt E E CALCulate cnz DDEM SbECimuml STATel nennen enn nnn nen nnns ntn rnns stent sen nnnn nnn GALCulate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt AOFF iicet tetti and d e e ch e re ee ip eae dp dh CALCulate cnz D I Tamarker mz LINK ee ennnn ene nnns nennt sene nntr sin rnt s she rnt seni rn ts rna CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimMUM APEAK nennen enn rrnnn enn rent nnn CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mzMAximum LEET CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MAximum NENT CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum RIGHE sessssssssssssssessene eene enne enne ener CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum LEET CALCulate n DELTamarker m MINimum NEXT esses eene eene enne nnn sh nene rennes nnn CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNmmum HIGH CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MINimumg PEAK eese CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker l
191. adrature Err e Die Pattern Start 76 syr C Mag CapBuf Start 0 sym Fig 6 13 Solution Result Summary with correct evaluation range setting Make sure that the same samples are evaluated The EVM trace displays as default all sample instants e g if the Capture Oversampling is 4 the EVM trace shows 4 samples per symbol The Result Summary does not forcefully evaluate all sample Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 354 R amp S FSV K70 Support Frequently Asked Questions instants E g fora PSK modulation as default only symbol instants contribute to the EVM result Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm m t el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 100 SGL ResRange Count 0 Start 3 syiti C Const I Q Meas amp Ref Start 2 535 Mod Offset QPSK SR 1 0 MHz Y Settings Overview eiciw B Result Summary Mean Peak unit Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Amplitude Droop Biwer Stop ivy sym 1M Clrw D Vector I Q Error 1 Clrw Restore Factory Settings Stop 2 535 Start 0 254 Stop 0 254 TT Gal 12 03 2010 09 44 29 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSV K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR in R amp S FSQ K70 Solution The FSK deviation error in the R amp S FSV K70 is calculated as the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation on page 148 What is referred to as the
192. ained if the display output is switched off during remote con trol Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON 4 14 TRACe subsystem EE eege EELER 325 TRACe IQ WBANG STATe ccce tette tete test tot ons 326 TRACe lt n gt DATA Trace This command queries the trace data The data the R amp S FSV returns for each result display is as follows e Capture Buffer For the Capture Buffer result display the command returns the y axis values of the data that is stored in the capture buffer The number of returned values depends on the size of the capture buffer and the oversampling rate For example a capture buffer of 500 in combination with an oversampling rate of 4 would return 2000 level values The unit is dBm e Cartesian diagrams For cartesian diagrams the command returns the Y values of the trace only magni tude phase frequency real imag eye diagrams The number of returned values is the product of the Result Length and the Points per Symbol The unit depends on the unit you have set previously You can query the x value that relates to the first value of the y axis with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt on page 262 When querying the results for eye diagrams the results are merely superimposed in the display This means that the eye diagram result displays are the same as the real imag result display e Polar diagrams For polar diagrams the command r
193. al Source on page 140 See Input Sample Rate on page 140 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 275 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 INPut Subsystem If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all Manual operation See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 120 See El Attenuation ON OFF on page 156 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenu ation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all Manual operation See El Atten On Off on page 120 See El Atten Mode Auto Man on page 120 INPut EATT STATe
194. al is compared to a defined ideal reference signal The more precise the reference signal the more precise the results become In the best case the possible data sequences within the signal to analyze are known in advance and can be used to compare the measured data to This is similar to defining a pattern for the entire result range Thus a falsely estimated reference signal due to false symbol decisions is avoided and does not influence the error calculation As of firmware version R amp S FSV 1 70 you can load xml files containing the possible sequences to the R amp S FSV K70 application and use them to compare the measured data to In particular you can use known data for the following functions e Fine synchronization during the demodulation process see figure 2 41 and Demod ulation on page 173 Calculation of the Bit Error Rate BER see chapter 3 1 1 23 Bit Error Rate BER on page 100 3 3 7 1 Dependencies and Restrictions when Using Known Data When you use Known Data files as a reference some dependencies to other settings and restrictions for other functions apply Modulation Order The Modulation Order selected in the Modulation settings in the R amp S FSV K70 appli cation must correspond to the modulation order value specified in the xml file Modula tionOrder gt element Demodulation Demodulation using synchronization to the Known Data may increase the measurement duration as each detected symbol
195. ally Switches the filter on RST ON Example SENS DDEM TFIL STAT OFF Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 314 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Manual operation See Transmit filter Type on page 149 SENSe DDEMod TFiLter USER lt FilterName gt This command selects a user defined Transmit filter file Setting parameters lt FilterName gt The name of the Transmit filter file Example SENS DDEM TFIL NAME USER Defines the use of a user defined Transmit filter SENS DDEM TFIL USER D MyTXFilter Selects the user defined filter MyTXFilter Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod TIME lt ResultLength gt The command determines the number of displayed symbols result length Setting parameters lt ResultLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 10000 FMR 7 20000 FMR 9 depending on CPU board indicated in SETUP gt System Info gt Hardware Info RST 800 Default unit SYM Example DDEM TIME 80 Sets result length to 80 symbols Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Length on page 170 SENSe DDEMod UQAM FORMat lt Name gt This command selects the type of UserQAM demodulation Setting parameters lt Name gt string Name of the UserQAM demodulation Example DDEM FORM UQAM Selects user QAM demodulation DDEM UQAM FORM 32ary Selects 32ary user QAM name DDEM MAPP DVB S2 3
196. alysis Configuring VSA measurements 3 Press the Select button The dialog box is closed and the instrument is adjusted to the stored settings for the selected standard To store settings as a standard file This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 313 1 Configure the measurement as required See Settings Overview for help 2 In the VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Save As Standard 3 In the File Name field enter the name of the standard for which you want to store settings To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system To insert a new folder click the New Folder softkey and enter a name in the New Folder dialog box 4 Press the Save button The dialog box is closed and the current measurement settings are stored in a stand ard file To delete standard files 1 Inthe Digital Standards file selection dialog box select the standard whose settings file you want to delete Standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted To change the path press the arrow icons at the right end of the Path field and select the required folder from the file system 2 Press the Select button 3 Confirm the message to avoid unintentionally deleting a standard The standard file is removed from the folder To restore standard files gt Int
197. amp S FSV K70 d Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Note that the gain imbalance is not estimated and cannot be compensated for ina BPSK signal Preconditions for Gain Imbalance and Quadrature Error measurements The distortions gain imbalance and quadrature error can only be measured without ambiguity if the following two conditions are fullfilled e apattern is detected e the modulation is a non differential non rotating QAM or PSK Otherwise only the measurement parameter IQ Imbalance which is a combination of the gain imbalance and the quadrature error is significant Quadrature Error Quadrature 1 45 0 0 5 1 Inphase Fig 2 52 Effect of Quadrature Error The quadrature error is another modulation error which is shown in figure figure 2 52 In this diagram the and Q components of the modulated carrier are of identical amplitude but the phase between the two components deviates from 90 This error also distorts the coordinates In the example in figure figure 2 52 the Q axis is shifted Note that the quadrature error is not estimated and cannot be compensated for in a BPSK signal UO Imbalance The effect of quadrature error and gain imbalance are combined to form the error param eter UO imbalance iO e 89 ei Bin 7_ _ at e T So e Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 61 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description
198. ample INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Signal Source on page 140 See Full Scale Level on page 141 INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT lt Unit gt Defines the unit of the full scale level see Level Unit on page 141 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt Level gt V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS Manual operation See Signal Source on page 140 See Level Unit on page 141 INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital UO Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 140 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Sign
199. an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode For details see the description in the base unit Importing and Exporting I Q Data Remote command MMEMory STORe IQ STATe on page 278 MMEMory STORe IQ COMM on page 279 R amp S Support Export Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument The SupportSave df1 file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later Remember to set the sweep mode to Single Sweep beforehand as Continuous Sweep would immediately overwrite the loaded input data If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster Available Context Menus For many objects on the screen context sensitive menues are available that provide helpful functions for the specific object e g an edit dialog box for a specific setting Thus Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 144 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 3 3 3 1 Configuring VSA measurements you don t have to navigate through various softkey levels or dialog boxes to quickly change a setting There are two ways to access the context menus e Right click the object to display the menu temp
200. andards and Settings Z 43 esind LOSL WVOC MOLEN usH 3903 T T C edeus MOJEN auer OS Weg esind mou 3903 usu wy SLZLL Y o wened LL usd 3633 Aen geg zH ze WVOZE v 1 Oze 39d3 i2 Le WvoO9 ue 3903 Ganesan C SH 3903 esindepiM 49199 00S1 Wope adeys esing 4903 uen wv SLZLL EI o wened LL SH 3633 3 2 epmaoas zHisze WvOOL v L 091 geg E esind LOSL WVvO9S MOLEN HSH 39d3 eege C edeus MOJEN Lauer 0081 Weg aging wo1 4903 usu wv S Z i v o wened LL SH 200 3 d sengoqa zu ger Wvo9 ri 091 3903 L VOSL Sd O NSH 3903 ee C Hen 3903 esingepiM Jaju29 _008L Sd adeys esind 4903 oe is SI 241 EI o wened 24 OSH 3904 Z epw3oda zHisze xSdo viic do 39d3 esind L LOSL ged MOLEN O SH 3903 eege C adeys asingmoue 491U99 0081 Sd asind wo1 4903 NusH ug SI 241 EI o wened 1L O NSH 3904 sengoqa zugerl xSdo viic dO 39d3 Ae spe abuey Buet TITTEN sung Joy Budden uonenjeag 3uaeuuBi v ynsey uleged Jojuojeeg Jojuojeeg jg eudiv puisueJl aye1joquiAs uonejnpo pjepuejs JopJoJ Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Predefined Standards and Settings ees 9uoN pam eN oe zl onsng 99 g 0 YSN ZHN L MSZ LHa woojenig JejnBueyooy EN K IS Geert Way emdeo ooz SZO2dY p gv ASt
201. ane ke RE ERE RR XR dea e aka de cd en ns irt eus 102 e Statistical Displays cc cerent tite epu rite xu cbe e ke taa eec 105 e Displayed Measurement Settings eiie ie teetie nante denk ka d dani nnia 107 e Result Ranges and Evaluation Rangegs eene eene 108 e Saving Measurement Results 110 Result types The following result types are available depending on the source type e Magnitude EE 75 QE le TEE 76 QUE Cc rom Dm 77 LEN GEET VE 78 e E UE EE 79 e Pregusncy RoRo E 80 Realfiniag VO M 81 e Eye DDM Real TD EE 82 e Eye Di3o9rab Teo Gb esa E Ee 83 e Eye Diagram Frequency ENNEN 84 Constellation H Mm 85 e Constellation VO Rotated ek ie te reet a t de id 85 UE coc dio Et 86 Constellatton e 87 Mebtor FREQUENCY tiere nete ne re Pe Uitte aee aes HAEC re repe TE 88 LUE s Io T 88 e Error Vector Magnitude EVM eccaeaceneciecxaet nee eee nen knot Enn ENEE 89 Magrnitude ETTO texere dre e ERE RENE Ge eelere 90 UE Phase EMO MH 91 e Freguency Error AbSOolUte ooi de ento aeo e ha edet pde ted 92 e Jrequency Error Pelallve tinae eno eerte Moa een Redde debe d pdc dabas 93 e RESU Summary ure eere tea dcee e t ERR eR REM RdE E dens dadenes EENS Een 94 e Bit Error Rate BER edere etd ee Ree rea etd da ates 100
202. anged inverted sideband Ou OFF Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe DDEMod SBANd on page 301 Trigger Mode Defines the trigger mode External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 159 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deeg Configuring VSA measurements IF Power For this purpose the R amp S FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate frequency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and pream plification A reference level offset if defined is also considered IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV B160 For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type Sweep mode e RBW gt 500 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 500 kHz 6 MHz nominal FFT mode e RBW gt 20 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 20 kHz 6 MHz nominal Note Be aware that in auto sweep type mode due to a possible change in sweep types the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting The R amp S FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected frequency start frequency in the frequency Sweep Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is comple te
203. are displayed per symbol If more points per symbol are selected than the given Capture Oversampling rate the additional points are inter polated for the display The more points are displayed per symbol the more detailed the trace becomes Note If the Capture Buffer is used as the signal source the Capture Oversampling rate defines the number of displayed points per symbol the Display Points Sym parameter is not available If Auto is enabled the Capture Oversampling value is used Alternatively select the number of points to be displayed per symbol manually The available values depend on the source type For the Result Summary the number of display points corresponds to the Estimation Points Sym By default 1 for QAM and PSK modulated signals and the capture over sampling rate for MSK and FSK modulated signals This value also controls which sam ples are considered for the Peak and RMS values and the Power result Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 183 Configuring VSA measurements A 1 Q Vector Meas amp Ref amp 1iMcCirw B1I Q Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Cirw Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 C I Q Vector Meas amp Ref imMClrw DI Q Vector Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Ch i 3 XE D AA WA Fig 3 29 Result display with different numbers of points per symbol Screen A 1 Screen B 2 Screen C 4 Screen D 16 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe VALue on page 259 DISPlay WI
204. as Ref magnitude m M 1 Xs M Xs M Xs M e Capture Buffer magnitude Xs M 7 LU Linear Average All measurements where trace averaging M 1 a e is possible except for the measurements x Ze 2 s M M 7 1 5 Analytically Calculated Filters The following filters are calculated during runtime of the unit and as a function of the operating parameter Alpha or BT SS le Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 364 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Formulae Filter Type Setting Parameter Impulse Response Raised cosine RC Alpha a z sin T cos T h r i 2 mt E s T T Root raised cosine Alpha a in 1 T RRC cos a at T D n t 4o e zf Gat Ty Gaussian filter BT 2 Gauss ETSI TS expl E x 100 959 V8 3 0 M Ip T t Jax pT with _ vin2 2aBT 7 1 6 Standard Specific Filters 7 1 6 1 Transmit filter EDGE Tx filter ETSI TS 300 959 V8 1 2 Linearized GMSK 3 3 5 7 fr o lt tssT 087 i 0 0 else t SEN for Oxtx4T 0 t 4T S E f sear for 4T lt t lt 8T 0 0 else eO dones ori Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 365 Formulae 2 Leide 0 5 C t is the impulse response of the EDGE transmit filter 7 1 6 2 Measurement Filter EDGE Measurement filters RC filter Alpha 0 25 single side band 6 dB bandwith 90 kHz Windowing by multi plying the impulse response accordin
205. ate fre quency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered IF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency depends on the RBW and sweep type Sweep mode e RBW gt 500 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW lt 500 kHz 6 MHz nominal FFT mode e RBW gt 20 kHz 40 MHz nominal e RBW s 20 kHz 6 MHz nominal Note Be aware that in auto sweep type mode due to a possible change in sweep types the bandwidth may vary considerably for the same RBW setting The R amp S FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the selected frequency start frequency in the frequency sweep For digital input via the Digital Baseband Interface R amp S FSV B17 the baseband power BB Power is used as the trigger source Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 TRIG SOUR BBP for digital input Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 129 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level as a numeric value Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 328 For
206. ated signals the estimated FSK deviation FSK modulated signals or one quarter of the symbol rate MSK modulated signals 1l d FREQ yg s t vez aD Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 80 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Measurement Result Display with t2n T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for Frequency Absolute Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal vsa EZ Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 158 Input RF SGL A FreqRel Meas amp Ref Achada In ara ERR A Lu af ad 2 EE EE WG WE WE E EIN DES E D L LE d gp p ee A Start 5 0 sym Stop 153 0 sym Fig 3 6 Result display Frequency Relative in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREO to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDowc n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 264 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the
207. ated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote control Answer Use the following remote commands SENSel DDEMod PRESet GSM NB Load the GSM standard SENSe1 DDEMod RLENgth 10000 SYM Enlarge the capture buffer length such that all the bursts you want to demodulate can be seen within the capture buffer INITiatel CONTinuous OFF Go to single sweep mode TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 356 R amp S FSV K70 Support RRE Frequently Asked Questions SENSe1l SWEep COUNt 0 Set the Statistic Count to Auto mode INITiatel IMMediate Do single sweep SENSe1 SWEep COUNt CURRent Query the number of demodulated bursts within the capture buffer For n 1 NumberOfBursts SENSe1 DDEMod SEARCh MBURSt CALC n TRACe4 TRACel Query the result symbols in screen D End Step through all bursts and query the demodulated symbols Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong Answer For an FSK modulated signal the signal processing differs to an PSK QAM MSK modu lated signal The estimation model does not minimize the EVM but the error of the instan taneous frequency see chapter 2 6 2 1 Error Model on page 67 Therefore the mea surement value that corresponds to the EVM value for FSK is the the Frequency Error Absolute Relative Source Type Modulation Error Result Type Frequency Error Absolute Relative Operating Manual 117
208. ation Orderd Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt GLENgth MINimum on page 302 Pattern Search The Pattern Search tab contains the settings for pattern searches In addition it contains a link to the Signal Description settings see Signal Description on page 150 For details on pattern searches see chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194 Burst amp Pattern Search Pattern Search w Auto according to Signal Description Pattern found Meas only if Pattern was found w Auto Configuration IQ Correlation Threshold 90 96 Related Settings Signal Description Select Pattern for search l EDGE TSCO EDGE TSC1 EDGE TSC2 EDGE TSC3 EDGE TSC4 EDGE TSC5 EDGE TSC6 EDGE TSC7 Advanced Settings Pose EE 165 Meas only if pattern symbols correct eeeeeese esee enne enne nnn thea nnt 165 Auto GConfIguEalton EE 165 L 1 Q Correlation EN 165 Select Pattern for Search nrerin regen ri den ro E Pe ERR aaia 166 e VE Le ERE ERE 166 Ee 166 L Show Compatible tenenti 166 2 1 PC 167 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 164 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis EE Configuring VSA measurements L Pattern Search OM EE 167 L Meas only if pattern symbols Core 167 L E E 167 L Remove from Standard 167 e PTT 167 e EE 167 Gi EE 168 Auto On Off Enables or d
209. available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for measurement filter is available for RRC filter Remote command Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 287 Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 291 Display Configuration You configure the display for the results in the Display Configuration dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Screen A D a separate tab for each of the four available screens e Predefined for predefined display configurations Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 179 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements For more information see chapter 3 1 Measurement Result Display on page 73 The Display Configuration tab is also displayed when you select the MEAS key Screen A D For each of the four available screens you can configure what is to be displayed Display Configuration Screen A bw Screen A active Highlight Symbols Source for Screen C Capture Buffer Error Vector Meas amp Ref Signal Modulation Errors Symbols Modulation Accuracy Result type for Screen A Magnitude Absolute C Magnitude Relative e Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative to SR IC Real Imag I Q IC Eye Diagram Real I Eye Diagram Imag Q Eye Diagram Frequency le Constellation I Q Vecto
210. avlfWiNDow nzTR ACectz XI SCALelb ivislon eene 261 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe RPOSition sseeeee sees 261 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzUTR ACectz XI SCALelRVAl ue nennen 262 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe STARt essere 262 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe VOFFset eessssssssseseene eene 263 DISPlayp WINDow en TRAGest Y SCALa 2 droite tiii tetas u dan nei koe eden o ER 263 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO VALue eeeseeeeeenen nn 264 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO ALL cessere 264 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE esses eene 264 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe PDlVision 1 eese 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel eeesssseseeseseeene eene 265 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet eeseseseesesses 266 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSItION eee ceeee cece eee e eee c eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 266 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue eeesssssseseeene ener ener 266 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects WV BbACIng nennen nnne nnns 267 bISPlay Pl Eelere ico Eed en eode Ry nnb actae ee 267 RIEGERT EK e EE 267 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt PRATe AUTO lt DisplayPPSMode gt This command turns auto mode of points per symbol on or off If
211. been found See also Meas only if pattern symbols correct on page 165 To define an offset for the pattern search 1 In the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Select the Offset option and enter the number of symbols to be used as an offset Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 195 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements 3 3 6 Managing patterns The available patterns and those assigned to the current standard are listed in the Pattern Settings dialog box In addition details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed in the upper right hand part of the dialog box To show the details for a specific pattern simply click on it To add a predefined pattern to a standard 1 In the VSA gt Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 In the list of All Patterns select the required pattern If the required pattern is not displayed see To change the display for the list of patterns on page 196 4 Press Add to Standard The selected pattern is inserted in the list of Standard Patterns To change the display for the list of patterns 1 In the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 To display all available patterns select Show All To display all patterns that are compatible to the defined standard selec
212. capture sam pling period 2 6 2 3 Modulation Errors A 2FSK signal is generated using a GMSK frequency pulse Examples of carrier drift and reference deviation are shown in figure 2 57 and figure 2 58 respectively Carrier frequency drift A carrier frequency drift is modeled as a linear change in the carrier frequency with respect to time The effect of carrier drift on the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is illustrated in figure 2 57 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 69 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Freq Meas M 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 2 57 The reference and distorted instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with a carrier fre quency drift FSK deviation error The FSK deviation error is the difference between the measured frequency deviation and the reference frequency deviation as entered by the user see FSK Ref Deviation on page 148 The evidence of a deviation error in the instantaneous frequency of an FSK signal is demonstrated in figure 2 58 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors Instantaneous Frequency GMSK Modulation Meas Deviation Ref Dewation Frequency Ref Deviation Freq Ref Freq Meas 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Time Symbols Fig 2 58 The reference and measured instantaneous frequency of a GMSK signal with reference devi ation erro
213. ce LEVel IFPower on page 328 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 327 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 329 Trigger Hysteresis Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for IF power or RF Power trigger sources The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 329 Trigger Holdoff Defines the value for the trigger holdoff The holdoff value in s is the time which must pass before triggering in case another trigger event happens This softkey is only available if IFPower RF Power or BBPower is the selected trig ger s
214. ce value for the X axis Example DISP TRAC X RVAL 20 Sets the reference value to 20 Mode VSA Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See X Axis Reference Value on page 117 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe STARt This command queries the first value of the x axis in symbols or time depending on the unit setting for the x axis Note In the Result Range Alignment And Evaluation Range dialog or using the CALC TRAC ALIG commands the burst on the screen is shifted the x axis thus no longer begins on the left at 0 symbols but at a selectable value Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 262 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee ee SSE es DISPlay subsystem Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the burst as the reference for the screen display CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG CENT Position the burst at the center of the screen DISP TRAC X STAR Queries the start value of the X axis Usage Query only Mode VSA DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe VOFFset lt VOffset gt This command adds an offset to the symbols shown in the result display The offset is available for all result displays except the capture buffer Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt VOffset gt numeric value Range 100000 to 100000 RST 0 Default unit
215. ch exactly cor responds to the following equation Sample rate Symbol rate Capture Oversampling see Capture Oversampling on page 158 The complex output signal of the decimation stage is stored in the UO memory record buffer and forwarded to a signal processor DSP for further processing Block Diagram for Digital Baseband Input The following block diagram provides an overview on how digital baseband input is pro cessed in the R amp S FSV K70 option The digital baseband input requires option R amp S FSV B17 Digital Down Converter B17 digital IQ Decimation z Processor input Filter connector downsampling decimation by or upsampling 2 n Fig 2 2 Block diagram of digital hardware for digital baseband input B17 in vector signal analysis The digital UO data stream is fed into the analyzer via the connector of the digital base band interface R amp S FSV B17 option There is no need to equalize any IF filter or mix the signal into the complex baseband The digital hardware just has to ensure that the final I Q data stored in the record buffer has the correct sample rate therefore the signal is resampled and filtered Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing This section describes the used filters in vector signal analysis with an R amp S FSV as well as the bandwidth after each filter The relevant filters for vector signal analysis are shown in figure 2 3 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02
216. cting a standard EE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 41 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Predefined Standards and Settings NW 4S 3903 wvoze C7 YSN 3903 49199 mei ASNS 3904 Wy S rvL E o Weed 9v 3903 Wvoze pezueeurn zHxeege042 WvOZE v L oce 3903 481 3903 Wvo9l C7 YSN 3903 auer mei ASNO 3904 sw S rvL E o uaped 9v 3903 WVO9L pezueeun zHpeege 042 WVO9L r DOL 3903 JSL 3903 uSN ae Ja U99 i p YSWO 39q043 E y Gl vyl e o Weed Srl OOSL 3903 pezueeurn zHXeege 042 MSde g t Sag 3903 cav WS Jojuo2 C ANON ZH WSS jsungss S8 8 o WweHed 88 08v WSS Cp MSWD eeees OZZ MSW 299V Weg jsung ee Logs WS ANON zii Weg Xausnb VvL op Weed srl 084 WNSO Cp MSWD eeees 0Zz eil a14 WSO cas WSS n jsunguon Jojuo2 C ANON ZH WSO eziuoJuo VvL Oopuepned srl 08S ISO Cp MSWD eeees OZz ASNA UAS Weg ZOSL WSS Ja Uuag C ANON ZH WSS jsungjew SC vL SO0 Oo UeHed srl 0oSL Weg Cp MSWD eeees OZz ASNA JON WSS Wee Jet 4 seaw Buiddew oBuey u16ue ula yed Jsung 49314 uonenje 3 jueuiuBiv ynsoy ulayed 104 Q9J4e9S JO YOIe AS 1g eydiy ylusuely 9je1joqui S uone npo N puepuejs Jopjo4 sBurjes pue sp4epuejs pauljapasd Jo SI 6 L Z e qe 42 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Predefined St
217. d another is started immediately Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 328 For digital input TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 327 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in s or in symbols offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretrigger 4 sweep time When using the R amp S Digital I Q Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 160 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DREES Configuring VSA measurements In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 329 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level as a numeric value Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuen
218. d figure 3 20 show examples of such spectral evaluations The upper trace shows the basic diagram in each case while the lower trace shows the associated spectral evaluations The top part of figure 3 19 shows EVM versus time the spectrum of the EVM signal is shown at the bottom In figure 3 20 the FFT is applied to the complex signal REAL IMAG top The bottom diagram shows the spectrum Since the input signal is complex a two sided spectrum is shown In both cases the time range for the FFT is restricted by the activated evaluation lines so that for example burst edges are not included Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 103 Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std Att 30 dB Freq 1 8056 GHz Start 0 0 sym B Spectrum EVM Error LL xl T Lu VW nl Start 0 0 Hz Measurement Result Display EDGE NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 1 Cirw ITT an H Ed 2 c ct ka c lt 3 ai Chrw Stop 541 66666 kHz Fig 3 19 Spectrum diagram Single sided display for real input signals R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 1 8056 GHz ResLen 148 Input Real Meas amp Ref 61M Clrw A a 1M IM ciw UR ES UTI Tu IVV Y Al SL Start 0 0 sym Stop 148 0 sym B Spectrum Reallmag Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 541 66666 kHz Stop 541 66666 kHz Fig 3 20 Spectrum diagram T
219. de diagram In symbol tables the evaluated symbols are indicated by red square brackets D Symbol Table Hexadecimal ETZEUEJEGZEDETZEREZE A In other result displays that are based on the evaluation range only two red vertical lines are displayed in the diagram header to indicate a limited evaluation basis B Result Summary 3 1 7 Saving Measurement Results After a data acquisition or measurement you may like to save the results for further evaluation or documentation purposes You can save a screenshot of the display to a file or print it and you can export the trace data in ASCII format To print or store a screenshot 1 Press the PRINT key 2 Press the Device Setup softkey 3 To copy the screenshot to the clipboard or print it on a printer select the correspond ing option Before you print to a printer make sure a printer is installed see the description in the base unit manual To save the screenshot to a file select the file format for your screenshot e g JPEG and then select the Print to file option 4 Close the Hardcopy Setup dialog 5 Press the Colors softkey and then Select Print Color Set Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 110 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 6 7 8 To MM Measurement Result Display If you want the colors of your screenshot to be as they appear on the screen select Screen Colors Hardcopy
220. deactivates evaluation of modulation accuracy limits in the result summary If limit check is activated and the measured values exceed the limits those values are indicated in red in the result summary table If limit check is activated and no values exceed the limits the checked values are indicated in green For details on working with limits see chapter 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 204 Remote command CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy STATe on page 219 Config ModAcc Limits Opens a dialog to configure modulation accuracy limits for the result summary Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 137 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Limit Checking On Set to Default Current Limit Value Check EVM RMS Vv EVM Peak Phase Err Rms Vv Phase Err Peak Magnitude Err Rms v Magnitude Err Peak D Carr Freq Err Rho a IQ Offset L Note Limits for Current and Peak are always equal Note The dialog box differs depending on the modulation type For FSK modulation different result types are available For details on configuring limits see chapter 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 204 Limit Checking Config ModAcc Limits Activates or deactivates a limit check on the subsequent measurements Remote command CALCulate n
221. disita eae Deena eh alae dea D dpt decree d d 314 SENSe DDEMOd TIME tnit nri tn enirn rete tre tne tne tnt tr tnnt trn tnnt neret enne SENSe DDEMod UQAM FORMat ISENZGel DDEMod UQAM NS Tate ener ennt eterne enne enne nennen nnns 316 SENSe SWEep COUNECURRSent idein tteste ea naiai a aia ee aE baee naa a aka aea dme ra REDE dE 317 SENSe SWEep COUNT VALUC viisiin tecto rp ve tet ede tec e De d Ye tese dS 317 R amp S FSV K70 Index A C Activating the option ssssssme 72 Capture Length Adjust Settings VQ Capture oo cece cece sss 157 158 SOMK EE 118 UO Capture remote Control 0 0 eee eee eee eee 300 Alignment Capture Oversampling eee 158 Ixesult range aeterne EEN 171 Remote control rrr etn rere en nennen pen 295 jM E 150 179 Capture Unit Amplitude Droop SOT CY E 119 Welle LTE 174 Carrier Frequency Drift ASCII Trace export eene nennen 206 Bell LE 174 ASCII Trace Export Center frequency eene nnne 115 Ric MM Pm 128 144 EE 115 attenuation Characters Option E 120 Ie EE 210 Attenuation Clear Write trace mode us Option E 120 Coarse Synchronization eee c eee eeeeneeeeeneeees 176 PULOIMA eege ee EENEG 120 Commands Manual me eelere eebe Pe Ee 208 ODtIOD 119 Compensation Attenuation Mode Demodulation sese 174 Ell E 155 Config ModAcc Limits Auto lev
222. e Patter Not Found iii iie esee these dee spe bud dara EE EES 341 Message Result Alignment Failed occisi enki t lehnt the 342 Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected AA 344 Message Pattern Not Entirely Within Result Range 344 Message Short Pattern Pattern Search Might Fal ENEE 344 Message Sync Prefers More Valid Gvmbols AAA 345 Message Sync Prefers Longer Patter esent tete dte dace Ruhe 346 Message Result Ranges Overlap cede SEENEN ERKENNEN 347 Message Burst Not Found The Burst Not Found error message can have several causes e Burst search is active but the signal is not bursted C Mag CapBuf Fig 6 1 Example for active burst search with continuous signal Solution Select Continuous Signal as the signal type For more information see Signal Description on page 150 e Signal is bursted but bursts have not been captured completely Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 338 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Message o The burst search can only find bursts that start and end within the capture buffer It ignores bursts that are cut off c Man CapBuf fi il di hl i ah dd oid ai ll i hy Start 0 sym Stop 1250 sym O ee Fig 6 2 Example for incomplete burst capture Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see UO Capture on page 15
223. e 0 to 15000 RST 0 Default unit SYM Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 313 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El SENSe subsystem Manual operation See Offset on page 152 SENSe DDEMod TFILter ALPHa Alpha This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters Alpha numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod TFiLter NAME Name This command selects a transmit filter and automatically switches it on For more information on Transmit filters refer to chapter 2 2 4 Modulation and Demod ulation Filters on page 14 Parameters Name Name of the Transmit filter an overview of available Transmit fil ters is provided in table 2 3 Example SENS DDEM TFIL NAME RRC Selects the RRC filter Mode VSA Manual operation See Transmit filter Type on page 149 See Load User Filter on page 149 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe lt TXFilterState gt Use this command to switch the Transmit filter off To switch a Transmit filter on use the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command Setting parameters lt TXFilterState gt ON OFF OFF Switches the Transmit filter off ON Switches the Transmit filter specified by SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on However this command is not necessary as the SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME command automatic
224. e Next Peak on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace maximum If necessary the corresponding delta marker is activated first Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MAX Sets delta marker 3 to the maximum value of the associated trace Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 213 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a SSS SESS EE a ee a rP Y1 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next smaller trace maximum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MAX RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next smaller maximum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e descending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next h
225. e Settings Overview dialog box is displayed select Signal Description From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard If the Burst amp Pattern Settings dialog box is displayed select the Pattern Search tab and select the pattern from the list of assigned patterns If the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box is displayed select the required pattern from the Standard Patterns list Otherwise from the VSA menu select Signal Description From the Name selection list select a pattern that is assigned to the currently defined standard If the pattern you require is not available see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 196 To enable a pattern search This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 310 1 If the Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box is already displayed select the Pattern Search On option Otherwise in the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Pattern Search 2 Select On to enable the search globally or Auto to enable a search if a pattern is part of the signal description see To add a pattern to the signal description on page 194 The selected pattern is used for a pattern search 3 Optionally select the Meas only if pattern symbols correct option In this case measurement results are only displayed if a valid pattern has
226. e UO signal For MSK the measurement filter filters the and Q parts of the measurement signal and the reference signal i e not the instantaneous frequency or magnitude of the MSK sig nal 2 2 5 Transmit filters The transmit filters required for common standards are provided by the R amp S FSV K70 Table 2 3 Overview of predefined Transmit filters RC Raised cosine RRC Root raised cosine Gauss Gauss filter GMSK Gauss filter convolved with a rectangular filter typically used for MSK Linearized GMSK Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE 3GPP TS 45 004 normal symbol rate EDGE Narrow Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate EDGE Wide Pulse Shape Standard specific filter for GSM EDGE higher symbol rate Half Sine Half Sine filter APCO25 C4FM Filter for the APCO25 C4FM standard APCO25 H CPM Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H DQPSK Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Narrow Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard APCO25 H D8PSK Wide Filter for the APCO25 Phase 2 standard CDMA2000 1X Forward Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X forward link http www 3gpp2 org Public html specs C S0002 C_v1 0 pdf 28 05 2002 CDMA2000 1X Reverse Filter for CDMA ONE forward link TIA EIA IS 95 A May 1995 and CDMA2000 1X reverse link http www 3gpp2 org Public_html specs C S0002 C_v1 0
227. e lt SymbolRate gt This command defines the symbol rate Setting parameters lt SymbolRate gt numeric value For details on the possible values see table 2 1 RST 3 84e6 Default unit Hz Mode VSA Manual operation See Symbol Rate on page 149 SENSe DDEMod STANdard COMMent lt Comment gt This command enters the comment for a new standard The comment is stored with the standard and is only displayed in the selection menu manual operation When remote control is used the string is deleted after the standard has been stored allowing a new comment to be entered for the next standard In this case a blank string is returned when a query is made Setting parameters lt Comment gt string Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete lt FileName gt This command deletes a specified digital standard file in the vector signal analysis The file name includes the path If the file does not exist an error message is displayed Setting parameters lt FileName gt string File name including the path for the digital standard file Example SENS DDEM STAN DEL C path standardname Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 113 See Delete Standard on page 113 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue This command restores the default settings of the currently selected standard Usage Event Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 312 R amp S FSV K70 R
228. e 167 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT lt Text gt This command defines a text to explain the pattern The text is displayed only in the selection menu manual control This text should be short and concise Detailed infor mation about the pattern is given in the comment see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 306 Setting parameters Text string Example SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM 1 Selects the GSM 1 pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 1001 Enter pattern 1001 DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT TEST S25 Enter text for the GSM 1 pattern Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Edit on page 167 See New on page 167 See Description on page 169 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal PATTern lt PatternedSignal gt This command specifies whether the signal contains a pattern or not Setting parameters lt PatternedSignal gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Pattern on page 151 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue SignalType This command specifies whether the signal is bursted or continuous Setting parameters lt SignalType gt CONTinuous BURSted RST CONTinuous Mode VSA Manual operation See Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 151 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 311 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a SS SSS SSS a a M SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod SRAT
229. e Buffer Burst Search BRESEEEEEEEEEEED optional Burst Search Settings Pattern Search Settings Reference Signal Generation Measurement Filtering optional Measurement Filter Settings Ref Signal izati Demodulation Synchronization Fine Estimates Mess Signal Modulation amp Signal Ref Signal Description o L Result Display Display Configuration Fig 2 41 Demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Demodulation Overview The figure 2 41 provides an overview of the demodulation stages of the vector signal analysis option The function blocks of the signal processing kernel can be found at the left in grey and their appropriate settings at the right in blue Burst Search In this stage the Capture Buffer is searched for bursts that comply with the signal description The search itself can be switched on or off via the Burst Search dialog see Burst Search on page 162 A list of the detected bursts is passed on to the next pro cessing stage IQ Pattern Search The IQ Pattern Search is performed on the Capture Buffer This means the R amp S FSV K70 option modulates the selected pattern according to the transmit filter Tx filter and the modulation scheme Subsequently it searches the Capture Buffer for this IQ pattern i e the IQ wavefor
230. e Y UPPer on page 255 y Axis Min Value Ranges statistic measurements Opens an edit dialog box to define the lower limit of the displayed probability range Val ues in the range 1e lt value lt 0 1 are allowed The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey The distance between max and min value must be at least one decade Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y LOWer on page 254 y Unit Abs Ranges statistic measurements Defines the scaling type of the y axis The default value is absolute scaling Remote command CALCulate n STATistics SCALe Y UNIT on page 254 Default Settings Ranges statistic measurements Resets the x and y axis scalings to their preset values for the current measurement window Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet on page 253 Adjust Settings Ranges statistic measurements Adjusts the x axis scaling to the occurring statistical values Remote command CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO on page 253 Ranges Symbol Table Opens a submenu to define the display mode for the symbol table Binary Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to binary mode This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row Octal Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to octal mode This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row Decimal Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol di
231. e control sssus DiglConf Display Config eret tener ente EL Atten remote control ssssssss EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 275 El Atten On Off eirian EX IQ BOX Export remote control Frequency Offset remote control 317 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 328 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control Import remote control essssesesse 278 Input AC DC EE 121 142 Input AC DC remote control 272 IQ Export x og Load Standard eicere Marker 1 2 3 4 ince eite ZE geg Marker 1 to 4 remote control Marker tO Trace e oerte etre ern Marker to Trace remote control 243 Max Hold E Mech Atten Auto essssesseeee 120 Mech Atten Auto remote control 272 Mech Atten Manual Ce Mech Atten Manual remote control 272 Min Told tette irent trt 126 205 ModAcc Limits eseene 137 Preamp On Off iens 119 155 Preamp On Off remote control 277 Ref Level remote control i T Ref Level Offset sue ctt RF Atten spo RF Atten Auto remote control RF Atten Manual eesceeeeeenenee RF Atten Manual remote con
232. e n ede 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold eniin iaaa 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE eesesessssessessi sehen enhn nnn nnns ehh nt nen nnn 308 SENSe DBEMod SEARCh SYNGNAME inpune epus k tacente d gane Spb na seno n aeiaai ERR Cm Rea 309 SENSe DBEMod SEARCh SYNGO INSTal iure cota otra reu yea epe peret ENEE sae 309 SENSej DDEMod SEARCh SYNC PATTem ADD enero tnn rnt diniinan 309 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMoOwve sss nennen 310 SENSeT DBEMod SEARChISYNG ISEEGGL iiu teer eterne ez tc ts 310 ISENSeEDDEMod SEARCH SYNC STAT EEN 310 SENSe DDEMod SEARcGh S YNG TEXT seeeekEtgeEN NENNEN SEENEN EEN eer nun 311 SENSeEDBEMod SIGNAEPAT RE ET 311 SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue eene tette tette ttn 311 SENSe DDEMOQ SRA TO EE 312 SENSe DDEMod S TANdard COMME iiinn aaa ia aaa 312 SENS DDEM d STANdaid DEL eleronai EEA Rhe AEA Eaa 312 SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VAL ue 312 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE crier ose eek ee eterni uhren nare RR Ree MuR e RR RAD aem neces 313 SENSe F DBEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STAT coat tocan eu NENNEN na eR i 313 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue eese 313 ISENSeEDDEMsd TFIEIGE AUBHAL cech t tont enne vene nog nene Eege 314 SENSe DBEMod lFlbter NAME uge aa au nena EENS 314 SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe eccentric 314 ISENSe E
233. e results of the Result Summary make sure to match the displayed points per symbol of the trace and of the Result Summary Refer to Display Points Sym on page 183 for details Mean value In the Mean column the linear mean of the values that are in the Current column is displayed Note that if the values are in a logarithmic representation e g the UO Offset the linear values are averaged Peak value In the Peak column the maximum value that occurred during several evaluations is displayed Note that when the value can be positive and negative e g the phase error the maximum absolute value maintaining its sign is displayed The peak value of Rho is handled differently since its minimum value represents the worst case In that case the minimum value is displayed Standard Deviation The value for the standard deviation is calculated on the linear values and then converted to the displayed unit Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 99 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 1 1 23 Measurement Result Display 95 percentile The 95 percentile value is based on the distribution of the current values Since the phase error and the magnitude error can usually be assumed to be distributed around zero the 95 Percentile for these values is calculated based on their absolute values Again the Rho value is handled differently Here the 5 Percentile is displayed since the lowest Rho value r
234. eader with scaling information etc e Decimal Separator Defines the separator for decimal values as point or comma Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 268 FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 269 FORMat DEXPort MODE on page 269 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 279 3 2 7 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu R amp S FSV K70 The TRIG key opens the I Q Capture tab ofthe Frontend amp UO Capture Settings dialog box see chapter 3 3 1 2 Frontend and UO Capture Settings on page 153 and dis plays the Trigger menu which contains the following softkeys Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 128 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 RTE 129 ere eege EE MM 129 IF Power Baseband POWWE 5 eo tinet eere Ee Ee 129 Mg ger EEN 130 NK ere POISE TEE 130 THOGeF ONEEN EEN dee eee 130 Tiger ONSOU LEE 130 Free Run The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 External Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 329 IF Power Baseband Power For this purpose the R amp S FSV uses a level detector at the second intermedi
235. ect demodulation the following filters have to be accurately specified for the analyzer e Transmit filter filter characteristic of transmitter e Meas filter PSK QAM UserQAM MSK The and the Q part of the measurement and the reference signal are filtered with this filter FSK The instantaneous frequency of the measurement reference signal are filtered In many applications this filter is identical with the ISI filter The receive filter ISI filter is configured internally depending on the Transmit filter The goal is to produce intersymbol interference free points for the demodulation The reference filter synthesizes the ideal transmitted signal after meas filtering It is calculated by the analyzer from the above filters convolution operation Transmit filter Meas Filter Table 2 2 Typical combinations of Tx and Meas filters Transmit filter Measurement filter Remarks analyzer RC raised cosine filter combination without intersymbol interference ISI RRC root raised cosine RRC filter combination without ISI GMSK filter combination with low ISI Linearized GMSK EDGE NSR standard specific filter filter combination with ISI Gauss Rectangular filter combination with low ISI filter combination without ISI Half Sine filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X FORWARD Low ISI Meas Filter filter combination without ISI CDMA2000 1X REVERSE Low IS
236. ed by Rohde amp Schwarz can also be deleted A confirmation query is displayed to avoid unintentional deletion of the standard Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 113 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Note Restoring predefined standard files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery can be restored using the Restore Stand ards softkey Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete on page 312 Standard Defaults Digital Standards Resets the instrument to the default settings of the currently used standard If no standard is currently active the previously active standard is used Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue on page 312 Restore Standard Files Digital Standards Restores the standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery Remote command SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue on page 287 New Folder Digital Standards Creates a new folder in the file system in which you can save the settings file This function is only available if the Save Current Settings as Standard dialog box is open Display Config Opens the Display Configuration dialog box to configure the measurement results dis play See chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 179 Restore Factory Settings
237. ed by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations See also the note for Frequency Error Absolute Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 93 Measurement Result Display q Error Rel Start 0 s Fig 3 16 Result display Frequency Error Relative in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 DISP TRAC Y MODE REL to define relative values see DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MODE on page 264 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 325 3 1 1 22 Result Summary Shows the Modulation Accuracy results in a table Depending on the modulation type you are using the result summary shows different measurement results Details concerning the specific measurement results can be found in chapter 7 1 For mulae on page 358 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display PSK QAM and MSK modulation Spectrum VS Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std EDGE 8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 148 SGL ResRange C
238. ed coarse synchronization might be unstable If demodulation is stable e g you get a reasonable EVM there is no need to change anything Otherwise you have two options e Switch to the non pattern based mode by setting the parameter Coarse Synchroni zation Data see Coarse Synchronization on page 176 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 346 R amp S FSV K70 Support SSS SS ES SS SSS SS DUNS Flow Chart for Troubleshooting e f possible use a longer pattern For more information see chapter 2 5 Demodulation Overview on page 47 Message Result Ranges Overlap This message does not indicate an error It is merely displayed to inform you that the defined result ranges in the capture buffer overlap Thus some captured data is evalu ated more than once For example the same peak value may be listed several times if itis included in several result ranges and averaging is performed on partially duplicate values However a negative influence on the measurement results is not to be expected 6 2 Flow Chart for Troubleshooting If you experience a concrete measurement problem you might want to try solving it with the help of the flow chart Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 347 R amp S FSV K70 Support Troubleshooting Overview Flow Chart for Troubleshooting Press Preset in order to start from a known state Y Center frequency Symbol rate Transmit filter Modulat
239. ed on in the Burst Search dialog Make sure the pattern search is switched on Setting dialog to move your result range to the desired point in the capture buffer Do you Found Message see a Burst Not Do you see a Pattern Not Found Message se an external trigger and a appropriate trigger offset Go back to no Mal Result Range Alignment reference is Burst Range Setting Dialog ke sure your Make sure your Result Range Alignment reference is Pattern Waveform Range Setting Dialog 6 3 _Result Range Alignment ste But 8 Patiern Waveform Pattern Waveform Left Center Right Right Go back to Frequently Asked Questions EE capture Eas Left Genter Reference Alignment Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement screen Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement screen the trace of the reference signal is not Problem The measurement screen does not show average results Problem The spectrum is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Problem The Vector UO result display and the Constellation UO result display look dif ferent Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R a
240. ee Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 125 See Clear Write on page 125 See Max Hold on page 125 See Min Hold on page 126 See Average on page 126 See View on page 126 See Trace Wizard on page 127 See Trace Mode on page 127 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other meas urements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 260 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 DISPlay subsystem Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Manual operation See Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 on page 125 See Blank on page 126 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SYMBol This command defines the display of the decision instants time when the signals occur red on the trace Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Example DISP WIND1 TRAC SYMB ON Defines that the decision instants are displayed in the form of dots Mode VSA Manual operation See Highlight Symbols on page 181 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe PDIVision lt PDiv gt This command defines the scaling of the X axis Setting
241. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeaeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeseieeeeeee CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz MiNimum LEET emcees Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 375 R amp S FSV K70 List of Commands CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz MiNimumNENT ene nenn en nnn nnn nnnn nen nns sen rns nennt nnn ne nnns nna 241 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimum RIGHLE esses enne eene nennen nennen rentrer nenne 242 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK eene t nnne nnne 241 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARCH A 242 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe nennen eene nen nnns sinn reste nhnns sen rrns sen r nnns stress ennt nena 243 CALC late lt sn gt E eu 243 CAL Culate cnz MAbkercmz SX GUIMmelEET nennen nennen nennen innt rnnn nennen enean 244 CAlLCulate cnzMAbkercmzX GL IMmtsbRIGHT eene ennt ener nnne enne nnns 245 CALCulate n2 MARKer m X SLIMits ZO OM sss esee enne et ener nnne nnnnt nene rnnn sn neret tenen 245 CAL Culate cnz MAb kerzmz SX GUlMmetGSTATel nennen nnne nnns ennt nnn 244 CALC late lt n gt E E e 246 CALCulatecnz MAbker mztSTATel nennen nennen stt tnnts tes nte satin tense s eritis inet nn nen nn 243 CALCulatesn S TATistics CCDE STAT tret rrt er eee eter ee ee tr Oe de 252 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics MODE CALECulatesn STATistics PRESGL retro nere tec ea Sore Eve Pa eee ve cd ace eH ee EAEE CALCulatecnzGTATlstice GCAleAlltf
242. el Estimation and Modulation Errors Noise Arelyze Mss wees P Se D z ort re a gt 2 D Wi Imaginary Fig 2 54 Additive noise The figure 2 54 shows a 64QAM signal only the 1st quadrant is shown with additive noise The symbol decision thresholds are also shown The noise signal forms a cloud around the ideal symbol point in the constellation dia gram Exceeding the symbol decision boundaries leads to wrong symbol decisions and increases the bit error rate Similar displays are obtained in case of incorrect transmitter filter settings When an incorrect filter is selected crosstalk occurs between neighbouring symbol decision points instead of the ISI free points The effect increases the more the filtering deviates from actual requirements The two effects described cannot be distinguished in the Constellation UO diagram but in statistical and spectral analyses of the error signal FSK Modulation Signal Model Frequency shift keying FSK involves the encoding of information in the frequency of a transmitted signal As opposed to other modulation formats such as PSK and QAM the FSK process is a non linear transform of the transmitted data into the transmitted wave form A sequence of symbols sj are modulated using a frequency pulse g t to form the instantaneous frequency of the transmitted complex baseband waveform denoted by fage t and defined as Free O sg iT where fsymp 1 T is t
243. el SONKEY ere ge 137 EIC 122 Config Pattern Average trace mode esse 126 206 SOP CY sg sna ecicreopeceto casei a E 132 Constellation UO B Result type eres Rotated Result type Soe Bandwidth Continuous Signal ccccccscsssscscessseesseseseetesescstessseeesesees ES Ee EE 159 Continuous SWCD ME Maximum EE 159 Couple Screens On Off Bandwidth extension Remote control 238 Option B 1060 ena idet dedans 13 SOflkey ex o ccs n pes e A desee 133 Restrictions for use s essen 14 BER D see Bit error rate roe neres 100 Binary Decimal SOfIKGy ides p pene tar detected 118 SOMKCY 1 i dateien dede dne 118 Bit error rate Default Settings Result type t tt das 100 SOfIKOy 15 edis iic ade ede etel ed taa 118 Blank trace mode o menter 126 206 Delete Standard Block diagram tic M stasis 113 et E WE 10 Demod Meas Filter Bursts Soflkey 5 tap rente ede 132 Length remote control ssseeeseesss 302 Demodulation Useful length iiie n tet rts 151 Bandwidth 24 ordi e e degt Burst Search Coarse Synchronization D Activating remote control ssssssse 304 Compensation aen therein aen Auto configuration sssssssseeeeee 163 Estimation Points per Symbol 176 Enabling m Fine Synchronization Falling edge remote control
244. em uireieieseiteiieiie A AASA 211 4 3 CALCulate subsystem neret AARAA ARAARA SAARE 211 A A DISPlay suDsystoem entrer reet erRpRIiRR Re Ret Spe ERR R RR RRS ERR RR REN RES DeR 258 4 5 FORMat subsystoem ertet reete rn ERE REIR Rete e RR RR DR SERRA PER ERR ERRARE nu 268 A6 INITiate SubDsystem ener anaa reete Seeeee Ra 269 AT INPut Subsystem eei rtr REESEN REIR EEAS AAAA AAAA SANDRA 271 48 INSTrument Subsyst em eneiceneiiererter tit AA nee tr n ei NARARANASAN ANARA 277 4 9 MMEMory Subs ysteimsicc iisc cicccciccevecckiccecevedececcccsssieiecicetevenduecctensendiedssecevsnatcteearsiaees 278 4 10 OUTPut Subsystem rrt Reg EEEEEEE SEENEN ge 280 4 11 SENSe subDsystem ierit trien ERRIIIRRRRAIRRIDRRRRR SRI DSRRR RR SRDDRRR RR P sncceiees 281 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem eeeeeeeeeneenenenen nnns 318 413 SYSTem Subsystotrn ritenere tieethnei IER SEENEN NEES 325 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 3 R amp S FSV K70 Contents 4 14 4 15 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 7 1 7 2 TR tGesubsveterm 2 gueeeeg eebe eege aa aaa aai 325 TRIG Ger SUDSYStOM 22 26cciciecesticecetereelie c caveeecenie eceteeecenwes Naaa ET 327 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 331 STATus QUEStionable Register eese eene 333 STATus
245. emote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a SSS SS SS SSS a a ea a a ee SENSe subsystem Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 113 See Standard Defaults on page 114 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE lt FileName gt This command stores the current settings of the vector signal analysis as a new user defined digital standard If the name of the digital standard is already in use an error message is output and a new name has to be selected It is recommended that you define a comment before storing the standard Setting parameters lt FileName gt string The path and file name to which the settings are stored Example DDEM STAN COMM GSM AccessBurst with Pattern Defines a comment for the settings DDEM STAN SAVE C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Stores the settings in the user defined digital standard USER_GSM Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 113 See Save As Standard on page 113 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet STATe lt PatternOffsState gt This command de activates the pattern offset Setting parameters lt PatternOffsState gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Offset on page 152 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue lt PatternOffset gt This command defines a number of symbols which are ignored before the comparison with the pattern starts Setting parameters lt PatternOffset gt numeric value Rang
246. ency The instantenous frequency of the source signal as an X Y plot all available samples as defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 are drawn and connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal D Vector Freq Meas amp Ref iM Clrw Mi 1 249 8480 kHz 9 000 sym NE tart 727 5 kHz Stop 727 5 kHz SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM COVF to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 16 Symbol Table Symbol numbers are displayed as a table Each symbol is represented by an entry in the table The symbols can be displayed in binary octal hexadecimal or decimal format Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 88 R amp S FSV K70 3 1 1 17 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Example A Symbol Table Binary EE DL 01 00 01 00 10 00 Dt 10 O1 11 00 00 10 11 IL 01 10 11 00 11 01 00 00 25 10 11 11 00 00 11 11 11 11 10 00 00 11 11 01 11 11 00 01 01 11 00 11 00 00 00 10 01 01 00 11 10 11 01 00 01 11 10 01 11 11 00 11 01 10 00 10 10 75 01 00 oi 11 00 oi 10 11 01 01 01 11 00 01 00 11 00 01 OO
247. epresents the worst case SCPI commands CALC FEED TCAP to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 TRAC DATA to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Bit Error Rate BER A bit error rate BER measurement compares the transmitted bits with the determined symbol decision bits BER error bits number of analyzed bits As a prerequisite for this measurement the R amp S FSV K70 application must know which bit sequences are correct i e which bit sequences may occur This knowledge must be provided as a list of possible data sequences in xml format which is loaded in the R amp S FSV K70 see chapter 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files on page 199 If such a file is loaded in the application the BER result display is available Available for source types e Modulation Accuracy Note that this measurement may take some time as each symbol decision must be com pared to the possible data sequences one by one The BER measurement is an indicator for the quality of the demodulated signal High BER values indicate problems such as e inadequate demodulation settings e poor quality in the source data e false or missing sequences in the Known Data file e result range alignment leads to a mismatch of the input data with the defined sequen ces A BER value of 0 5 means that for at least one measurement no matching sequence was found
248. erating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 13 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 2 2 4 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing Usage of the optional hardware can be deactivated if necessary for example to reduce possible spurious effects Restrictions The optional bandwidth extension R amp S FSV B160 can not be activated if any of the fol lowing conditions apply e R amp S FSV firmware versions previous to 2 0 e R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kx e For center frequencies larger than 7 GHz e With any trigger except for an external trigger Demodulation Bandwidth Measurement Bandwidth Some modulation systems do not use a receive filter In these cases special care should be taken that no interference or adjacent channels occur within the demodulation band width The Capture Oversampling parameter should be set to a low value see Capture Oversampling on page 158 Typical communication systems demand special receive or measurement filters e g root raised cosine receive filter or EDGE measurement filter If no such filtering is performed care should be taken that neither interfering signals nor adjacent channels fall within the demodulation bandwidth Modulation and Demodulation Filters Sample points are required for demodulation in the analyzer where only information of the current symbol and none of neighbouring symbols is present symbol points These points are a
249. ern is specified in the Signal Description dialog For more information see Signal Description on page 150 Message Result Alignment Failed The result range alignment is not possible for the patricular capture buffer The result range needs Q data that has not been captured El Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 342 R amp S FSV K70 Support trur VSA Ref Level 10 00 dim Att 10 dB SGL TRG EXT BURST A EVM Start 126 sym C Mag CapBuf Start Osym Explanation of Error Messages Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range Length Result Length Result Range Alignment Reference Capture e Burst Alignment Left Center Offset Symbol No Burst Start Visualization Stop 500 sym Fig 6 8 Example for failed alignment Display Config In this screenshot the alignment of the long result range to the burst center is not possible because there are not enough samples in the capture buffer before the burst starts In this scenario the trigger settings should be changed such that the burst is in the middle of the capture buffer Solution Change the trigger settings and or enlarge the capture length For more information see e Q Capture on page 156 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 343 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Messages Message Pattern Search On But No Pattern Selected Spectrum VSA Modulation amp Signal Description
250. es the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 133 4 3 2 CALCulate LIMit MACCuracy subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy DEFault ccccccccccsesseeeceeeeeeeceeeaeaeeeeeseseeeeeaeeeaeauaeenees 218 CAL Culate
251. esis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Trigger Hysteresis on page 161 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Delay gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Delay gt Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0to30s RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 130 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe Type This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix n irrelevant Parameters Type POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Trigger Polarity on page 130 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURCce Source This command selects the trigger source Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 329 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El TRIGger subsystem IF power and RF power triggers are not available together with the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source
252. esseee 202 T Trace Clear Write esssesssenenennn 125 205 Trace ue gs 127 EE Beer 126 206 Blank Clear Write cccccccsesssscee ceceeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 125 205 Max Hold 125 205 Min Hold KEE Traces ere ife ligni WE 128 Trace Wizard sssssssssseeeeneeneeere nennen 127 Transmit filter eesssssss 15 Alpha BT Deactivating remote control 314 ui 1o 318 o ERR EE 16 Type e m User defined sssssss nena 149 trigger Cie fp Trigger lale be PR Hysteresis Level Ern Trigger Mode eeler 159 Trigger Offset Unit iic EET 130 TX Settings lee 141 U Units Een dE AE tu 119 Upper case commands ieee eese 209 Upper Level Hysteresis Sic M 122 Useful length sc E 151 Bursts remote control sese 302 V Vector UO Result type ETE 86 View trace mode 126 206 VSA Ment isane anie rere aa tense tear eeu 112 X X Axis Quantize SOMKCY nnde idee Att edidi 117 X Axis Range ioc E 117 191 X Axis Reference Value SONKO i cde Ud alendo oiean ha pi iadaaa 117 X Axis Unit SOflKOy 1 cnc dade detnr eid esas 119 Y Y Axis Autorange SOMKCY cnn rares 117 122 190 191 Y Axis Auto Range All Screens SOMKOY ae conuat a e rad 122 Y Axis Range Scl c 116 192 Y Axis Reference Positio
253. ets the active marker delta marker to the next maximum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT on page 239 CALCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum NEXT on page 213 Max Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the largest absolute peak value maximum or minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum APEak on page 239 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 136 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 2 11 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK on page 241 Next Min Sets the active marker delta marker to the next minimum of the selected trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 241 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT on page 214 Setting Limits Softkeys of the Lines Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Limits menu which is displayed when you press the LINES key Tasks chapter 3 3 8 Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 204 PAO GAGS En EE 137 Gonna MIO A CC ut 137 UE E 138 GT EE 138 L CurrentiMeani ecak tnnt ter tens nas 138 EEG NENNEN 139 Ero EE 139 ModAcc Limits Activates or
254. eturns a pair of values for each trace point The first value is the real part the second value the imaginary part The number of returned value pairs is the product of evaluation range length and points per symbol for the Vector UO result display and the evaluation range length for the Constellation UO result display Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 325 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 TRACe subsystem The Constellation Frequency and Vector Frequency result display return one value for each trace point on the y axis Symbols For the symbol table result diagrams the command returns one value for each num ber in the table The command always returns the values in the decimal format The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected Eye diagram For eye diagrams the command returns one value for each sample The number of returned values is the product of evaluation range length and points per symbol Result Summary For the Result Summary the command returns all values listed in the result table from top to bottom The order of the results is as follows result1 current lt result1_mean gt lt result1_peak gt lt result1_stddev gt lt result1_95 ile gt result2 current lt result2_mean gt Empty cells in the table return nothing The number of returned values depends on the modulation scheme you have selected PSK MSK and QAM modulation returns
255. ever if the pattern is very short approximately 10 symbols or if the signal is highly distorted tuning this parameter helps the pattern search to succeed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC IQCThreshold on page 308 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 165 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Select Pattern for Search Determines which of the patterns that are assigned to the current standard is to be searched for Only one pattern can be selected at a time However to check for several patterns in the same captured signal select the single sweep mode Statistic Count 0 or 1 and change the pattern The measurement is updated Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 310 Advanced Settings ji Advanced Pattern Settings Standard Patterns Pattern Details wv EDGE TSCO 4 Name EDGE TSC1 EDGE TSC4 EDGE TSC2 Description EDGE TSC3 EDGE Normal Burst EDGE TSC4 EDGE TSC5 tomment EDGE TSCA Training Sequence Code 4 Remove from Standard Mod Order 8 All Patterns Prefix Show Compatible Show All EDGE_DUMMY EDGE_DUMMY2 EDGE_TSCO EDGE_TSC1 EDGE_TSC2 EDGE_TSC3 Add to Standard w Pattern Search On Meas only if pattern was found New The Advanced Pattern Settings dialog box lists the patterns assigned to the currently selected standard You can add exi
256. ex Formulae and Abbreviations 7 1 2 1 Formulae PSK QAM and MSK Modulation For PSK QAM and MSK modulation the estimation model is described in detail in chapter chapter 2 6 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 56 The parameters of the PSK QAM and MSk specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 7 1 Evaluation of results in the PSK QAM and MSK result summary EVM RMS y Xen T Peak max EVM n T H Modulation RMS error 1 LEV Ty 20 log Z Jo nem TY Peak min MER n T H Lier 13 2 with MER n T 20 log Zant Magnitude RMS error y Eua ennt no Peak max MAG ERR n Tp p Phase error RMS gt PHASE _ERR n Tp Peak max PHASE ERR n T RHO correla tion coeffi cient 3 REF n DEN E KKF MEAS REF E gt REF n Y wEASQY AKF REF AKF MEAS Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 361 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Formulae IQ Offset C 2 2 JE o So Chin 1l Y REF k ry KF C 10 logio Chin EI IQ Imbalance j B B Je goe lin ES e TI Borg B 20 log g GO Ho Gain Imbal A G Ghin 2 G 20 10810 Gin aB Quadrature Error e i Oin D VE 0 Oin deg Amplitud Ra Droop A Val A 20 log 4j HB Sym 7 1 2 2 FSK Modulation For FSK m
257. f modulation With a degree of modulation of 4 all symbols have a value range of 0000 0001 0002 0003 with a degree of modulation of 8 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Edit on page 167 See New on page 167 See Symbols on page 169 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 307 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete This command deletes a sync sequence The sync sequence to be deleted must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Selects the pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DEL Deletes GSM TSCO pattern Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Delete on page 168 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold lt CorrelationLev gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold for pattern matching in percent A high level means stricter matching See Q Correlation Threshold on page 165 for details Setting parameters lt CorrelationLev gt numeric value Range 10 0 to 100 0 RST 90 0 Default unit PCT Example SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC IQCT 85 5 Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 165 See UO Correlat
258. f the measurement values are represented in the logarithmic domain the linear values are averaged The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain The linear values are indicated by the subscript lin in table 7 1 Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSV Mean E O M D xax 5 XM 5572 jn Xm M XM m with Xo 0 Peak SE A i XM Xidy Xy Xy if Ix xui x S M with Xy 7 Xy if Ix Zu A idx arg mess with Xp 0 TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 363 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Formulae Mathematical expression Calculation in R amp S FSV StdDev oy ou zs ES with 1 Xm e e oy Direna M 95 ile X95 M xosu Mrt x 0 95 Pr denotes the probability Sorting the values and giving the 95 ile 7 1 4 Trace Averaging The index m represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M coresponds to the statistics count The index s represents the st sample within the trace If the measurement results are represented in logarithmic domain the average operation is performed on the linear values The result is then subsequently converted back into logarithmic domain Measurements Calculation in R amp S FSV Xs M listed for RMS averaging RMS Average e Error Vector Magnitude EVM 2 8 e Me
259. ffects OFF If deactivated the wideband extension is not used the analysis bandwidth is restricted to 40 MHz However possible spurious effects are reduced RST ON if B160 available Manual operation See Maximum Bandwidth on page 159 TRIGger subsystem TRiGoer nzt tOuencell EVel DBtower eerie 327 TRIiGgernh SEQuence BBPowerHOLOol EE 328 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVelMPROWER cioe incen etn eee bk ner slice 328 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence FPower HOL Doft 328 TRIGger sn SEQuence TFPowerHYSTeresis etd rere t aiaia a AAA 329 TRIGSerens SEQUuence HOLDofff TIME 1222262 eco ete tate ENEE eo c chris 329 TRIGger ns SEQuence SLQPe 5 5 ediscere doeet eed on npa s ar nada e 329 KREE EE e 329 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 130 See Trigger Mode on page 159 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 327 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 TRIGger subsystem TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital inp
260. file format is described in chapter 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 206 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 268 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 279 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 10 OUTPut Subsystem Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Setting parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 selected measurement trace lt Path gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See ASCII Trace Export on page 128 See Export on page 144 OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut DIQ lt State gt If enabled the captured IQ data is output to the R amp S Digital UO Interface in a continuous stream This function requires the LVDS interface option R amp S FSV B17 Digital input and digital output cannot be used simultaneously Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Mode ADEMOD IQ VSA OUTPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the dig
261. g Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are descri Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 5 R amp S FSV K70 Preface EE Documentation Overview bed here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and pro gramming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also provided In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise
262. g to the following equation 0x 1 5r w t 10 PONE Lsry23sr 1 57 lt lt 3 75T 0 EC The following figure shows the frequency response of the standard specific measurement filters EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Magnitude dB DH 1 D DH DH D D DN D 1 1 D DH 1 b D D 02 04 06 08 1 12 14 16 18 2 Frequency in f symbol Formulae EDGE HSR Wide Pulse 20 2 24 E gp apnyubepy 100 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 Frequency in f ymbol EDGE NSR Aa sm e mm mm alc a a mr e e be e mm mm mm mr de e e e mr om cb mr e e zm mm A a mm mr mm mm le e mm mm mm sc ba mm mm mm mm da mm mm mm ei Aas es ss ales bss ss keck ms de Ae mm e zm mm sie sel a ww e t af e em d 20 Ee ni zt kg Se BI Hece 8p apnpube ET EE TEEN 90 0 4 05 O08 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 8 fsymbol 0 2 100 Frequency in Low Pass Narrow 20 FETTEN 4 amp e 2 2 2 2 24d2 2 2 2 2 2 b 2 24 adl en Bl Hess gp apnyiubeyy eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee GD bss 06 06 1 2 1 4 1 5 1 8 f ymbol 0 4 0 2 100 Frequency in Formulae Low Pass Wide 20 OA 0L L BZ O ET E gp apnyubepy eee eee eee eee eee ee eee eee ee 80 L 14 16 18 1 2 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 100 Frequency in f ymbol Rectangular 20 KU Aas e mm zm zm le e
263. ging settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Refresh on page 123 INPut Subsystem INPUBAT TONUSO eret en mena Denn Eso Ye sk Hac n nrna vens eege 272 INPUEAT REnUatOM AW TO icine 2222 certes uo te rae eere nne cp Ea ere EE bran UE eo UE enero ege 272 ei eet PWG e 272 INP Ut DIGIC DE EE 273 INPUT BIDARANGe COU PliinG EE 274 EL eier ee UPP GN EE 274 INPutDIQ RANGe UPPer IDJNIT 2 ieri etie ree re pecu un Ea SEENEN 275 leiren EE 275 lee D EE 275 INPUT EATT AUTO EE 276 INPUCEAT FESTA EE 276 INPUCGAIN E 277 lte EE 277 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 271 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 INPut Subsystem INPut ATTenuation lt Value gt This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against damage from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp
264. gt This command defines the zoom area Before you can define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 267 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 5 FORMat subsystem 100 100 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define the lt x2 gt lt y2 gt Zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode DISP ZOOM AREA 5 30 20 100 Enlarges the display of the measurement results in the area defined by the coordinates 5 30 and 20 100 FORMat subsystem FORMat DEXPoOnR DS EPAratOl iiei iii dansvese cenuvdasanvsnncadddenavagecccdedssancanccdectsaavaecenduydaaate 268 FORMat DEXPORtHEADOE icciissavcsicansantacecvacesssdectass Eed ENNER NENeREEEN EE Reg ee 269 FORMatLDEXPOR IMODE EE 269 FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma is to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of eval uation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is PO
265. gt NTRansition lt NTransition gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt register is changed from 1 to 0 the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt NTransition gt 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVENt bit is set Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PTRansition lt PTransition gt This bit acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDition part of the STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt register is changed from 0 to 1 the NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt PTransition gt 0 the EVENt bit is not set 1 the EVENt bit is set Usage SCPI confirmed Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 320 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El STATus QUEStionable Subsystem STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred in the evaluation of the selected result type since the last reading It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it Possible events limit violations are described for the individual result types in c
266. gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt Depends on the measurement and scale of the horizontal axis Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 133 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X ABSolute This command queries the absolute x value of the selected delta marker in the specified window The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt m gt 1 4 marker number Usage Query only Mode all Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 216 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command activat
267. gth should correspond to at least 8 times the modulation order For example with 64 QAM a result length of at least 8 64 512 symbols should be used Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 34 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping QAM Mappings The following QAM mappings are obtained from the mapping of the 1st quadrant which is always rotated by 11 2 for the subsequent quadrants and supplemented by a GRAY coded prefix for each quadrant Table 2 16 Derivation of QAM mappings n2 Le 10 xx Q 00 xx 10 xx Q 00 xx LN T 01 10 KT ef e e Fe AQ 44 Ss Is s x Dn to fe So 00 D 01 00 00 10 AE e SZ Su 41 11 xx 01 xx 11 xx 01 xx In the following diagrams the symbol mappings are indicated in hexadecimal and binary form 0 1 3 2 0000 0001 0011 0010 0100 0101 0111 0110 1100 1101 1111 1110 1000 1001 1011 1010 Fig 2 30 Constellation diagram for 16QAM GRAY including the logical symbol mapping hexadecimal and binary Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 35 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping 1011 1001 0001 0011 1010 1000 0000 0010 eE ec e A 6 D e e D 1110 1100 0100 0110 F e D 05 7 D e e D 1111 1101 0101 0111 Fig 2 31 Constellation diagram for 16QAM including the logical symbol mapping for EDGE hexadec imal and binary 1011 1001 0010 0011 1010 1000 0000 0001
268. hNFouratonHvGTeresslOWer nnne SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HY STeresis UPPer sss rennen nnnm SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation essen nnnee neret senes SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation MODE SENSe FREQuency GENTSr uiro nnn oneri rire rh tene err ep erkennen gue IEN Ge IEbREOuencv CENT er SGTER nennen trennen treten rennen erre nnne IENGeFbREOuencv CEN Ter STEP AUTO SENSe FREQuency OFESetl 1 2 irte e RE end usua ab abc pea de ERR aia A aT Ea A N degt EISEN REI NDT IEN Gel DDEMod ECALcOFFGet nennen nennt rretet rre e nre t rennen nnne nnne I SENSeEDDEMOdG ECALCG MODE nere terrenae eo e sie ne ep Ee pud ye eara EENE AESA SENSeEDDEMOG EPRalte AUTO 2 n todos aT KA apap aee aAA ANEA bo as Fu E esr E E aE GEHE RE REDE RE EE SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue SENSE DDEMod FACTonVAL ue IEN Gel DDEMod Eil TerAl Pa SENSeEDDEMOG FIETer STATO eiie Ieri eee et ER ce te Deae EP c ER Eee eed eve Pea trat SIS ET IRHBIBIS OHIO e M SENSeEDDEMOG ESIENSTIG 11 1 detti ted taped Pet e ped teda tdt teed det edge IEN Gel DDEMod FS AUTO SENSeEDDEMOG FSYNC EEVAOl crt i t eet aeree pae eo eee oe e epe Eae eina REAPER e HERE Lc ce DERE eoe P2 STEENS SENSeEDDEMOG FSYNCRESUIE ciet estet tno te ores ue eee doa da ud susc dE ner kcu tree anda 289 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE IGENGel DDEModkDATaGTATe rennen nnne rretre erre trr erre nr
269. hapter 5 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 on page 331 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt ResultType gt CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt CONDition Contains the result of the limit check during evaluation This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Readout does not delete the contents of the CON Dition section Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt ResultType gt CFRequency EVM FSK IQRHo MAGNitude PHASe CFRequency limit violations in Carrier Frequency evaluation EVM limit violations in EVM evaluation FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation IQRHo limit violations in I Q Offset and RHO evaluation MAGNitude limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 321 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt ENABle lt Mode
270. hat can be demodulated the sequence from the input signal Possible characters are Up to 6000 different sequences i e lt Data gt elements can be 0 to n 1 where n is the defined in total lt ModulationOrder gt Spaces tabs and line breaks are ignored lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA FILE as specified File End the exact number also depends on available memory space Sample xml file for known data lt RS VSA KNOWN DATA FILE Version 01 00 gt lt Comment gt Standard EDGE 8PSK lt Comment gt lt Base gt 16 lt Base gt lt ModulationOrder gt 8 lt ModulationOrder gt lt ResultLength gt 148 lt ResultLength gt lt Data gt 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 IURE IFY E LIF ETE Er Hr TIY IIL 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 lt Data gt lt Data gt 77 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 IUE FUP EE LIF rt Er IET TIY IIL 615 527 046 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 241 264 773 1 337 446 514 600 677 7 7 Data 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 Data Y 5 1 5 ITI ITT TTT ITT TIT TIT IIT 615 7 6 770 17 177 17 527 04 241 26 104 004 106 047 125 415 723 344 KSC A 337 446 514 600 677 7 77 lt Data gt 4 0 TI U H lt Data gt 7 777 511 727 242 206 341 366 632 073 607 770 173 705 631 011 235 507 476 330 522 L
271. he VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Restore Standard Files The standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz available at the time of delivery are restored to the Standards folder To restore default standard settings If you change predefined standard settings for a specific measurement you may want to return to the default settings later Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 193 R amp S FSV K70 3 3 5 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod STANdard PREset VALue on page 312 gt Inthe VSA gt Digital Standards menu select Standard Defaults The instrument is reset to the default settings of the standard last used Working with Pattern Searches Patterns provide a fixed sequence of symbols at a defined point in time in the symbol stream They are used in many digital mobile radio systems to evaluate the channel impulse response and to facilitate a demodulation in the receiver The pattern search is performed on the UO capture buffer The R amp S FSV K70 takes the symbol numbers of the pattern modulates the pattern according to the Transmit filter and the modulation and subsequently searches the UO capture buffer for this UO pattern The K70 option can then adapt its result range to this pattern Predefined Patterns Common standards usually have predefined pattern lists wi
272. he Transmit filter are usually chosen such that their combination results in an Inter Symbol Interference ISI free system see figure 2 4 and figure 2 5 I Auto Sieft Deum fct CaptureOV I Auto Function of TX Filter or symbol rate Set by user Decided Symbols bits Lowpass filter of IQ RX capture Filter REF Signal IQ Signal Symbols Demodulation o amp symbol DIEN 1 decision I HW 5 ba 2 Correction E Parameters gt a 2 processing 5 correction of 9 9331 Mi Analyzer estimated 23 errors 2E n I Fig 2 4 Measurement filter in the block diagram MSK PSK QAM and UserQAM Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 17 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing k Any QAM Any PSK bits i pes Map bits to TX Filter i Gage instantaneous frequenc Polar to eps cartesian frequency pulse f i Magnitude 1 k Fig 2 5 Modulator with Transmit filter in detail As the measurement filters of the R amp S FSV K70 have low pass characteristics they suppress high frequency distortion components in the Meas Ref Error signal The errors are weighted spectrally Thus turning off the measurement filter can have an influence on the numeric and graphical error values However the measurement filter should be switched off
273. he reference point is displayed in the middle of the result range RIGHt The reference point is displayed at the right edge of the result range RST LEFT Example CALC TRAC ADJ ALIG LEFT The reference point is displayed at the left edge Mode VSA Manual operation See Alignment on page 171 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust VALue Reference This command defines the reference point for the display Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Setting parameters lt Reference gt TRIGger BURSt PATTern TRIGger The reference point is the start of the capture buffer BURSt The reference point is the burst PATTern The instrument selects the reference point and the alignment RST TRIGger Example CALC TRAC ADJ BURS Defines the reference point as the burst Mode VSA Manual operation See Reference on page 171 CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt VALue lt TrRefType gt This commands selects the meas or the ref signal for a trace Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 256 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 lt t gt 1 6 Setting parameters lt TrRefType gt MEAS REF RST The default for trace 1 is always the measurement signal MEAS For all other traces the default signal type depends on the current measurement Example CALC2 TRAC5 MEAS Sets the measurement signal for trace 5 Usage S
274. he symbol mapping 2 3 6 Frequency Shift Keying FSK To illustrate symbol mappings for FSK modulations the symbol numbers are marked in the logical mapping diagram versus the instantaneous frequency An instantaneous fre quency of zero in the baseband corresponds to the input frequency of the analyzer 2FSK NATURAL With 2FSK the symbol decision is made by a simple frequency discriminator Symbol Numbers Fig 2 23 Constellation diagram for 2FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping AFSK With 4FSK the symbol decision is made by a frequency discriminator with 3 decision thresholds 2 3 0 2 3 normalized to the FSK reference deviation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 31 Symbol Mapping 1 3 1 3 Fig 2 24 Constellation diagram for 4FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers EE 1 3 Fig 2 25 Constellation diagram for 4FSK GRAY including the logical symbol mapping Symbol Numbers EE 1 3 Fig 2 26 Constellation diagram for 4FSK for APCO C4FM and APCO Phase 2 including the logical symbol mapping R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping 8FSK NATURAL Symbol 3 Numbers Fig 2 27 Constellation diagram for 8FSK NATURAL including the logical symbol mapping 2 3 7 Minimum Shift Keying MSK MSK modulation causes modulation dependent phase shifts of 90 which can be shown in an Constellat
275. he symbol rate and h is a scaling factor termed the modulation index The transmitted or reference FSK signal is formed by frequency modulation of the instantaneous frequency Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 65 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis ae ee Het Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors REF PE u du Ligen where pe t denotes the phase of the transmitted waveform In the R amp S FSV K70 a continuous phase FSK signal is assumed which is ensured by the integral in the expres sion for REF t A graphical depiction of the reference waveform generation is shown below in Figure figure 2 55 Frequency Modulator Fig 2 55 Reference complex baseband FSK signal generation Reference Deviation The transmitted symbols s are assumed to be chosen from a finite and real valued constellation of M values 6 c5 Sy The maximum absolute constellation point is denoted by c4x The maximum phase contribution of a data symbol is given by Pmax 72 2 Cua s at The reference deviation of the FSK signal is defined as 1 oo A rer W i ph Smax Let dt In the R amp S FSV K70 the frequency pulse filter is normalized such that f ee at 1 and the constellation for M FSK is assumed to be 1 3 M 1 which implies The expression for the reference deviation in terms of the modulation index is therefore given by 1 A per 53h 1 Somo The above formula prov
276. ibed in chapter 3 3 7 2 How to Load Known Data Files on page 200 3 3 7 4 Reference Known Data File Syntax Description When you load a Known Data file the R amp S FSV K70 application checks whether the file complies with the following syntax Table 3 7 Known Data File Syntax Syntax Possible Values Description lt RS_VSA_KNOWN_DATA_FILE as specified File Header Version 01 00 gt lt Comment gt lt Comment gt arbitrary Optional file description lt Base gt lt Base gt 2 16 The base used to specify the lt Data gt values binary or hexadec imal For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use binary 2 lt ModulationOrder gt lt Modulation 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Number of values each symbol can represent order of modula Order 256 tion e g 8 for 8 PSK For lt ModulationOrder gt values 232 use Base 2 lt ResultLength gt lt ResultLength gt 1 up to 2000 Number of symbols in each Data element The number must be identical to the Result Length setting in the Result Range dialog box i e the number of symbols to be demodulated the exact number also depends on available memory space Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 202 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deeg Configuring VSA measurements Syntax Possible Values Description lt Data gt lt Data gt One character per symbol in One possible sequence of symbols t
277. idamble fails or no burst is found This bit is also set if in pre measurements mode the result differs too strongly from the expected value 12 ACPLimit device specific This bit is set if a limit for the adjacent channel power measurement is violated see STATus QUEStionable ACPLimit register 13 Not used Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 333 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register Bit No Meaning 14 Digital UO device specific This bit is set if a connection error occurs at the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 option See STATus QUEStionable DIQ register 15 This bit is always 0 5 2 STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt Register This register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection for each window in each VSA channel It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition on page 323 and STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt on page 324 Table 5 2 Status error bits in STATus QUEStionable SYNC register for R amp S FSV K70 Bit Definition 0 Burst not found This bit is set if a burst could not be detected Sync not found This bit is set if the sync sequence pattern of the midamble could not be detected 2 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0
278. ides the necessary calculation for measurement of an FSK signal with known symbol rate and modulation index Calculation examples Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 66 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis mI A M lM ee Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors The GSM standard describes the transmission of binary data using MSK i e 2FSK modulation with a modulation index of h 1 2 at a symbol rate of 270 8333 KHz The reference deviation is therefore given by A per H 2 1 270 8333 kHz 67 7083 kHz The APCO Project 25 standard phase 2 defines a H CPM signal i e 4FSK with a modulation index of h 1 3 and a symbol rate of 6 KHz The reference deviation is A per HEET 2 6 2 4 Error Model The FSK measurement model used assumes that signal distortions in both the magnitude and phase frequency are present as well as additive noise The measured signal model is expressed as MEAS Aasch ef pois 4 oh with n t is a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Apis1 t is the distorted magnitude model and gP ST is the distorted phase model The magnitude model is given by Apisr t Ke with K is a constant scaling factor which can be interpreted as the system gain and a is the amplitude droop in Nepers per second The phase model is given by Opisr B Prep c C t V D t with B is a scaling factor which results in
279. if non linear distortions have to be measured they usually produce high frequency components Predefined measurement filters The most frequently required measurement filters are provided by the R amp S FSV K70 Table 2 4 Overview of predefined measurement filters EDGE NSR Measurement filter required for the EDGE Normal Symbol Rate standard see 3GPP TS 45 005 chapter 4 6 Modulation Accu racy The resulting system is NOT inter symbol interference free EDGE HSR Narrow Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Narrow Pulse standard EDGE HSR Wide Pulse Measurement filter required for the EDGE High Symbol Rate Wide Pulse standard Gauss Classic Gauss filter with an adjustable BT Low ISI Meas Filter Measurement filter implemented to retain a low intersymbol infer ference Best suited for eye diagrams or UO vector diagrams Not necessarily suited for EVM evaluation due to amplification in the pass band Low Pass Narrow Pass band up to Feymbo 2 Stop band starts at Fsymboi 40dB Low Pass Wide Pass band up to Fsymbol Stop band starts at 1 5 F 400B Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period integrate and dump effect H Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 18 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 2 7 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing RRC Root Raised
280. igher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN LEFT Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum to the left of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum The corre sponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT2 MIN NEXT Sets delta marker 2 to the next higher minimum value Manual operation See Next Min on page 137 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 214 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the delta marker to the current trace minimum The correspond ing delta marker is activated first if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 MIN Sets delta marker 3 to the minimum value of the associated trace CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarke
281. in symbols 15000 Run In The number of symbols before the signal is assumed to have valid modu lated symbols Run Out The number of symbols before the falling edge that do not necessarily need to have a valid modulation Note The burst excluding its Run In Out areas is sometimes referrred to as the useful part The minimum length of the useful part Min Length Run In Run Out must be 210 The parameter Run In Out can be used to influence the range over which the EVM is minimized The internal synchronization range is the overlapping area of the result range and the burst excluding its Run In Out areas Hence this parameter also allows for demodulation of bursts with mixed modulations e g Bluetooth because it can be used to explicitely exclude symbols from influencing the synchronization Remote command SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue on page 311 Pattern If enabled the instrument expects the signal to contain a pattern Note The pattern search itself must be enabled separately in the Pattern Search Set tings see Auto On Off on page 165 By default the pattern search is active if the signal description contains a pattern This function cannot be enabled if the signal description does not contain a pattern Select the pattern from the selection list To change the pattern settings press Advanced Settings on page 166 For details on working with pattern searches see chapter 3 3 5 Working
282. ing 0 Error in current Frequency Error RMS value 1 Error in mean Frequency Error RMS value 2 Error in peak Frequency Error RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current Frequency Error peak value 6 Error in mean Frequency Error peak value 7 Error in peak Frequency Error peak value 8 9 These bits are not used 10 Error in current Frequency Deviation value 11 Error in mean Frequency Deviation value 12 Error in peak Frequency Deviation value 13 15 These bits are not used Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 337 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Messages 6 Support The R amp S Support softkey in the SAVE RCL gt Export menu stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument The SupportSave df1 file contains the instrument settings and input data and can be loaded to the instrument again for inspection later Remember to set the sweep mode to Single Sweep beforehand as Continuous Sweep would immediately overwrite the loaded input data If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster 6 1 Explanation of Error Messages The following section describes error messages and possible causes Message Bursi Not Foundo 2 2 rient ptc de EENS dd 338 Messag
283. ings in the Signal Description tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box describe the expected input signal and determine which settings are available for configuration You can define a Pattern to which the instrument can be synchronized thus adapting the result range A graphical preview of the current Signal Description configuration is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Modulation amp Signal Description el X Signal Description Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 102 sym Max Length 1600 sym 416 667 us 60 417 ns 60 417 ns Run In 1 sym 2 Run Out 1 sym 2 V Pattern Name TETRA_S Description 4 Burst Length oeh D Run Oul MOffset Continuous Signals Burst Signal uon ueteri ted ceci 151 E GE 151 SE e Op 151 enc a faces headers ve EE dE 152 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 150 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deeg Configuring VSA measurements Continuous Signal Burst Signal Determines whether the signal is continuous or contains bursts For bursts further set tings are available Parameter Description Min Length Shortest expected burst length in symbols Max Length Longest expected burst length
284. ion Defines the number of symbols that may differ from the burst length without influencing the burst detection A search tolerance of 5 for example with a minimum and maximum burst length of 100 will detect bursts that are 95 to 100 symbols long Note that due to the fact that the VSA does not have knowledge of the ramp length there is an uncertainty in the burst search algorithm Thus setting this parameter to O will result in a failed burst search for most signals Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance on page 304 Min Gap Length Auto Configuration Represents the minimum distance in symbols between adjacent bursts The default value is 1 symbol in order to make sure that the burst search finds bursts that are very close to each other However in case the capture buffer does not contain bursts that are narrowly Modulation Orderd it is recommended to increase the value This makes the burst search faster and also more robust for highly distorted signals Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 163 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Configuring VSA measurements Note that this parameter only influences the robustness of the burst search It should not be used to explicitly exclude certain bursts from the measurement For example setting the minimum gap length to 100 symbols does not ensure that the burst search does not find bursts that are more narrowly Modul
285. ion MODE nanana 284 SENSE KEEN T 285 SENSe DDEMod ECAEc OFESOl 1 densa eee ao dace cene o bunte unen ue Eege 285 I SENSe F DBEMod ESALGEMOSDIE 2 rapide n pa ere a ase da a aaa pP Edu RED er Rad 285 SENSe E DEEMoOdIEPISate ALTO ertet EENS EE SN Rer elca 286 ISENSeEDDEMaSd EPRale VAL 1 nire toe Eae cda e noun GEAR ba ere e bae aea 286 SENSeEDDEMod FACTeory VALUS EE 287 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 281 SENSe subsystem SENSE DDEMOd FILTer ALPHA eee etre epa rende cepe ge RANNER 287 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe ccce tt te tntteenttentettnnis 287 SENSe DE EMOG FORMAL C UO EE 288 SENSeEDDEMOY FSK NO Tate eebe CERS REESEN ed 288 SENSe F DBEModIFSYNGUAL FQ EE 288 SENSeE DBEModESYNCUDEVOl iiie a Eee er gent aire cr eee DDR aD rem ele 289 SENSeEDDEMOod FSYNG TT LEE 289 ISENSel DDEMOdESNTMODE tentent tentent tentent 289 SENSe DBEMOodISBATSS KN KEE 290 ISENSel DDEMOdKDATaENAMEL tentent tenent tette 290 SENSE DDEMod MAP Ping GATalag utri ie oe onere etn i tx eee PN end 291 SENSeE DDEMod MAPPingE VALUe 22 2 22 12 1 225 rra NISSEN 291 SENSeTE DBEMOOGMFILEIGEAEPHoa iren itecto tese aree prenait tede Deere das 291 ISENSeE DE EMO WIR iUis 291 SENSe DDEMod MFIEter NAME 2 egeneietgeboesieeeek SEENEN SEENEN NEE EE ika biaia aiaa 292 SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe eccentric 292 I SENSe DBE
286. ion I Q diagram As with PSK demodulation is performed by eval uation of the phase positions Table 2 14 MSK NATURAL Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Table 2 15 MSK GSM Logical symbol mapping Modulation symbol binary indication MSB LSB 0 1 Phase shift 90 90 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 33 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping Fig 2 28 MSK for GSM and NATURAL and DMSK Constellation Diagram including the symbol map ping Similar to PSK differential coding can also be used with MSK In this case too the information is represented by the transition of two consecutive symbols The block dia gram of the coder is shown below Fig 2 29 DMSK differential encoder in the transmitter d input symbol 0 1 of differential encoder d 4 input symbol delayed by the symbol period Ts d output symbol 0 1 of differential encoder The logical symbol mapping is then performed on the XOR coded bitstream d 2 3 8 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation QAM In the case of QAM the information is represented by the signal amplitude and phase The symbols are arranged in a square constellation in the UO plane To ensure reliable demodulation symbol numbers should be distributed evenly with respect to the symbol alphabet As arule of thumb the result len
287. ion Threshold on page 165 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE lt MeasOnlyOnPattern gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that the measurement is performed only if the measurement was synchronous to the selected sync pattern SYNC The measured values are displayed and considered in the error evaluation only if the set sync pattern was found Bursts with a wrong sync pattern sync not found are ignored If an invalid or no sync pattern is found the measurement waits and resumes running only when a valid sync pattern is found The command is available only if the sync sequence search is activated using the DDEM SEARch BURSt STATe ON command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 304 With MEAS selected the measure ment is performed independently of successful synchronization Setting parameters MeasOnlyOnPatternzMEAS SYNC RST MEAS Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 308 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee ee Ea a a eee ee nM SENSe subsystem Example DDEM SEAR SYNC MODE SYNC The measurement is performed only with successful synchroni zation Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto On Off on page 165 See Meas only if pattern symbols correct on page 165 See Advanced Settings on page 166 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME lt Name gt This command selects a sync pattern for editing or for a new entry Setting parameters
288. ion Type Input RF Baseband Check the following parameters at the DUT and the K70 Reference Level overload Sideband inversion Swap IQ Demodulation Failed dications are e g Sync Failed Unstable Message in the Status Bar The measurement UO Constellation does not look at all like a constellation Check the Sg Y To make sure you realize once the problem is fixed switch on the EVM trace and keep an eye on it Y Press the SWEEP Hardkey and set the statistic count to 1 Then press Single Sweep The FSV will stop capturing IQ data which makes it easier for you to debug Burst Min Length 1I48sym 546 462 us dd8sym 546 462 us 11 077 us y 11 077 us gt measurement Mag CapBuffer e colored bar 7 Result Range in a range where you expect the signal to have the set modulation x Try to increase Run In and Run Out in the Signal Description dialog Advanced Use Pattern for Sync Auto on Off See part 2 es X Is your signal bursted C Sync prefers more valid symbols Do you see a Sync prefers yes more valid symbols Message e Y This can be problematic If you have a pattern you can try to use it for synchronization i e use the setting Coarse Synchronization Pattern an you increase the length of your
289. ion method without the extension For user defined standards the file path must be included Default standards predefined by Rohde amp Schwarz do not require a path definition A list of short forms for predefined standards is provided below Example DDEM PRES TETRA NDDOWN Switches the predefined digital standard TETRA_Discontinuous Downlink on DDEM PRES C R_S Instr usr standards USER_GSM Switches the user defined digital standard USER_GSM on Mode VSA Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 113 See Load Standard on page 113 For predefined standards the following short forms can be used 3G_WCDMA_FWD 3G_WCDMA 3G_WCDMA_REV 3G_WCDMA APCO25_C4FM APCO25 CQPSK Bluetooth DH1 Bluetooth DH3 Bluetooth DH5 CDMA2K 1X FWD F1CD Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 296 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem CDMA2K_1X_REV R1CD DECT_P32_FixedPart DECT_FP DECT_P32_PortablePart DVB_S2_16APSK DVB_S2_32APSK DVB_S2_8PSK DVB_S2_QPSK EDGE_NB EDGE_8PSK EDGE_NormalBurst EDGE_8PSK EDGE_16QAM EDGE_32QAM F1CD CDMA2K_1X_FWD GSM AB GSM AccessBurst GM FB GSM FrequencyBurst GSM GSM NormalBurst GSM AB GSM AccessBurst GM FB GSM FrequencyBurst GSM NB GSM NormalBurst GSM SB GSM SynchronisationBurst TETRA NCDOWN TETRA ContinousDownlink TETRA NDDOWN TETRA DiscontinuousDownlink ZIGBEE BPSK 868M 300K ZIGBEE BPSK
290. ionally you can specify whether absolute or percentage values are displayed For statistics measurements both the x axis and the y axis can be scaled to optimize the display The range of the displayed x axis for statistics diagrams can be defined in the following ways e manually be defining a range in dB e manually by defining reference values and positions e automatically according to the current results The range of the displayed y axis can be defined in the following ways e manually by defining the minimum and maximum values to be displayed e automatically according to the current results After changing the scaling you can restore the default settings Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 190 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Configuring VSA measurements To define the number of bars 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt X Axis Quantize see X Axis Quantize on page 117 3 Enter the number of bars to be displayed The diagram is adapted to display the specified number of bars To define the scaling manually using a reference point With this method you define a reference value on the x axis The y axis is adapted so that it crosses the x axis at the reference value 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt X Axis Reference Value see X Axis Reference Value on page 117 3 Enter a reference value on the x axis in the c
291. ions Formulae Test parameter Formula Phase Phaseypas t Z MEAS t Phase pgp t Z REF t Frequency 1 d FREQ yeas t gg MEAM 1 d FREQprr t REI Magnitude error MAG _ ERR t MAG yas t MAG pee t Phase error PHASE _ERR t PHASE yas t PHASE pep t Frequency error FREQ _ERR FREQ uras FREOng FSK Modulation The trace based results for FSK signals are the same as those available for linear mod ulation types However as the signal processing for FSK signals is performed on the magnitude and instantaneous frequency the UO based results first require a reconstruc tion of the reference and measured UO waveforms as illustrated in Reconstruction of the reference and measured UO waveforms for FSK modulation The dashed outline of the compensate blocks indicate that these operations are option ally de activated depending on the corresponding user settings With respect to FSK measurements the optional compensation parameters are e FSK Reference deviation e Carrier frequency drift Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 359 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Formulae Figure 3 Compensate i Reference i Ref deviation Frequency frer n E Compensate Frequency Reference Ref deviation Modulator UO Measured Frequency fugas Qt Compensate Compensate Frequency Measured Timing er ot gt
292. isables pattern searches If Auto is selected pattern search is enabled automatically if Pattern is selected in the Signal Description tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog box see Pattern on page 151 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO on page 305 Meas only if pattern symbols correct If enabled measurement results are only displayed and averaged if a valid pattern has been found For measurements of signals with patterns that are averaged over several Sweeps this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the result of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 308 Auto Configuration Configures the pattern search automatically If enabled the 1 Q Correlation Threshold setting is not available Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh PATTern CONFigure AUTO on page 305 UO Correlation Threshold Auto Configuration The I Q correlation threshold decides whether a match is accepted or not during a pattern search see also chapter 3 3 5 Working with Pattern Searches on page 194 If the parameter is set to 100 only UO patterns that match totally with the input signal are found This is only the case for infinite SNR The default value is 90 As long as the pattern is found there is no need to change this parameter How
293. it In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously for each evaluation the average is calculated over the last 10 capture sets moving average Manual In single sweep mode captures UO data until the defined number of evaluations have been performed In continuous sweep mode captures UO data continuously if trace averaging is selected the average is calculated over the defined num ber of capture sets moving average Note If the Statistic Count is setto f trace averaging is not performed Max Hold and Min Hold however remain active unlike in Spec trum mode Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt VALue on page 317 Select Result Rng Opens an input field to select the result range you want to analyze By default the R amp S FSV shows the results over all result ranges that have been captured in the data capturing process and are in the R amp S FSV s memory By selecting a range number you can analyze a specific result range e g a particular burst The range depends on the number of result ranges you have captured previously A selection of the result range is possible in single sweep mode only For more information refer also to e Capture Length on page 158 e Result Length on page 170 e Statistics Count on page 123 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh MBURst CALC on page 304 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 124 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector
294. itMACCuracy EVM PMEanVAL ue nnn eene nnne 222 CAL Culate nzLIMtMACCuracvEVM PPDESKVAL ue 222 CAL Culate cnz LIMitMACCuracy EVMRCUbRrentVAl ue 222 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM RMEan VAL ue 222 CAL Culate cnz LIMitMACCuracyEVMRPEakVAlL ue 222 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FDERror CURRent VALue 222 CAL Culate cnz LlMitMACCuracyFDERrorMEAN MAL ue 222 CAL Culate nzLlMtMACCuracv FDERrorPREAKVAL ue nennen enne nennen enne 222 CAlCulate nz LUlMrtMACCuracvFERRorbCUbRrenVAl ue 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue eese nennen rennen 223 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracvFtERbRorPPEakVAL ue 223 PE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 374 R amp S FSV K70 List of Commands CAL Culate cnzLlMitMACCuracvFtERbRorbRCUlbRrent VAl ue esses nnn 223 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracvFtERbRorRME an VAl ue esses eene nen nennen nnne nnne nna 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue sees enn eene merenti 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue esses eene 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue essen nnne nnne 223 CALOulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue sese 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue eese nennen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue esses enne enne enne nennen 223 CALOCulate n LIMit
295. ital baseband output to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface description for the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 280 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt NotUsed gt to be ignored lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example OUTP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA 4 11 SENSe subsystem SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYS Teresis LOWer esses enne 283 IGENGelAD lust CONEiouratton HvGTeresls Uber 284 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation esses eene nene 284 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURat
296. itches on an additional delta marker Pressing the Marker 1 to Marker 4 softkey again switches the corresponding marker off Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 243 CALCulate n MARKercm X on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 246 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 215 CALCulate n DELTamarkercm X on page 216 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 217 Marker Norm Delta Changes the active marker to a normal norm or delta marker with respect to marker 1 Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m STATe on page 243 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 215 Couple Screens On Off Markers in all diagrams with the same time or symbols x axis have coupled x values except for capture buffer display i e if you move the marker in one diagram it is moved in all coupled diagrams Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 133 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10dB Freq 15 0GHz ResLen 148 Input SGL Count 200 200 A MagAbs Meas amp Ref 1M Avg B mE EN int 0 1 Cirw D Symbol Table Hexadecimal ors arses esas py 9 00 01 01 00 01 09 oof o0 01 op 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 00 oot 00 00 00 01 gojo 00 01
297. ition consisting of one or more symbols Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 307 Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for compatibility with FSQ Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 306 Result Range and Evaluation Range Settings You configure the result range and evaluation range settings in the Result Range Align ment and Evaluation Range dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Result Range on page 169 e Evaluation Range on page 171 Result Range The Result Range tab contains the settings for the result range The result range deter mines which part of the capture buffer burst or pattern is displayed For more information see chapter 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range on page 186 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 169 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements A preview of the result display with the current settings is displayed in the visualization area at the bottom of the dialog box The Result Range tab is also displayed when you select the Range Settings softkey in the Meas Config menu see Range Settings on page 132 Result Range Alignment and Evaluation Range E x Result Range Length Result Length 601 846 us Result Range Alignment Reference C Capture Burst Pattern Alignment
298. justing the minimum gap length For more information see Burst Search on page 162 The pattern search is switched on fails and the alignment is with reference to the pattern In case the pattern search is switched on and the reference for the alignment is the pattern and not the burst a non detected pattern causes the result range to be positioned at the beginning of the capture buffer Hence if a the burst does not start right at the beginning of the capture buffer you will see a Burst Not Found Message Solution Refer to Message Pattern Not Found on page 341 Switch the pattern search off Choose Burst as the reference for the result range alignment Message Pattern Not Found The Pattern Not Found error message can have several causes The burst search has failed If burst and pattern search are active the application looks for patterns only within the found bursts Hence in case the burst search fails the pattern search will also fail Solution Try one of the following Make sure the burst search is successful Deactivate the burst search but keep the pattern search active For more information see Message Burst Not Found on page 338 Burst Search on page 162 The offset of the pattern within the burst is incorrectly set It is possible to set a pattern offset to speed up the pattern search The offset of the pattern would be the offset of the pattern start with respect to the s
299. l In the R amp S FSV K70 however this replacement is part of the transmit filter routine Thus the R amp S FSQ and the R amp S FSV require different transmit filters for measuring the same FSK MSK signal Example e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was NONE you need to choose Rec tangular as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSV e f your transmit filter for the R amp S FSQ K70 was GAUSS you need to choose GMSK as the transmit filter type in the R amp S FSV Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is signifi cantly different Solution e Make sure that the position of the Evaluation Lines is reasonable The Result Sum mary only evaluates sample instants that are within the evaluation lines Hence in the case the Result Range covers the burst ramps it is important to adjust the Evaluation Range appropriately Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 353 R amp S FSV K70 Support Frequently Asked Questions Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m t el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Quadrature Err Start 76 sym C Mag CapBuf Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Std EDGE 16QAM SR 270 833 kHz m t el Att 20 0 dB Freq 1 0GHz Res Len 300 SGL ResRange Count 0 BURST PATTERN 1 Clrw Phase Err RMS Carrier Freq Err Gain Imbalance Qu
300. l Description dialog box The signal description of the expected input signal determines the available configuration settings and the available burst or pattern settings You can define a pattern to which the result range can be aligned see Pattern on page 151 A schematic preview of the current signal description is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly The Modulation tab contains modulation and Transmit filter settings A live preview of the Constellation UO trace using the currently defined settings is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box to visualize the changes to the settings For details on the available settings see Modulation on page 146 and Signal Descrip tion on page 150 Frontend Displays the Frontend tab of the Frontend amp I Q Capture Settings dialog box A live preview of the signal with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Note that this works only in continuous sweep mode For details on the available settings see Frontend on page 153 HO Capture Displays the I Q Capture tab of the Frontend amp I Q Capture Settings dialog box A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Note that this works
301. l R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 273 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 INPut Subsystem lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA E
302. l diagrams show the equivalent complex baseband signal Modulation Error Ratio MER The modulation error ratio MER is closely related to EVM MER 20 log EVM where the EVM is normalized to the mean reference power Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 59 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis El Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors UO Offset Origin Offset Quadrature Inphase Fig 2 50 Effect of an I Q or origin offset after demodulation and error compensation figure 2 50 shows the effect of an UO offset in the transmitter The Q offset can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the offset does not affect the EVM Gain Imbalance Quadrature Inphase Fig 2 51 Effect of gain imbalance The gain difference in the and Q channels during signal generation in the transmitter is referred to as gain imbalance The effect of this error on the constellation diagram and the unit circle are shown in figure 2 51 In the example the gain in the channel is slightly reduced which causes a distortion of coordinates in the direction The unit circle of the ideal constellation points has an elliptic shape The gain imbalance can be compensated for if the corresponding option is selected in the demodulation settings In this case the imbalance does not affect the EVM Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 60 R
303. l sequence in the input signal In this case the results for the limited reference area are more precise at the cost of less accurate results outside this area Thus the result range should be setto the length of the reference area The reference area can be defined either using a pattern or using a known data sequence from a Known Data file If no predefined data sequences are available for the signal the detected data is used by default If Auto mode is selected and a Known Data file has been loaded and activated for use the known data sequences are used Otherwise the detected data is used Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in reference to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default syn chronization using the detected data is performed Known Data The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data Pattern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern Detected Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data Data Remote command SENSe DDEMod FSYNc AUTO on page 288 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE on page 289 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc RESult on page 289 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 177 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Configuring VSA measurements If SER lt This setting
304. laedere ctor ecce disc agens didi Lada noie Us ea ae Inu 118 L Adast Segs ORI OT EE 118 Ranges Symbol Table ode DI exerted bere Meer Dieta e tea 118 ir MT 118 Doo 118 iro QOEM 118 Mic Me uuu 119 dn e CE 119 B A 119 e Cl EE 119 Kerger Reesender Eed Ee E 119 PCA 9116 EN 119 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 119 RF Aten AutoMMech Au Autos TTT 120 BEV Ae TC MEE 120 El Atten Mode AUTOS MIN DT 120 Ref Level ET 121 EPUA CD EE 121 Reference Level Defines the reference level in dBm The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display To get an ideal reference level use Auto Level function For more information see e Auto Level on page 121 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 265 Ranges Opens a submenu to define the display range for normal or spectral displays see Result Type Transformation on page 182 For details on scaling see chapter 3 3 3 Changing the Display Scaling on page 189 Y Axis Range Ranges Opens an edit dialog field to define the y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 263 Y
305. lance lt ComplQImbalance gt This command switches the compensation of the IQ imbalance on or off Setting parameters ComplQImbalance ON OFF RST OFF Example DDEM NORM IQIM OFF Switches the compensation off Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 174 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset ComplQOffset This command switches the compensation of the IQ offset on or off Setting parameters ComplQOffset ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 294 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee ee a ee ee ed SENSe subsystem Example DDEM NORM IQOF OFF Switches the compensation off Mode VSA Manual operation See Compensate for on page 174 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue lt Normalize gt This command switches the compensation of the UO offset and the compensation of amplitude droop on or off When queried the command returns 1 if both are ON and 0 if both are off Otherwise an error is returned The command is kept because of compatibility to the R amp S FSQ and won t be supported in later versions Instead use the new command SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQOFfset on page 294 Setting parameters lt Normalize gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM NORM ON Turn on IQ offset compensation and amplitude droop compensa tion Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod PRATe lt CaptOverSampling gt This command determines the numbe
306. laton nz ENAbDle eene enne nennen nnne nenn nennen nnn 319 SGTATusOUEG onable MODulston nzN Ransitton enne enne 320 STATusOUEGtonable MODulaton nz P Ransition nennen nnne 320 STATus QUEStionable MODulation n EVENt eessessseesseesseeeeennenneen een een nereenre enne 319 STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition STATus QUESItionable SYNG ENABIS irre ei eh b rhe EE Her EE anes Eiaa eiia REN 323 STATusOUEG onable GvNCNTbRansitton eene e trennen ener 324 STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansSition rennen ne nnnn ntn pieirii 324 STATusOUEG onable SNCTEVENUN eene enne teens tne ten nnn nnns inns inre nnns innen 324 Pe Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 377 R amp S FSV K70 List of Commands STAT S QUEStionable EVEN 319 AECH RRE e le EE TRACe IQ WBANG STATS ito ertet EE dE a dd Ed ned dee RER RN E EE TRlGoernzlZSEOuencel DBBbower HOL Doft TRIGger n SEQuence HOLDoft TIME 52 onusta enne rante nnn ueteres TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff TRIGger n SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eese nennen nennen TRIGger n SEQuence LEVel BBPowWer enean eterne erret ther ina netta iato batter ni ane anan TRIGger n SEQuence LEVel IFPower e rrt teret rentrer ttu era eer bean coneneanes e ele ee E Ree TRIGger n SEQuence SOURCe 1 reae the anta dt ariin aa ER EE ER SER ana ar R onn naa IGENZGe IADJustCO
307. le 4 1 Mode VSA Table 4 1 Parameters for BER result values Result Current Min Max Acc Bit Error Rate CURRent MIN MAX TOTal Total of Errors TECurrent TEMIN TEMAX TETotal Total of Bits TCURrent TMIN TMAX TTOTal CALCulate lt n gt DDEM SPECtrum STATe lt AddEvaluation gt This command switches the result display to spectrum mode Spectral evaluation is available for the following result parameters e MAGNItude e PHASe UPHase e FREQuency e Real Imag RIMAG The result parameters are defined using the CALC FORM command see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt AddEvaluation gt ON OFF RST Off Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 247 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Example CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS Selects the measurement signal for display CALC FORM PHAS Selects the phase as the result parameter CALC DDEM SPEC STAT ON Selects spectral display of the phase Mode VSA Manual operation See Result Type Transformation on page 182 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STATe lt Auto gt This command restricts the evaluation range The evaluation range is considered for the following display types eye diagrams constellation diagrams modulation accuracy statistic displays spectrum displays Suffix lt n gt 1 4
308. les auto pattern search Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 305 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto On Off on page 165 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog lt Patterns gt This command reads the names of all patterns stored on the hard disk Setting parameters lt Patterns gt CURRent ALL CURRent Only patterns that belong to the current standard ALL All patterns RST ALL Example DDEM PRES GSM AB Selects the digital standard GSM Access Burst DDEM SEAR SYNC PATT ADD GSM TSCIl Adds GSM_TSC1 to standard DDEM SEAR SYNC CAT CURR Reads out all patterns that belong to the standard Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent Comment This command defines a comment to a sync pattern The pattern must have been selected before using the DDEM SEARch SYNC NAME command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 Setting parameters Comment string Example DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME GSM TSCO Name of pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 0001000000000001 Data of pattern DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM PATTERN FOR PPSK Comment Mode VSA Manual operation See Advanced Settings on page 166 See Edit on page 167 See New on page 167 See Comment on page 169 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 306 R amp S FSV K70
309. lize EVM to Mean Ref Power Estimation Points Sym W Auto 1 Coarse Synchronization v Auto Data Fine Synchronization Auto Known Data If SER 10 96 Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 6 315 Stop 6 315 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 173 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements dl For FSK modulation the dialog has slightly different options 1 Demodulation amp Measurement Filter Demodulation Compensate for wi FSK Deviation Error E Carrier Frequency Drift Advanced e r Estimation Points Sym w Auto Capture Ov Coarse Synchronization I Auto Data Fine Synchronization Auto Detected Data Trace Constellation Freq Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 15 149 MHz Stop 15 149 MHz Compensate TEE 174 Normalize EVM bro C 175 OSE EVN E EEEEES 176 Essen POIDS Syll uoces net oom EE 176 Coarse Synchronization uiui cece ent adcun pensada oa anu ese teta RR esie sea RR anie se ERR E nage 176 SI e Ee 177 JEE 178 Compensate for If enabled compensation for various effects is taken into consideration during demodu lation Note Note that compensation for all the listed distortions can result in lower EVM values For PSK QAM MSK modulation e UO Offset e QImbalance e Amplitude Droop For FSK modulation e FSK Deviati
310. lso called ISI free points ISI intersymbol interference If the transmitter does not provide an ISI free signal after the transmit filter TX filter this condition can be fulfilled by signal specific filtering of the analyzer input signal receive filter or Rx filter If an RRC root raised cosine filter is used in the transmitter an RRC filter is also required in the analyzer to obtain ISI free points In many PSK systems RRC filters are used as transmit ISI and measurement filters To determine the UO modulation error the measurement signal must be compared with the corresponding ideal signal For this purpose a reference filter is required which is cal culated by the analyzer by convolving the coefficient of the transmit filter Tx filter and the meas filter see figure 2 4 If unfiltered signals have to be measured as well e g to determine nonlinear signal dis tortions no measurement filter is switched into the signal path and the reference filter is identical to the Transmit filter see figure 2 4 In the baseband block diagrams see figure 2 4 the system theoretical transmitter and analyzer filters are shown for PSK and QAM demodulation For the sake of clearness RF stages IF filters and the filter stages of the digital hardware section are not shown Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 14 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing For a corr
311. lt State gt This command turns the electronic attenuator on or off This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 276 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 4 8 INSTrument Subsystem Manual operation See El Attenuation ON OFF on page 156 INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on Manual operation See Preamp On Off on page 119 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN Manual operation See Signal Source on page 140 See Input Path on page 140 INST
312. lt of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TRACe lt t gt ADJust ALIGnment DEFault on page 255 Offset Defines the offset of the result range to the alignment reference The result of the current setting is displayed in the visualization area of the dialog box Note Note the following restrictions to this parameter e Anoffset lt 0 is not possible if you align the result range to the left border of the capture buffer e Anoffset that moves the pattern outside the result range is not allowed For example if you align the result to the left border of the pattern only offsets S 0 are allowed Otherwise you would never be able to find the pattern within the result range Remote command CALCulate n TRACe t ADJust ALIGnment OFFSet on page 255 Symbol Number at Reference start Defines the number of the symbol which marks the beginning of the alignment reference Source burst capture or pattern In effect this setting defines an offset of the x axis in addition to the one defined for the Signal Description see Offset on page 152 For example if you align the result to the center of the pattern and set the Symbol Num ber at amp lt Reference amp gt start to 0 you can easily find the pattern start in the EVM measurement simply by moving a marker to the symbol number O Note If you define an offset of the pattern with respect to the
313. lt ranges for a burst signal Continuous signals on the other hand have result ranges that cover the entire or a spe cific part of the capture buffer without intervals C Mag CapBuf BORSA FTT 40 dBm 60 dBm 80 dBm Fig 3 23 Result ranges for a continuous signal Result displays whose source is not the capture buffer are based on a single result range such as the EVM vs Time display or the data in the Current column of the Result Sum mary In this case you can use the capture buffer display to navigate through the available result ranges Select Result Rng softkey and analyze the individual result ranges in another window The currently displayed result range is indicated by a blue bar in the capture buffer display Evaluation ranges The result range in turn may contain more data than is necessary to calculate charac teristic values For example while you may want to display the ramps of a burst and thus include them in the result range they do not contribute to the error vectors or power levels Thus you would not include them in the evaluation range In all displays over time except for capture buffer displays the evaluation range is indi cated by red lines Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 109 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display D MagAbs MeasKRef Start 26 sym i Stop 174 sym Fig 3 24 Evaluation lines in absolute magnitu
314. m of the pattern It is assumed that patterns can only appear within bursts i e the IQ pattern search range is limited to the bursts detected by the Burst Search stage If the burst search is switched off the whole Capture Buffer is searched for the IQ pattern A list of all detected IQ patterns is passed on to the next processing stage It is important to note that the R amp S FSV K70 option can only search for one pattern at a time The pattern search can be switched on or off via the Pattern Search dialog see Pattern Search on page 164 Extraction of Result Range The Result Range can be aligned to a burst a pattern or simply the start of the Capture Buffer see Result Range on page 169 Within this stage the Result Range is cut from the Capture Buffer starting at a point that is specified by the user e g the start of a detected burst The R amp S FSV K70 option automatically takes into account filter settling times by making the internal buffers sufficiently longer than the selected Result Range Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the extracted Result Range and aims at making the correct sym bol decisions Within this stage a coarse synchronization of the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase the scaling and the timing takes place Furthermore an automatically selected internal receive filter Rx filter is used in order to remove the inter symbol inter ference as effectively as possible The
315. mand INPut GAIN STATe on page 277 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer l VElinput RF attenuation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 119 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Dee Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 272 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically
316. measured phase with Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the capture oversampling parameter see Capture Oversampling on page 158 3 1 1 6 This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions through zero in the UO plane in this case you might notice uncritical spikes This is due to the fact that the phase of zero or a complex value close to zero is of limited significance but still influences the result of the instantaneous frequency measurement VSA Gb Ez Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 178 Input RF SGL A FreqAbs Meas amp Ref Mead nd ead aa le MI d u LC LI KO OU TUR AT LLL LI I LL LL LL ee d 1M Clrw j Start 15 0 sym Stop 163 0 sym Fig 3 5 Result display Frequency Absolute in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FREQ to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Frequency Relative The instantaneous frequency of the signal source The results are normalized to the symbol rate PSK and QAM modul
317. ment bandwidth sss Measurement filters esses Deactivating remote control e Enabling ict rent e ee Predefined n eiie ttr rene nnn Type SC User defined AA Measurement result display ssesss Menu ELI iN EEEN 137 Measurement steininn reto Ern retrahere pente 112 VSA Min Hold trace mode AA 126 205 tinimum Search EE 137 Minimum shift keying Mk 33 ModAcc Limits ioi species cots cost 137 Modulation Errors EE 69 MAPPING WT 149 Order eg Symbol R te rrr tet terere 149 ce 147 Modulation Accuracy WAS T 137 204 N New Folder Sc m md 114 Normalization Demodulation 175 O Octal lU 118 offset Ee ne E 115 Offset EVM ooo ite cares ac E tae eee eee 176 Patter ic ie Acces 152 QPSK isisisi wee 29 Reference level 121 Result range 1714 MUG Ce 130 160 Online help KU tele lie KEE 8 Options sk RE 159 B160 Bandwidth extension see Bandwidth extension 00 0 0 eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 159 FSV B25 eene See 275 RF Preamplifier B22 sin ia 155 Order Demodulation remote control 297 299 Demodulation Remote control Oversampling juri 184 Overwrite mode P Patterns E Adding to standard Assigning to standard remote control Comment remote control
318. mized such that the intersymbol interference is low Hence you will probably be able to see a clear eye diagram and an Vector HO diagram with a recognizable constellation However a filter that has low intersymbol interference might lead to noise enhancement which is commonly undesirable for a measurement filter In order to avoid noise enhancement it is recommended that you e a design your own measurement filter and upload it as a user filter e b select a suitable measurement filter from the list Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 20 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Symbol Mapping Transferring filter files to the R amp S FSV You can transfer the vaf filter files to the R amp S FSV using a USB memory device To load a user transmit TX filter 1 1 Open the Modulation tab of the Modulation amp Signal Description dialog 2 Select Transmit filter Type User TX Filter Type User sl User Filter user_filter Load User Filter 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick To load a user measurement filter 1 Open the Measurement Filter tab of the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dia log 2 Select Meas Filter Type User Measurement Filter Auto according to TX Filter Type User User Filter user_filter Load User Filter 3 Select Load User Filter 4 Load your vaf file from the USB stick 2 3 Symbol Mapping
319. mp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis i a e Demodulation Overview 2 5 4 Pattern Symbol Check This stage performs a bit by bit comparison between the selected pattern and the demodulated bits It is important to note that this comparison is only performed at posi tions that have been identified by the IQ pattern search as possible pattern positions The algorithm and a simple example are illustrated in figure 2 45 First the pattern candidate bits are extracted from the whole bitstream calculated by the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions stage This means that the symbol stream is cut at the position that has been detected by the Q Pattern Search as the start of the pattern The extracted sequence is then compared to the selected pattern If the demodulation has been ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position the extracted sequence needs to be compared to all possible rotated versions of the selected pattern For example in the case of QPSK modulation the rotational symmetry has the order four i e there are four pattern hypotheses If the extracted sequence coincides with one of the hypotheses the pattern is declared as found and the absolute phase corre sponding to the appropriate hypothesis is passed on Both the symbol decisions and the IQ measurement signal are then rotated with this pattern phase for the whole result range thus resolving the phase ambiguity For
320. mp S FSV K70 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 349 R amp S FSV K70 Support Dn c m MN s Frequently Asked Questions Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSV K70 or Why do I have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and ihe RSS EE 353 Problem The EVM trace looks okay but the EVM in the result summary is significantly CINCO CDL DL Eed 353 Question Why isn t the FSK Deviation Error in R amp S FSV K70 identical to the FSK DEV ERROR IMRS e KEE 355 Problem The PSK QAM Signal shows spikes in the Frequency Error result display n 356 Question The y axis unit for the spectrum of the measurement signal can be chosen to be dB What level is this relative od 356 Question How can get the demodulated symbols of all my GSM bursts in the capture buffer in remote LEE 356 Question Why do the EVM results for my FSK modulated signal look wrong 357 Problem The trace is not entirely visible within the measurement screen Solution e 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen e 2 Press the AUTO key e 3 Press the Y Axis Auto Range softkey Problem The trace of the measurement signal is visible in the measurement screen the trace of the reference signal is not Solution e 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen 2 Press the TRACE key 3 Press the Trace Wizard softkey 4 Select a second trace choose Clear Wri
321. must be compared to each possible sequence in the data file Result Length The Result Length specified in the Result Range dialog box in the R amp S FSV K70 application must be identical to the length of the specified symbol sequences in the xml file ResultLength element Result Range Alignment e Bursted signals When you align the result range to a bursted signal due to the uncertainty of the burst search the determined result range might start up to 2 symbols before or after the Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 199 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Configuring VSA measurements actual burst However an offset of only one symbol has the effect that none of the predefined symbol sequences in the Known Data file will be found To avoid this try one of the following Align the result range to a pattern instead of the burst Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again e Continuous signals For continuous signals without a pattern the result range is aligned randomly Thus a very large number of possible sequences must be predefined Use a precise external trigger and align the result range to the capture buffer This requires a very precise trigger timing otherwise the result range start may be incorrect again 3 3 7 2 How t
322. n This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistics Count determines the number of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 260 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name
323. n SOflKOy i a coeli e tantes 117 189 191 Y Axis Reference Value SOMKEY 2 ise ede etnies 116 189 191 Y Axis Unit SOMKCY 2 dedere pet desean 119 Z zoom area remote Control seeeeseeeeeeee 267 remote Control ori iet err crt ere 267 Zoom Amplitude or terree rn nente 126 206 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 386
324. n bursts previously detected by the burst search Furthermore it only finds the first UO pattern within each burst If the burst search is switched off the UO pattern search searches for the UO pattern in the entire capture buffer Demodulation and Symbol Decisions This stage operates on the Result Range and aims to make the correct symbol decisions The algorithm is illustrated in figure 2 44 using the example of a QPSK modulation After timing and scaling recovery a frequency offset and phase offset estimator is employed After this coarse synchronization the R amp S FSV K70 option makes symbol decisions i e recovers which symbols were transmitted by the device under test DUT Typically the employed estimators are non data aided NDA estimators This means that they operate on an unknown data sequence Since the local oscillators LO of the transmitter device under test and the receiver R amp S FSV are normally not coupled their phase offset with respectto each other is unknown The unknown transmission delay between DUT and R amp S FSV adds a further unknown phase offset Due to this unknown phase offset the result of the demodulation can be ambiguous with respect to the absolute phase position because of the rotational symmetry of e g a PSK constellation For example in the case of non differential QPSK modulation the mea surement signal the reference signal and the decided IQ symbols may have a constant phase offset of
325. n Carrier Frequency evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt CFREQuency EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current value 1 Error in mean value 2 Error in peak value 3 15 These bits are not used 5 8 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n IQRHO Regis ter This register comprises information about limit violations in UO offset or RHO evaluation It can be queried with commands eee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 336 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulationcn IQRHO EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RHO value 1 Error in mean RHO value 2 Error in peak RHO value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current UO offset value 6 Error in mean UO offset value 7 Error in peak UO offset value 8 15 These bits are not used 5 9 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt FSK Register This register comprises information about limit violations in FSK evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt FSK EVENt Bit No Mean
326. n Elles nnne entm tnos 114 Settings Overview Displays the main settings overview that visualizes the data flow of the Vector Signal Analyzer and summarizes the current settings In addition the Settings Overview dialog box provides access to the individual settings dialog boxes and allows you to restore default values For details on configuring the measurement and a description of the individual dialog boxes see chapter 3 3 1 Settings Overview on page 145 Digital Standards Opens a submenu and a file selection dialog to manage predefined measurement set tings for conventional mobile radio standards See Managing standard settings files for details For an overview of predefined standards and settings see chapter 2 4 Predefined Standards and Settings on page 41 Load Standard Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to load a measurement settings file for a specific standard See Managing standard settings files for details Note When you load a standard the usage of a known data file if available is auto matically deactivated Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard on page 296 Save As Standard Digital Standards Opens a file selection dialog to save the current measurement settings as a file for a specific standard Remote command SENSe DDEMod STANdard SAVE on page 313 Delete Standard Digital Standards Deletes the selected standard Standards predefin
327. n edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 266 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 272 3 2 4 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu R amp S FSV K70 The AUTO SET displays the Auto Set menu which contains the following softkeys PUNO E HERPES 121 e US EE 121 L Meas Time Manual 122 L Meas TIME d teste 122 L Upper Level Hvsteresls nnne 122 L Lower Level Hvsteresis EE 122 Y AXIS HEES ceccar en E EAE ETE TOATE 122 Y Axis Auto Range All SERES EE 122 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings softkey Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVe1 on page 285 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 122 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 121 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 2 5 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vect
328. n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FDERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the FSK deviation error of FSK modulated signals Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant 229 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El CALCulate subsystem Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Deviation error for current sweep AVG Average FSK deviation error RPE Peak FSK deviation error SDEV Standard deviation of FSK deviation error PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK deviation error RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift type This command queries the results of the carrier frequency drift for FSK modulated signals Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Carrier frequency drift for current sweep AVG Average FSK carrier frequency drift RPE Peak FSK carrier frequency drift SDEV Standard deviation of FSK carrier frequency drift PCTL 95 percentile value of FSK carrier frequency drift RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK DERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the frequency error of FSK modulated signals Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 230 R amp S FSV K70 Rem
329. n mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result lt arbitrary block program data gt This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block ABORt Subsystem ABORt This command aborts a current measurement and resets the trigger system Example ABOR INIT IMM Mode all CALCulate subsystem CALCulate DELTamarker subesvstem cette eecteeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeenaas 211 CALCulate LIMit MACCuracy subsvstem cette eettneeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeneeeeaaas 217 CALCulate MARKer subsvstem eee eeecne tees ee eeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeneeaas 225 Other CALCulate Commands cerne enia eed sete rl aa reus EEN 246 CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzAOEE een nssna sentia estt isses tais 212 GALE Gulatespn DEETamiarker ms 3EINK 2 aeter rete erat nente Rees 212 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumAbDtEak senes enenatis 212 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM AximumlEET senes 213 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT isset as 213 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzM ANimumt PDEAK eese nennen 213 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMANimumbRlcGHt sees eese nnns 214 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 211 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz MiNimum LEET 214 CAL Culate nz D
330. n range Note Note that the start value is defined with respect to the x axis including an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at lt Reference gt start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 248 Stop Defines the symbol in the result range at which evaluation is stopped The stop symbol itself is included in the evaluation range Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 172 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Configuring VSA measurements Note Note that the stop value is defined with respect to the x axis including an optional offset defined via the Symbol Number at lt Reference gt start parameter Remote command CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue on page 248 3 3 1 5 Demodulation and Measurement Filter Settings You configure the demodulation and measurement filter settings in the Demodulation amp Measurement Filter dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Demodulation on page 173 e Measurement Filter on page 178 Demodulation The Demodulation tab contains the settings for the demodulation A live preview of the trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Demodulation amp Measurement Filter Demodulation Compensate for v 1 Q Offset I Q Imbalance I Amplitude Droop Advanced Norma
331. nal Analysis El Measurement Result Display e Rho SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO on page 237 e UO Offset SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic OOFFset on page 235 e QImbalance Not for BPSK SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic IQIMbalance on page 233 e Gain Imbalance Not for BPSK SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic GIMBalance on page 233 e Quadrature Error Not for BPSK SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor on page 236 e Amplitude Droop SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ADRoop on page 226 e Power SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer on page 234 For each result the R amp S FSV calculates and shows various statistical values e Current value e Mean value To calculate the mean value the R amp S FSV averages the number of results defined by the Statistics Count e Peak value e StdDev standard deviation e 95 ile 95 percentile only for continuous sweep or sweep count gt 1 Compared to the mean value the 95 ile is a result of all measurement results since the last start of a single or continous sweep or of all measurements since the last change of a measurement parameter e
332. neous power of the whole capture buffer is computed and then a moving average filter is applied The length of this filter is automatically determined with the help of the user settings Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 49 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis ge CCC TDA I 7n Demodulation Overview The filtered power of the capture buffer is subsequently compared to an automatically chosen threshold and the rising and falling edges of bursts are identified With the help of the detected edges and some further processing it is possible to decide whether the burst candidates comply with the user settings All bursts must have a length between Min Burst Length Search Tolerance and Max Burst Length Search Tolerance to be accepted See Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 151 and Search Tolerance on page 163 for a more detailed description of these parameters Min Burst Length Min Gap Length Max Burst Length Fig 2 42 Burst Search parameters You can influence the robustness of the burst search directly by entering the correct minimum gap length see Min Gap Length on page 163 minimum burst length and maximum burst length Refer to figure 2 42 for an illustration of the three parameters Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 50 Demodulation Overview Burst Search Algorithm Settings Calculate Average Filter Length Calculate Threshold Find Next Risi
333. nerrenr ennt rennen enne SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog eese enne nnne nne netten nennen nnne nne nens 291 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue eese nennen rnit rennen enne enne SENSeEDDEMOGd MFIEter ALPE etre te tide d Dep dr a ge e ip dada ege IEN Gel DDEMod Mil ier AUTO SENSeEDDEMOGd MFIEteE NAME icto tcr e endet PR ERE ERA SB e EAR Ee ERR E He EE SENSeEDDEMOQd MFEIEtet SER dran iret tL es Mene E dca dab erae brane dE Edge SENSe DDEMod MFILter STATe IEN Gel DDEMod Mk FORMat essen ennemi rretre itr erinnere treten erret IEN Gel DDEModNObRMaltzeADbRoop eene nennen trennen rennen ener ees 293 IEN Gel DDEModNObRMaltze CDR 294 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize F DERToOLr eese nene rennen erret nte nn rennen nnns 294 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize IQIMbalance eese nennen nnnm nennen nenne nnne 294 ee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 378 R amp S FSV K70 List of Commands ISENSeDDEMod NORMaltze lOOttset ttt ttt 294 SENSe DDEMod NORMalize VALue ttt tot 295 SENSe DDEMOod PRATe estet ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt errana 295 SENSe DDEMod PRESet CALC ttt ttt ttt ttt tt ttt ttt 295 SENSe DDEMod PRESetRLEVel ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt tto 296 SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard ctt ttt ttt 296 SENSe DDEMod PSK FORMat ISENSelD
334. ng amp Falling Edge Calculate Acceptable Burst Lengths Burst Length Okay Add to Burst List Fig 2 43 Burst search algorithm 2 5 2 Q Pattern Search The UO pattern search is performed only if it is switched on Otherwise this stage is skipped The main benefit of the UO pattern search is that it enables an alignment of the result range to the pattern Furthermore this stage can function as a filter If the burst search and UO pattern search are switched on and the parameter Meas Only If Pattern Symbols Correct is set to true only bursts with the correct pattern are demodulated see Meas only if pattern symbols correct on page 165 During the UO pattern search stage the capture buffer is searched for an UO pattern by trying different time and frequency hypotheses The IQ pattern is generated internally based on the specified symbol number of the pattern and the signal description i e R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 5 3 Demodulation Overview modulation scheme and transmit filter The IQ pattern search can also be referred to as the UO waveform An UO pattern is considered detected if the correlation metric i e the correlation value between the ideal IQ pattern and capture buffer exceeds a specified IO Correlation Threshold see Q Correlation Threshold on page 165 If the burst search is switched on the UO pattern search only searches the UO pattern i
335. nput data is Sample rate Symbol rate Capture Oversampling Table 2 1 Value range for sample rate and symbol rate Model option Max sample rate Min symbol rate Max symbol rate max sample rate capt oversam pling R amp S FSV without 45 MHz 25 Hz 11 MHz bandwidth exten sion option R amp S FSV with 128 MHz 25 Hz 32 MHz bandwidth exten sion option B70 R amp S FSV with 1 28 GHz 25 Hz restricted to 160 MHz active bandwidth extension option B160 1307 9002K39 12 5 MHz 25 Hz 3 125 MHz Using this sample rate the resulting UO data bandwidth can be determined from the figure Relation between maximum usable bandwidth and sample rate RF input in the base unit description section Working with UO data for RF input operation or the figure Bandwidths depending on sample rate for active digital input in the description of the Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSV option B17 The sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings is dis played in the I Q Capture Settings dialog see li Capture on page 156 2 2 2 Bandwidth Extension Option R amp S FSV B160 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 provides additional hardware which makes a maximum usable UO bandwidth of 160 MHz possible As opposed to the R amp S FSV base unit the R amp S FSV K70 application uses a software resampler which allows for a maximum sample rate up to 1 28 GHz Op
336. nput signal in the Frontend and UO Cap ture Settings dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Frontend on page 153 e Q Capture on page 156 Frontend The Frontend tab contains the frontend settings of the instrument A live preview of the signal with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 153 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis REESEN Configuring VSA measurements Frontend amp I Q Capture Settings x Frontend Frequency Frequency 905 4 MHz General Level Settings Reference Level 27 16 dBm Ref Level Offset Preamp Input Coupling Attenuation Settings Attenuation Mode Manual RF Attenuation El Attenuation Start 541 667 kHz Stop 541 667 kHz au UIC Ys EE 154 Reference WOVEN MD E 154 Ref Level OffGBl secessus ccaavsacasaceadsaucsedwacdcanaedaeiieieeaas sacsapesdanual dE E 155 PREAMP OOM EE 155 Input Coupling ET 155 Atlenuslon MOE ccscccdciasccsrdcsessacsiaesedcannsiucsadanaie ads a a i Oda dx e aaa xd aua A Ea 155 RF PML IAG ON EE 155 El Attenuation ON OFF anaana anna a aaa A Megas sa SY MDe nde daa Medd dye vans 156 Frequency Defines the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN pin 2 s fcenter E fmax SPAN pin 2 s
337. ns marker 2 to the next higher minimum value to the left of the current value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command positions ae marker to the next higher trace minimum If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN NEXT Positions marker 2 to the next higher maximum value Usage Event Manual operation See Next Min on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace minimum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to marker mode if necessary If no minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excur sion an execution error error code 200 is produced Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 241 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace Usage Event Manual operation See Min on page 137 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions
338. nst overload The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula leVEl mixer leveliy RF attenuation The maximum mixer level allowed is 10 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 272 El Attenuation ON OFF Enables and defines the electric attenuation The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 276 INPut EATT on page 275 HO Capture The I Q Capture tab contains the settings for the measured UO data Note that the maximum usable UO bandwidth for the R amp S FSV40 with the order number 1307 9002K39 is 10 MHz Therefore the maximum symbol rate for this model is 3 125 MHz capture oversampling 4 lt 1 5625 MHz capture oversampling 8 0 78125 MHz capture oversampling 16 and lt 0 390625 MHz capture oversampling 32 A live preview of the signal in the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 156 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument
339. nt Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Config ModAcc Limits on page 137 See Set to Default on page 138 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy STATe lt LimitState gt Suffix lt n gt Setting parameters lt LimitState gt Mode Manual operation 1 4 ON OFF RST OFF VSA See ModAcc Limits on page 137 See Config ModAcc Limits on page 137 See Limit Checking on page 138 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe lt LimitState gt This command switches the limit check for the selected result type and limit type on or off Suffix lt n gt lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 window CFERror EVM FDERror FERRor MERRor OOFFset PER Ror RHO CFERror Carrier Frequency Error EVM Error Vector Magnitude FERRor Frequency error FSK only FDERror Frequency deviation error FSK only MERRor Magnitude Error OOFFset UO Offset PERRor Phase Error RHO Rho CURRent MEAN PEAK PCURRent PMEan PPEak RCUR Rent RMEan RPEak For CFERor OOFFset RHO CURRent MEAN PEAK For EVM FERRor MERRor PERRor PCURRent Peak current value PMEan Peak mean value PPEak Peak peak value RCURRent RMS current value RMEan RMS mean value RPEak RMS peak value 219 R amp S FSV
340. nt Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Search Settings Opens the Search Settings tab of the Marker To Settings dialog box Search Direction Search Settings Defines whether the absolute values are searched or the values to the left smaller or to the right greater Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 240 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT on page 239 CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum RIGHt on page 240 Marker Real Marker Imag Search Settings Defines whether marker search functions are performed on the real or imaginary trace of the Real Imag measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt SEARch on page 242 Search Limits Search Settings If enabled defines the limits of the search Left Limit Lowest symbol number for which the search is performed Right Limit Highest symbol number for which the search is performed Use Zoom Restricts the marker search to the zoomed area Limits Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m X SLIMits Z00M on page 245 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 244 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 245 Peak Sets the active marker delta marker to the highest maximum of the trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m MAXimum PEAK on page 240 Next Peak S
341. numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example DDEM FILT ALPH 0 5 Sets ALPHA BT to 0 5 Mode VSA Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 150 SENSe DDEMod FILTer STATe lt MeasFilterState gt This command defines whether the input signal that is evaluated is filtered by the mea surement filter This command has no effect on the Transmit filter Setting parameters lt MeasFilterState gt ON OFF ON SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is activated OFF The input signal is not filtered SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO is deactivated RST ON Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 287 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee se Ea a a D ee SENSe subsystem Example DDEM FILT OFF The input signal is not filtered Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod FORMat Group This command selects the digital demodulation mode Setting parameters Group MSK PSK QAM QPSK FSK UQAM QPSK Quad Phase Shift Key PSK Phase Shift Key MSK Minimum Shift Key QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation RST PSK Example SENS DDEM FORM QAM Selects QAM modulation Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Type on page 147 SENSe DDEMod FSK NSTate lt FSKNstate gt This command defines the demodulation of the FSK modulation scheme Setting parameters lt FSKNstate gt 2 4 2 2FSK 4 4FSK RST 2 Mode VSA SE
342. o 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 324 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SYSTem Subsystem 4 13 SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obt
343. o Load Known Data Files Known Data files are loaded in the Modulation amp Signal Description settings To load an existing Known Data file 1 Inthe Settings Overview select Modulation Signal Description 2 Switch to the Known Data tab 3 Activate the usage of a Known Data file by selecting the Known Data option This enables the Load Data File function 4 Select the Load Data File button A file selection dialog box is displayed 5 Select the xml file which contains the possible data sequences of the input signal The file must comply with the syntax described in chapter 3 3 7 4 Reference Known Data File Syntax Description on page 202 The header information of the xml file is displayed in the dialog box Once a Known Data file has been loaded the Bit Error Rate result display becomes available If the Fine Synchronization setting in the Demodulation dialog box is set to Auto mode the known data is also used for synchronization Otherwise it can be selected manually Defining a maximum symbol error rate for the known data in ref erence to the analyzed data avoids using a falsely selected or unsuitable file for syn chronization see also If SER lt on page 178 3 3 7 3 How to Create Known Data Files You must create the Known Data files yourself according to the possible data sequences of the input signal Use any xml editing tool you like following the rules described in chapter 3 3 7 4 Refe
344. o Range All Screens func tion For more information see e Y Axis Auto Range All Screens on page 122 Remote command DISPlay WINDowcn TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO VALue on page 264 Y Axis Auto Range All Screens Adapts the y axis to the current measurement values only once not dynamically in all measurement windows Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO ALL on page 264 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu R amp S FSV K70 The SWEEP key displays the Sweep menu which contains the following softkeys Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 122 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 CONUNUGUS SWEEP GE 123 Singdie SWEER ET 123 Continue ie UE EE 123 E EN 123 EES TEE 123 Select Result Recece E EEE E 124 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the Statistic Count Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 270 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Statistic Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 270 Continue Single S
345. od SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 306 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 307 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 311 Delete Advanced Settings Deletes the selected patterns Any existing assignments to other standards are removed Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete on page 308 Pattern Definition The settings in the Pattern dialog box define the pattern TETRA SA Special Continuous Downlink Burst Fig 3 27 Pattern definition For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 197 E EE 169 RTE 169 ee ee EE 169 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 3 1 4 Configuring VSA measurements lee 169 EE maet etn Ret edi ett dete AE 169 oup M P 169 Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 311 Mod order The order of modulation e g 8 for an 8 PSK Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 309 Symbol format Hexadecimal decimal or binary format Symbols Pattern defin
346. od SRATe on page 312 Transmit filter Type Defines the type of transmit filter An overview of available Transmit filters is provided in table 2 3 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 314 To define the name of the Transmit filter to be used SENSe DDEMod TFILter STATe on page 314 To switch off the Transmit filter Load User Filter Transmit filter Type Opens a file selection dialog box to select the user defined Transmit filter to be used Note If a user defined Transmit filter is selected and the measurement filter is defined automatically see Auto on page 179 a Low ISI measurement filter according to the selected user filter is calculated and used For details see chapter 2 2 7 Customized Filters on page 19 Remote command SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME on page 314 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 149 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis T Configuring VSA measurements Alpha BT Defines the roll off factor Alpha or the filter bandwidth BT The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for Transmit filter is available for RC RRC Gauss and GMSK filter The roll off factor and filter bandwidth for measurement filter is available for RRC filter Remote command Transmit filter SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa on page 287 Measurement filter SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa on page 291 Signal Description The sett
347. ode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP RISing lt Runin gt This command defines the length of the rising burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 303 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El SENSe subsystem Setting parameters Runin numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS SKIP RIS 5US 5 us of the rising burst edge are not considered Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe lt SearchState gt This command switches the search for a signal burst on or off Setting parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DDEM SEAR BURS OFF Switches burst search off Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLerance lt SearchTolerance gt This command controls burst search tolerance Setting parameters lt SearchTolerance gt numeric value Range 0 to 100000 RST 4 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS TOL 1 Sets the burst tolerance to 1 Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 163 See Search Tolerance on page 163 SENSe DDEMod SEARch MBURst CALC lt SelectResRangeNr gt Sets the result range to be displayed after a single sweep Setting parameters lt SelectResRangeNr gt numeric value Range 1 to 1000000 RST 1 Default uni
348. odulation the estimation model is described in detail in section chapter 2 6 2 FSK Modulation on page 65 The parameters of the FSK specific result summary table can be related to the distortion model parameters as follows Table 7 2 Evaluation of results in the FSK result summary Frequency Error RMS x Xrneo enne r Y inn max FREQ ERR n T Magnitude Error RMS 1 HX MAG_ERR n Tp Y Peak max MAG ERR n T Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 362 R amp S FSV K70 Annex Formulae and Abbreviations Formulae FSK Deviation Error A 2 A err m A uras Ager B I A per A ERR A Estimated FSK deviation error Hz FSK Measurement Deviation A meas B A per A MEAS Estimated FSK deviation of the meas signal Hz FSK Reference Deviation FSK reference deviation as entered by the user Hz AREF Carrier Frequency Error C h _ fo 2 7 The carrier frequency error of the measured signal Hz Carrier Frequency Drift D fa fa 2 2 T The drift in the carrier frequency of the measured signal Hz Sym 7 1 3 Statistical Evaluations for the Result Summary The statistical evaluations in the result summary are based on the measurement results that are displayed in the Current column Hence the index m here represents the current evaluation M is the total number of evaluations In single sweep mode M core sponds to the statistics count I
349. ol interference essen 14 IQ Export Gei 144 ISI gg M 15 Intersymbol interference sss 14 K Known data Creating files er ner et er ERU nete an petes 200 Elle Syn uoce ree pr t iaa 202 Recording tool ce dotes eege ees 201 Known Data OS ates cease c E 199 Working KL EE 199 L Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote control Digital cette Le Latet Tos Limits COMAQUEING pe 204 Modulation Accuracy Lines MG pM 137 Load Standard cnc vm Lower case commands ai Lower Level Hysteresis SOMKCY A E M 122 Low ISI filters Frequency response eeeneneneen ener neenon 368 M Magnitude Absolute Result tyD amp 2i ert teer el eie 75 Magnitude Error Result type 2i ene nte ree co el dea 91 Magnitude Relative RESUIETY DG E 76 Map PIG ecd esent redde eret etr ert iterata etes 21 149 marker DOAK 136 Markers eeler Tue eR Ani iated 133 Coupling remote control sessessss 238 Selecting Settings Setting to Trace a err zo rte 135 Set to trace Matched filter oret teen Max Hold trace Mode esses 125 205 maximum Search ucc norint siandiena eidi 136 Max Peak SI Y a i 136 MEAS filter MEAS KOY ts cesc Ansa Meas only if burst was found sss 163 Measure
350. omatic setting of the RF attenuation to the level of the applied signal Note The following command must be synchronized to the end of the autorange process using WAI OPC oder OPC because otherwise the autorange process will be stop ped Example ADJ LEV Adjusts the reference level to the current measurement Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Level on page 121 SENSe DDEMod ECALc OFFSet lt EVMOffsetState gt The command activates and deactivates an offset for the calculation of the EVM for OQPSK modulated signals Setting parameters lt EVMOffsetState gt ON OFF RST ON Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod ECALc MODE lt EvmCalc gt This command defines the calculation formula for EVM Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 285 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a SSS ES SS SS SSS ee n SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt EvmCalc gt SIGNal SYMBol MECPower MACPower SIGNal Calculation normalized to the mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants SYMBol Calculation normalized to the maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants MECPower Calculation normalized to the mean expected power of the mea surement signal at the symbol instants MACPower Calculation normalized to the maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants RST SIGNal Example DDEM ECAL SIGN EVM is normalized to the ave
351. on 2 6 1 1 Error Model Modulated Baseband RF Signal Inputs Amplitude Quadrature Inbalance Offset UO Offset Distorsion Noise Fig 2 46 Modelling Modulation Errors The measured signal model for PSK QAM and MSK modulation is depicted in fig ure 2 46 and can be expressed as MEAS s REF E chez j Ro REF 1 cg lei e emm at where REF t and REF t the inphase and quadrature component of the reference signal g and go the effects of the gain imbalance c and cq the effects of an IQ offset the quadrature error a the amplitude droop fo the carrier frequency offset the carrier phase offset Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 56 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 6 1 2 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors C the timing offset n t a disturbing additive noise process of unknown power Estimation The R amp S FSV K70 option includes two synchronization stages The first stage has already been described in the context of the Demodulation amp Symbol Decisions block see chapter 2 5 3 Demodulation and Symbol Decisions on page 52 The second stage is realized within the Synchronization block Here the measurement signal is matched to the reference signal by minimizing the mean square of the error vector magnitude This is done by selecting the optimum parameter vector 3 x arg in gt MEAS REF ay The minimi
352. on remote control Ref Value remote control sssssss Ref Value Position remote control 266 Right Limit remote control iss Search Limits remote control 244 Search Lim Off remote control 244 Select 1 2 3 4 Feti Select 1 2 3 4 remote control 243 EI up qp Single Meas remote control et Single Sweep remote control 270 Trace 1234 5 6 remote control Trace Mode remote control ssss Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control Trigger Holdoff remote control Trigger Polarity oeiiisirneniini Use Zoom Limits remote control y Axis Max Value cccccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeteeeaee y Axis Max Value remote control y Axis Min Value z y Unit ADS rsin terni iri y Unit Abs remote control Softkey Auto Level eren arre 121 cie E 126 206 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control Center remote control sss 316 Clear Write cerner ern Config ModAcc Limits s Continue Single Sweep sssssesssss Continuous Sweep ese Continuous Sweep remote control sis Cont Meas remote Control Decim Sep remot
353. on Error e Carrier Frequency Drift Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 174 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Example Configuring VSA measurements The following figures compare the results for a compensated UO offset of 2 5 and a non compensated offset UO Offset compensated for UO Offset NOT compensated for Start 0 sym A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw A IZQ Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Stop 2 52 Stop 2 52 e 1 Clrw Stop 300 sym Start 0 sym Stop 300 sym Remote command ENSe ENSe ENSe SENSe ENSe DDI DDI DDI 7 DD DDI EMod EMod EMod EMod EMod Normalize EVM to Normalizes the EVM to the specified power value NORMalize ADRoop on page 293 NORMalize IQIMbalance on page 294 NORMalize IQOFfset on page 294 NORMalize CFDRift on page 294 NORMalize FDERror on page 294 This setting is not available for MSK or FSK modulation e Max Ref Power Maximum power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Ref Power mean power of the reference signal at the symbol instants e Mean Constellation Power Mean expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants e Max Constellation Power The maximum expected power of the measurement signal at the symbol instants Remote command SENSe IET EMod Pa ECALc MODE on page 285 eS eee Operating Manual 1
354. on and a suitable bandwidth The I Q Capture dialog of the vector signal analysis shows the sample rate and the usable UO bandwidth achieved for the current settings see Q Capture on page 156 e After the optional measurement filter The measurement signal and the reference signal can be filtered by various mea surement filters which have different bandwidths The filters described above are the ones that directly affect the bandwidth of the captured UO data and the final measurement signal and reference signal Note however that several other filters are also involved in the DSP section but are not mentioned above e Receive filter to prevent ISI intersymbol interference e filters necessary for various estimators e others Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 12 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing 2 2 1 UO Bandwidth The bandwidth of the UO data used as input for the vector signal analysis is filtered as described in chapter 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 11 Its flat usable bandwidth no considerable amplitude or phase distortion depends on e the used sample rate which depends on the defined Symbol Rate see Symbol Rate on page 149 defined Capture Oversampling see Capture Oversampling on page 158 e the type of input used digital baseband input RF input etc The sample rate of the I Q i
355. oom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window gt Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 9 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for UO Data 2 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 1 2 1 1 F Filter 40 MHz Sampling 128 MHz The Vector Signal Analysis software option R amp S FSV K70 performs vector and scalar measurements on digitally modulated single carrier signals To perform the measure ments it converts RF signals into the complex baseband It can also use the optional Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSV B17 option to analyze UO signals already deliv ered to the complex baseband For details on the Digital Baseband interface R amp S FSV B17 option see the base unit description The following sections describe the digital signal processing hardware the interplay of analog and digital filters for bandwidth limiting modulation and demodulation filters as well as the algorithms used by the measurement demodulator The implemented modu lation modes and the associated predefined symbol mappings are also listed The last part of this chapter deals with vector and scalar modulation errors Block Diagram of Digital Signal Processing Hardware for
356. or Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 e Meas Time Auto on page 122 Meas Time Manual Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 121 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 284 Meas Time Auto Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value depending on the signal description see Signal Description on page 150 Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 284 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automat ically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 283 Y Axis Autorange Adapts the y axis to the current measurement results only once not dynamically in the focussed window To adapt the range of all screens together use the Y Axis Aut
357. orarily and select the required function directly e Double click the object to display a context sensitive softkey menu that remains visi ble until you click a hardkey with its own menu Example For example the context sensitive menu for the symbol rate display in the information bar at the top of the screen provides a function to change the symbol rate directly Alter natively you could select Home Modulation and then the Symbol Rate input field Configuring VSA measurements Using the VSA option you can perform vector signal analysis measurements using pre defined standard setting files or independently of digital standards using user defined measurement settings Such settings can be stored for recurrent use Thus configuring VSA measurements requires one of the following tasks e Selecting an existing standard settings file and if necessary adapting the measure ment settings to your specific requirements e Configuring the measurement settings and if necessary storing the settings ina file Settings e EE 145 Defining the Result Ragga niri EaR EAEE Aa 186 e Changing the Display Scallitg erecti ree eio errans 189 e Managing standard settings filos erret iine 192 e Working with Pattern Searches oir en deci ie dated ENER 194 e Managing PAMS EE 196 Working With Known Data FIIBS r iio rn nee eintreten 199 e Working with Limits for Modulation Accuracy Measurements
358. ote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Frequency error for current sweep AVG Average frequency error over several sweeps RPE Frequency error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error PEAK Maximum frequency error over all symbols of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum frequency error values over several sweeps TPE Maximum frequency error over all symbols over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum frequency error values over sev eral sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK MDEViation lt type gt This command queries the results of the measurement deviation of FSK modulated sig nals Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant 231 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El CALCulate subsystem Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Measurement deviation for current sweep AVG Average FSK measurement deviation RPE Peak FSK measurement deviation SDEV Standard deviation of FSK measurement deviation PCTL 95 percentile value of F
359. ount 109 BURST PATTERN B Result Summary current Mean m ci Phase Error Peak Magnitude Error RMS Carrier Frequency Error IQ Imbalance Gain Imbalance Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Fig 3 17 Result summary display for Modulation Accuracy If the result summary display is not given the entire screen width or height only the infor mation indicated by an below is displayed see also chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Config uration on page 179 If the result summary is queried using remote commands all available information is provided For more information see chapter 7 1 2 1 PSK QAM and MSK Modulation on page 361 The following results are displayed e EVM Error Vector Magnitude RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM on page 228 e MER Modulation Error Ratio RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR on page 238 e Phase Error RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic PERRor on page 236 e Magnitude Error RMS Peak SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MERRor on page 234 e Carrier Frequency Error SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror on page 227 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 95 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Sig
360. ource Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDo f f on page 328 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDof f on page 328 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 161 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis EENS Configuring VSA measurements 3 3 1 3 Burst and Pattern Search Settings You configure burst and pattern searches in the Burst amp Pattern Settings dialog This dialog box contains the following tabs e Burst Search e Pattern Search Burst Search The Burst Search tab contains the settings for burst searches In addition it contains a link to the Signal Description settings see Signal Description on page 150 A live preview of the capture buffer with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The green bar below the trace indicates the defined evaluation range see Evaluation Range on page 171 The preview area is not editable directly The Burst Search tab is also displayed when you select the Burst Search softkey in the Meas Config menu see Burst Pattern Search on page 132 Burst amp Pattern Search a Burst Search IM Auto according to Signal Description Burst found sn Con we Meas only if Burst was found I Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 4sym 14 769 us Min Gap Length 1 sym 3 692 us Related
361. output values are the same as those provided in the Mod ulation Accuracy table see chapter 3 1 1 22 Result Summary on page 94 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 226 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem lt none gt Amplitude droop in dB symbol for current sweep AVG Amplitude droop in dB symbol evaluating the linear average value over several sweeps RPE Peak value for amplitude droop over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of amplitude droop PCTL 95 percentile value of amplitude droop RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic ALL This command queries all results of the result summary as shown on the screen Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Usage Mode 1 4 screen number irrelevant Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror lt type gt This command queries the results of the carrier frequency error measurement performed for digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant 227 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SS EE Ss CALCulate subsys
362. outputs of this stage are the coarsely synchron ized measurement signal and the symbol decisions bits The symbol decisions are later used for the Pattern Symbol Check stage and for the Reference Signal Generation stage Pattern Symbol Check The IQ Pattern Search stage can only detect whether the similarity between the IQ pattern and the Capture Buffer exceeds a certain threshold and in this way find the most likely positions where a pattern can be found Within this stage the R amp S FSV K70 checks whether the pattern symbols bits really coincide with the symbol decisions at the pre detected position E g if one out of 20 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 48 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis 2 5 1 Demodulation Overview symbols does not coincide the IQ Pattern Search stage might detect this IQ pattern but the Pattern Symbol Check stage will decline it Note that this stage is only active if the pattern search is switched on Reference Signal Generation The ideal reference signal is generated based on the detected symbols and the specifi cations of the signal model i e the modulation scheme and the transmit filter Tx filter Measurement Filtering Both the measurement signal and the reference signal are filtered with the specified measurement filter Synchronization In this stage the measurement signal and the reference signal are correlated For PSK QAM and MS
363. pan 0 0 Hz lt fcenter S fmax fmax and SpanNmin are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 316 Reference Level Defines the reference level in dBm Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 154 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DEENEN Configuring VSA measurements The reference level value is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display To get an ideal reference level use Auto Level function For more information see e Auto Level on page 121 Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 265 Ref Level Offset Defines the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit Where necessary the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 266 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV
364. pdf 28 05 2002 Rectangular Rectangular filter in the time domain with a length of 1 symbol period TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 16 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing None No filter is used USER User defined filter Define the filter using the SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER command 2 2 6 Measurement Filters The measurement filter can be used to filter the following two signals in the same way e the measurement signal after coarse frequency phase and timing synchronization have been achieved e the reference signal i e the UO symbols that have been determined in the demodu lator and have already been filtered with the Transmit filter For MSK PSK QAM and User QAM the measurement filter filters the real part and imaginary part of these signals For FSK the measurement filter filters the instantaneous frequency of these signals The R amp S FSV K70 defines the error signal as the difference between the reference signal and the measurement signal Thus the measurement filter also shapes the spectrum of the error signal which is used to calculate the EVM for example In many applications the measurement filter is the same as the RX filter However unlike the measurement filter the RX filter is not relevant for the measurement but is only required to create the reference signal optimally The RX filter and t
365. pecific for FSV K70 SYNC ACPLimit BURSt SYNG SE STAT QUES SYNC LMARgin LIMit CALibration UNCAL MODulation FREQuency FDEPeak TEMPerature FDEMean POWer FDECurrent STATus QUEStionable Ers PFEMean PIQOffset PFECurrent MIQOffset ClQOffset Kee al PMEan RFEPeak PCURrent RFEMean PRHo RFECurrent MRHo PEAK one MEAN RPEak FSK ST T QUES MOD FSK E IQRHo CURRent STB ym STAT QUES MOD 1Q TE CFRequency STAT QUES MOD CFR MAGNitude STAT QUES MOD MAGN PHASe STAT QUES MOD PHAS EVM STAT QUES MOD EVM STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt 1 2 3 4 gt Fig 5 1 Overview of VSA specific status registers 5 4 STATus QUEStionable Register eeeeeeeeeeeneeenene enne nnns 333 5 2 STATus QUEStionable SYNC n Register eene n 334 5 3 STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt Register eene 334 5 4 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM Register es 335 5 5 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe Register 335 5 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation n MAGnitude Register 336 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 332 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUEStionable Register 5 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register 336 5 8 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO Register
366. ple Manual operation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 irrelevant irrelevant The unit is variable see datasheet 10dBm Range RST DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm See Reference Level on page 116 265 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El DISPlay subsystem DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Value This command defines a reference level offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Ref Level Offset on page 121 See Ref Level Offset on page 155 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the position of the reference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corresponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Manual operation See Ranges on page
367. r R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analy sis To open the VSA menu If the Vector Signal Analysis VSA mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the VSA softkey If the VSA mode is already active press the HOME key The VSA menu is displayed After activation the contents of the menus are adapted to the functions of the VSA option The menus of the option are described in chapter 3 2 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 on page 112 SCPI command INSTrument SELect on page 277 Menu and Softkey Description Apart from the Span Bandwidth and Marker Functions menus which are not avail able in the VSA mode all menus not mentioned below are provided as described for the base unit The MEAS key opens a submenu identical to the VSA menu and additionally displays the chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 179 dialog box when pressed Measurement Result Display Various different result displays for VSA measurements are available The different dis play types are described in chapter 3 1 Measurement Result Display on page 73 Importing and Exporting UO Data As of firmware version 1 60 UO data can be imported from a file for processing in R amp S FSV K70 and captured I Q data can be stored to a file IQ Import IQ Export softkeys in the Save Rcl men
368. r measurements on digitally modulated signals in the time domain Based on the vector measurements further evaluations e g statistical evaluations can be performed This document contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K70 It describes the menus and remote control commands for vector signal analysis as well as some common measurements 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows e Quick Start Guide e Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operatin
369. r UO iC Constellation I Q Rotated C Constellation Frequency Vector Frequency Result Type Transformation for Screen A Normal ps Spectrum Display Points Sym I auto MEMOS A vi A E E T 180 Flighlght SyT DOls a ine devinc stadt sh tdt rd e RR do ecu aa ieee 181 ofr m 181 ECCIIMBUS METERS 181 Result Type Transformation 2 eese erede ted eed e tbe ad 182 Display E E 183 i r ns 184 Screen X active If enabled the screen the tab corresponds to is displayed If fewer than 4 screens are enabled the remaining screens are enlarged to make best use of the available display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 259 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 180 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Highlight Symbols If enabled the symbol instants are highlighted as squares in the screen for measured and reference signals in time normal display as well as error displays Not all measurements support this function Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt SYMBol1 on page 261 Source You can choose which signal source is to be displayed from the following options Source Description Capture Buffer The captured UO data Meas amp Ref The measurement signal or the ideal reference signal or both Symbols The detected symbols i e the detected bits E
370. r lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command positions the delta marker to the next higher trace minimum on the right of the current value i e ascending X values The corresponding delta marker is activated first if necessary If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT MIN RIGH Sets delta marker 1 to the next higher minimum value to the right of the current value CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode Manual operation See Marker 1 2 3 4 on page 133 See Marker Norm Delta on page 133 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 215 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n
371. r of captured points per symbol Setting parameters lt CaptOverSampling gt 4 8 16 32 RST 4 Example DDEM PRAT 8 Sets 8 points per symbol Mode VSA Manual operation See Capture Oversampling on page 158 SENSe DDEMod PRESet CALC This command selects the Signal Overview from the predefined tab of the display over view dialog box Example SENS DDEM PRES CALC Resets the screen display to the presetting Usage Event Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 295 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a NS SS SS SSS a a a a ee SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod PRESet RLEVel This command initiates automatic setting of the RF attenuation and IF gain to the level of the applied signal Note The following command must be synchronized to the end of the autorange process using WAI OPC or OPC because otherwise the autorange process will be stopped Example SENS DDEM PRES RLEV WAI Performs automatic level setting Usage Event Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod PRESet STANdard lt Standard gt This command selects an automatic setting of all modulation parameters according to a standardized transmission method or a user defined transmission method The standar dized transmission methods are available in the instrument as predefined standards Setting parameters lt Standard gt string Specifies the file name that contains the transmiss
372. rage power Mode VSA Manual operation See Normalize EVM to on page 175 SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO lt LinkMode gt This command activates and deactivates automatic estimation oversampling for the modulation accuracy table Setting parameters lt LinkMode gt ON OFF RST ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 176 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue lt EstimationOverSampling gt This command determines the number of estimation points per symbol for the modulation accuracy table Setting parameters EstimationOverSamptingreric value RST 1 Mode VSA Manual operation See Estimation Points Sym on page 176 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 286 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod FACTory VALue lt Factory gt This command restores the factory settings of standards or patterns for the R amp S FSV K70 option Setting parameters lt Factory gt ALL STANdard PATTern ALL Restores both standards and patterns RST ALL Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Digital Standards on page 113 See Restore Standard Files on page 114 See Restore Factory Settings on page 114 See Restore Pattern Files on page 114 SENSe DDEMod FILTer ALPHa lt MeasFilterAlphaBT gt This command determines the filter characteristic ALPHA BT The resolution is 0 01 Setting parameters MeasFilterAlphaBT
373. rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Measurement Result Display A Phase Error 1 Cirw EY ID il li Start 0 sym Stop 200 sym Fig 3 14 Result display Phase Error in normal mode Available for source types e Modulation Errors SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM ERR MPH to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM PHAS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 20 Frequency Error Absolute Displays the error of the instantaneous frequency in Hz of the measurement signal with respect to the reference signal as a function of symbols over time FREQ ERR FREQ uras FREQsz C with tzn T5 and Tp the duration of one sampling period at the sample rate defined by the display points per symbol parameter see Display Points Sym on page 183 Note that this measurement does not consider a possible carrier frequency offset This has already been compensated for in the measurement signal This measurement is mainly of interest when using the MSK or FSK modulation but can o also be used for the PSK QAM modulations However since these modulations can have transitions
374. re suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Average lt Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The average is formed over several sweeps The Statistics Count determines the number of averaging procedures This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 View Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP T
375. rence Known Data File Syntax Description on page 202 Before loading the file to the R amp S FSV K70 application make sure the syntax of your file is valid Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 200 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Ee Configuring VSA measurements Auxiliary tool to create Known Data files An auxiliary tool to create Known Data files from data that is already available in the R amp S FSV K70 application is provided on the instrument free of charge To create a Known Data file using the recording tool for sequences 1 Import or apply input data for which stable demodulation results are available to the R amp S FSV K70 application If necessary adapt the demodulation settings until the requested results are obtained 2 Execute the file RecordingToolforSequences EXE from the installation direc tory on the instrument The R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences window is displayed R amp S Recording Tool for Sequences e HR Configuration VISA TCPIP localhost Results Analyzed Sequences 33 Modulation PSK Format NORM Order 8 ResultLength 148 Different Sequences 83 Last New Sequence Found Os ago Throughput 0 72 kSymbols s Store for K70 Stop Reset 3 Start a measurement in the R amp S FSV K70 application 4 Inthe tool window select Run The tool records the demodulated data sequences The following result information is provided by the
376. rence Level to Full Scale Level 141 5 0 cT 141 Urt RT 141 ilo o MERIT TREE ELIO PRECEPIT 141 M s I NN NEN 141 L Firmware Update 142 e CT EES 142 I uet ONE EE 142 his ACD O aan aa 142 Digtal lO EE 143 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband I Q the source can also be configured here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 277 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 273 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital I Q signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 275 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 140 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis perc X
377. ription dialog Increase the search tolerance in the Burst Search dialog Keep an eye on the green red field If the burst search succeeds you can see the length of the found bursts Setthe minimum burst length to 50 and the maximum burst length to 5000 For more information see Signal Description on page 150 chapter 3 2 9 Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S FSV K70 on page 132 Burst Search on page 162 e The signal is highly distorted and or has modulation noise One possibility to enhance the robustness of the burst search is to increase the min imum gap length If the bursts within your capture buffer are not closely spaced it makes sense to increase the value of this parameter Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 340 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Messages Burst amp Pattern Search Burst amp Pattern Search corsi scorc ia curt Scoren RR NW Auto according to Signal Description Burst found Iw Auto according to Signal Description irst found Meas only if Burst was found Meas only if Burst was found Auto Configurabon Auto Configuration Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Search Tolerance 4 sym 14 769 us Min Gap Length Cm D 3 692 us Min Gep Length d osym J 36 923 us Related Settings Related Settings Signal Description L Signal Description L Trace Trace Mag CapBuf 1 Ch Mag CapBuf Stop 1500 sym Stop 1500 sym Fig 6 6 Example for ad
378. rm by modulating the pattern symbol sequence The UO pattern is then correlated with the measured signal At Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 344 R amp S FSV K70 Support a ee a SS SSS SSS l Explanation of Error Messages positions where the correlation metric exceeds the I Q Correlation Threshold the I Q pattern is found e Stage 2 demodulates the measured signal at the I Q pattern location and the trans mitted symbols are checked for correctness against the pattern symbol sequence In case of a very short pattern i e a pattern length in the order of the inter symbol inter ference ISI duration a number of issues can arise e False positive The UO pattern is found at positions where the transmitted symbols differ from the pattern symbols Solution Try one of the following Activate Meas only if Pattern Symbols Correct Increase the I Q Correlation Threshold see I Q Correlation Threshold on page 165 e False negative The I Q pattern search misses a position where transmitted symbols match the pat tern symbols Solution Decrease the I Q Correlation Threshold see UO Correlation Threshold on page 165 In case of bursted signals the pattern search finds only the first occurrence of the I Q pattern within each burst If a false positive occurs in this situation cf case 1 the use of Meas only if pattern symbols correct will not provide a satisfactory solution In this case do the following
379. rror Vector The difference between the complex measurement signal and the complex reference signal Modulation measurement signal reference signal For example EVM Mag meas ref Modulation Errors Modulation errors due to different complex samples in the measurement and the ref erence signal Modulation measurement signal Modulation reference signal For example Magnitude Error Mag meas Mag ref Modulation Accu Category for measurements that provide a summary on the modulation accuracy e g racy the Result Summary Remote command CALCulate lt n gt F T ED on page 249 Result Type Defines how the signal source is evaluated and which result is displayed The available result types depend on the selected source type For more information see chapter 3 1 1 Result types on page 75 Table 3 6 Available result types depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag I Q Frequency Absolute Vector UO Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Phase Unwrap Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 181 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis BEE Configuring VSA measurements Source Type Result Type Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag UO Eye Diagram Real I Eye Diagram Imag Q E
380. rsampling gt Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 300 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt RecordLength gt numeric value Range 100 symbols 26 042 us to 50000 symbols 13 021 ms RST 8000 symbols 2 083 ms Default unit S Example DDEM RLEN 1000SYM Sets a capture length of 1000 symbols Mode VSA Manual operation See Capture Length on page 158 SENSe DDEMod SBANd lt SidebandPos gt This command selects the sideband for the demodulation Setting parameters lt SidebandPos gt NORMal INVerse NORMal Normal non inverted position INVerse Inverted position RST NORMal Example DDEM SBAN INV Selects the inverted position Mode VSA Manual operation See Swap Q on page 159 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt AUTO lt AutoBurstSearch gt This command links the burst search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as bursted burst search is switched on automatically see also Auto On Off on page 163 Setting parameters lt AutoBurstSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example DDEM SEAR BURS AUTO AUTO Enables auto burst search Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto On Off on page 163 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the search tolerance and the min gap length to their default values Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 301 R amp S FSV
381. rted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using max hold or averaging functions Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 269 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El INITiate Subsystem In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end Manual operation See Continue Single Sweep on page 123 INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated continu ous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON
382. rument Subsystem INSTrument SELect lt Mode gt This command switches the instrument to VSA mode Parameters lt Mode gt DDEM VSA mode Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 277 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee ee ee a J n m Dna MMEMory Subsystem Example INST SEL DDEM Mode VSA INSTrument NSELect lt Mode gt This command switches the instrument to VSA mode Parameters lt Mode gt 2 VSA mode Example INST NSEL 2 Mode VSA 4 9 MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command loads the UO data from the specified iq tar file Note switch to single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF before importing UO data as oth erwise the instrument will continue to measure data and display the current results rather than the imported data Parameters lt FileName gt Complete file name including the path Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads UO data from the specified file Usage Setting only MMEMory SELect ITEM VIQData lt Mode gt If enabled the captured I Q data is included in the save set when instrument data is stored single sweep mode only Parameters Mode ON OFF Mode VSA MMEMory STORe IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command stores the complex UO data to the specified iq tar file in 32 bit floating point format Parameters lt FileName gt Complete file name including the path
383. s for the demodulation The Measurement Filter tab contains the settings for the measurement filter A live preview of the Constellation UO trace with the current settings is displayed in the preview area at the bottom of the dialog box The preview area is not editable directly For details on the available settings see Measurement Filter on page 178 and Demod ulation on page 173 Display Config Opens the Display Configuration dialog box to configure the measurement results dis play See chapter 3 3 1 6 Display Configuration on page 179 Softkeys of the Marker Menu R amp S FSV K70 The MARKER key displays the Marker menu which contains the following softkeys Marker TE 133 Lu IDs Bio rer DENS En 133 Couple Screens Le DEET 133 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 132 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Link MEI and Detal iere ect tet edo ete te seme teret etn e aee eere eoe eu tee 134 Malkerdo T1868 EE 134 TIR S dei EE 135 Marker 1 2 3 4 Selects the corresponding marker and activates it Marker 1 is always a normal marker After Marker 2 to 4 have been switched on they are delta markers that are referenced to Marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value displays using the Marker Norm Delta softkey When Marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey sw
384. s or all points are considered for the statistical calculations Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 252 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt StatisticMode gt SONLYy INFinite SONLy Symbol points only INFinite All points are used RST SONLy Example CALC1 STAT MODE SONL Mode VSA Manual operation See Oversampling on page 184 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics PRESet This command sets both axis of the statistics measurement to measurement dependent default values Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Example CALC STAT PRES Usage Event Mode VSA Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See Default Settings on page 118 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe AUTO lt AutoMode gt Sets the x axis of the statistics measurement depending on the measured values Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt AutoMode gt ONCE Example CALC3 STAT SCAL AUTO ONCE Usage Setting only Mode VSA Manual operation See Ranges statistic measurements on page 117 See Adjust Settings on page 118 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 253 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt STATistics SCALe X BCOunt lt StatisticsNofColumns gt This command defines the number of columns for the statistical distribution Suffix lt n gt 1
385. s register comprises information about limit violations in Phase Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 335 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 a See SS a a ee a ee n STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register 5 6 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude Register This register comprises information about limit violations in Magnitude Error evaluation It can be queried with commands STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude CONDition and STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt MAGNitude EVENt Bit No Meaning 0 Error in current RMS value 1 Error in mean RMS value 2 Error in peak RMS value 3 4 These bits are not used 5 Error in current peak value 6 Error in mean peak value 7 Error in peak peak value 8 15 These bits are not used 5 7 STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency Register This register comprises information about limit violations i
386. splay to decimal mode This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 118 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Hexadecimal Ranges Symbol Table Sets the symbol display to hexadecimal mode This setting also affects the number of symbols displayed in each row Units Opens a submenu to define the units for the x and y axis X Axis Unit Units Opens an edit dialog field to define the x axis unit as seconds or symbols Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 257 Y Axis Unit Units Opens an edit dialog field to define the y axis unit according to the displayed measure ment type Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 267 Capture Unit Units Defines the unit in which the data is captured seconds or signals The unit is also applied to the trigger offset and the grids of all active measurements Remote command CALCulate lt n gt X UNIT TIME on page 257 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote com
387. splayed for reference only Remote command SENSe DDEMod RLENgth VALue on page 300 Capture Oversampling Sets the oversampling rate i e the number of captured points per symbol The default value is 4 This parameter affects the demodulation bandwidth If the bandwidth is too narrow the signal is not displayed completely If the bandwidth is too wide interference from outside the actual signal to be measured can distort the result Thus for signals with a large frequency spectrum e g FSK modulated signals a higher capture oversampling rate may be necessary For an indication of the required capture oversampling value view the Real Imag Q display of the Capture Buffer with a Spectrum transformation If the complete signal is displayed and fills the width of the display the selected value is suitable If the signal is cut off increase the oversampling rate if it is too small decrease the oversampling value A Spec Reallmag CapBuf 1 Clrw 80 dB 100 dB 140 dB Start 541 667 kHz Stop 541 667 kHz Fig 3 26 Determining the I Q bandwidth Real Imag I Q display of the Capture Buffer with a Spectrum transformation For further details see chapter 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 11 Remote command SENSe DDEMod PRATe on page 295 Sample Rate Shows the current sample rate Note that this is a read only field Usable I Q Bandwidth Shows
388. sting patterns to the standard remove patterns already assigned to the standard edit existing or define new patterns For details on managing standard patterns see chapter 3 3 6 Managing patterns on page 196 Note Pattern details Pattern details for the currently focussed pattern are displayed at the upper right hand side of the dialog box You can refer to these details for example when you want to add a new pattern to the standard and want to make sure you have selected the correct one Prefix Advanced Settings Shows only patterns that contain the specified prefix Show Compatible Advanced Settings Shows only patterns that are compatible to the selected modulation mode Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 166 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DEENEN Configuring VSA measurements Show All Advanced Settings Shows all patterns regardless of the selected standard Pattern Search On Advanced Settings If enabled the instrument can adapt its result range to the selected pattern Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 310 Meas only if pattern symbols correct Advanced Settings If enabled measurement results are only displayed and averaged if a valid pattern has been found For measurements of signals with patterns that are averaged over several Sweeps this option should be enabled so that erroneous measurements do not affect the re
389. sult of averaging Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE on page 308 Add to Standard Advanced Settings Adds the selected patterns to the list of available patterns Standard Patterns For details see To add a predefined pattern to a standard on page 196 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARCh SYNC PATTern ADD on page 309 Remove from Standard Advanced Settings Removes the assignment of the selected patterns to the standard The patterns are removed from the Standard Patterns list but not deleted Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTern REMove on page 310 Edit Advanced Settings Opens the Edit Pattern dialog box to edit the pattern definition See Pattern Defini tion on page 168 For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 197 Remote command SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 306 ENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 307 ENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT on page 311 New Advanced Settings Opens the Pattern dialog box to create a new pattern definition See Pattern Defini tion on page 168 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 167 Configuring VSA measurements For details on defining a pattern see example Defining a pattern on page 197 Remote command SENSe DDEM
390. surement Traces that are not activated are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV provides the following different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 260 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 205 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Further Informatio
391. t NONE Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 304 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 b i i i n SENSe subsystem Manual operation See Select Result Rng on page 124 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern CONFigure AUTO lt AutoConfigure gt This command sets the IQ correlation threshold to its default value Setting parameters lt AutoConfigure gt ON OFF RST ON Example SENS DDEM SEAR PATT CONF AUTO ON Mode VSA Manual operation See Auto Configuration on page 165 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC STATe lt FastSync gt Switches fast synchronization on and off if you manually synchronize with a waveform pattern Setting parameters lt FastSync gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 176 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO lt UseWfmForSync gt This command selects manual or automatic synchronization with a pattern waveform to speed up measurements Setting parameters lt UseWfmForSync gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Mode VSA Manual operation See Coarse Synchronization on page 176 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC AUTO lt AutoPatternSearch gt This command links the pattern search to the type of signal When a signal is marked as patterned pattern search is switched on automatically Setting parameters lt AutoPatternSearch gt AUTO MANual RST AUTO Example DDEM SEAR SYNC AUTO Enab
392. t Show Compatible To display only patterns that contain a specific prefix enter the Prefix in the edit field To create a new pattern 1 In the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Press Pattern Settings 3 Press New Pattern The pattern definition dialog box is displayed 4 Define the following pattern settings Setting Description Name Pattern name that will be displayed in selection list Description Optional description of the pattern which is displayed in the pattern details Modulation order Number of values each symbol can represent order of modulation Symbol format Hexadecimal or decimal format Symbols Pattern definition consisting of one or more symbols Comment Optional comment for the pattern displayed in the pattern details kept for com patibility with FSQ Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 196 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deeg Configuring VSA measurements To define the pattern proceed as follows a If necessary add a new symbol field by pressing Add b Select the symbol field you want to define c Enter a value using the keyboard Depending on the Modulation Order the value can be in the range 0 to n 1 where n is the Modulation Order e g 8 for 8 PSK d Select the next symbol field or insert a new one and continue to define the other symbols To scroll through the fields for long pa
393. t ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVEN section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 323 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt part of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt SumBit gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated register The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVEN register Parameters lt SumBit gt Range 0 t
394. t displays the symbol instants of the Vector UO measurement Hence this is a rotated constellation e g for a 1 4 DQPSK 8 points are displayed In the R amp S FSV K70 the Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr 4 DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 352 R amp S FSV K70 Support REENEN Frequently Asked Questions Note As of firmware version R amp S FSV 1 70 a new result display I Q Constellation Rotated is available that displays the rotated constellation as the FSQ K70 does For details on the Constellation UO diagram in the R amp S FSV K70 see chapter 3 1 1 11 Constellation HUOT on page 85 Table 6 1 Constellation I Q and Vector I Q for pi 4 DQPSK modulation VSA m Spectrum Ref Level 3 28 dB Std TETRA_ContinousDownlink SR 18 0 kHz Att 3dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen 255 GC C Constellation I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 5 13 D Vector 1 Q Meas amp Ref R amp S FSQ K70 R amp S FSV K70 Problem the MSK FSK signal demodulates on the R amp S FSQ K70 but not on the R amp S FSV K70 or Why do have to choose different transmit filters in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSV K70 When generating an MSK FSK reference signal the R amp S FSQ K70 automatically repla ces the Dirac pulses generated by the frequency mapper with square pulses with the length of one symbo
395. t m gt TRACE eee nnnn ene tnnn enn trne sen nnne sine thnt eset sns e stern sen nn CALCulate n DELTamarker m X CALCulate n DELTamarker m X ABSolute sse eene nnne rene renn nennen inen 216 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz SREL ative eene nnne ene erret nnn een rnnn nn nnns 217 CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarkercmzs vi 217 CAL Culate cnz DEL Tamarker mztGTATel nene nnne tnnt nennen net nnn senes enhn nena 215 CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt STAT 6 nennen nnnen neret neret rester s enne eterne CALCulate lt n gt ELIN lt startstop gt VALue e er dps D je Bei eire ES CAL Culate nz Ek DEViaton COMbensaton eene enne nenne enne n nnn ntn nnn CAL Culate cnz Ek DEViatonREterencehREl atve eene enne nnne CALOCulate n FSK DEViation RE FerencefvVAl ue CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy lt ResultType gt lt LimitType gt STATe amp CALOCulate n LIMit MACCuracy ResultType LimitType RESUIt sese 220 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv CFEbRrorCURbRent VAl ue nennen nnne nnne nnn 221 CAL Culate cnz LlMitMACCuracvCFERrorMEAN MAL ue 221 CAL Culate cnzLlMtMACCuracv CFERrorPREAKVAL ue nennen nennen rennen nnn 221 CALC lat lt n gt LIMit MACCura y DEFa lt sss eterne enne nennen nen enn nnns 218 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy EVM PCURrent VALue 222 CAL Culate nz LIM
396. t unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC FERR RPE VAL 15 define a limit of 15 15 Hz Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy MERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean magnitude error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 Default unit Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 223 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 H a a ed CALCulate subsystem Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC MERR RPE VAL 2 4 define a limit of 2 496 Mode VSA CALCulate n LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset CURRent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy OOFFset MEAN VALue lt LimitValue gt CAL
397. ta Known Data is needed for the BER measurement and can be used for fine synchronization see Demodulation dialog wi Known Data Filename KnownData_example xml Load Data File Additional Information Result Length Number of Sequences 5 Modulation Order 8 Base Hexadecimal Comment Standard EDGE_8PSK KOWA DWE tee ege Ee dE gege 153 Load Kiefer Kleeder deele eege 153 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 152 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis DREES Configuring VSA measurements Known Data Activates or deactivates the use of the loaded data file if available When deactivated the additional information from the previously loaded data file is removed Any references to the known data in the Demodulation dialog box are replaced by the default parameter values see Demodulation on page 173 Note When a standard is loaded the use of a Known Data file is automatically deacti vated Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe on page 290 Load Data File If Known Data is activated this function displays a file selection dialog box to select the xml file that contains the known data Once a file has been selected any additional infor mation provided by the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box Remote command SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME on page 290 3 3 1 2 Frontend and UO Capture Settings You configure the measurement of the actual i
398. tart of the useful part of the burst However if the entered offset is not correct within about 4 symbols of tolerance the pattern will not be found Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 341 R amp S FSV K70 Support Explanation of Error Messages Spectrun VSA Ref Level 22 00 dim Mod Modulation amp Signal Description m el Att 10 0 op Freq 1 0GHz Cap Ler SGL TRG EXT BURST PATTERN Modulation Signal Description A EVM iw 7 Lg T T T Signal Type Continuous Signal Burst Signal Burst Min Length 148 sym 546 462 Max Length 148 sym 546 462 Run In B sym 11 077 11 077 Run Out 3 sym w Pattern Start 3 sym Stop 151 sym C Magq CapBuf 1 RGE_TSCC Pattern S Name Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Fig 6 7 GSM EDGE burst Pattern is actually located in the middle of the burst The correct value for Offset here would be 58 Solution Try one of the following Remove the offset unknown Enter the correct offset within about 4 symbols of tolerance For more information see Signal Description on page 150 e The specified pattern does not coincide with the pattern in your signal In the R amp S FSQ K70 it is possible to search for multiple patterns at the same time For example in a GSM measurement the capture buffer can be checked for all TSCs simultaneously This is not possible in the R amp S FSV K70 Solution Make sure that the correct patt
399. te as Trace Mode and toggle to Ref in the Evaluation column Trace Wizard Screen Trace Trace Mode Evaluation Clear Write QES Clear write d D g d Trace 3 Blank um Trace 4 Blank Meas f Ref 3 Trace 5 Blank Meas f Ret J a e Trace 6 Blank Meas Ref H H Preset Select Select All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min Problem The measurement screen does not show average results Solution e 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen e 2 Press the TRACE key Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 350 R amp S FSV K70 Support REESEN Frequently Asked Questions e 3 Press the Trace Wizard softkey e 4 Select a second trace and choose the preferred Trace Mode e g Max Hold or Average Spectrum VSA Ref Level 0 00 dBm Mod m elAtt 20 0dB Freq 1 0GHz ResLen TRG EXT Trace Trace Mode A EVM 1 Clrw 2 Avg 3 Max a Trace Wizard Screen A Evaluation Trace 2 A Traces 3 Trace 4 Blank aa cs ab sd peor Mae sunt sd ln E Voce T Ugo THU Start 0 sym Stop 100 sym Tes 5 Blank s C Mag CapBuf 1 Clrw Bm Preset Select Select 40 dBm All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min Trace Wizard oan Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 Measuring Ga 15 03 2010 08 32 29 Problem The spectr
400. tem Query parameters lt type gt lt none gt Carrier frequency error for current sweep AVG Average carrier frequency error over several sweeps RPE Peak carrier frequency error over several Sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of frequency error PCTL 95 percentile value of frequency error RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic EVM lt type gt This command queries the results of the error vector magnitude measurement of digital demodulation The output values are the same as those provided in the Modulation Accuracy table Suffix lt n gt 1 4 screen number lt m gt 1 4 irrelevant Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 228 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode CALCulate subsystem lt none gt Average EVM value of current sweep AVG RMS average EVM value over several sweeps RPE Peak value of EVM over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of EVM values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum EVM over all symbols of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum EVM values over several sweeps TPEA Maximum EVM over all symbols over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum EVM values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt
401. terface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURCe EBOX RST SOURCe EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DiglIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURCe EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 142 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 272 Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital I Q input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 if available The information includes Device identification e Used port e Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output trans fer rates Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN
402. th standard specific patterns Patterns required for the current measurement can be selected from this list This list can be extended by patterns that are already available in the instrument Newly created pat terns can also be added to the list Pattern Settings To configure a pattern search Configuring a pattern search requires the following steps 1 Selecting a pattern This may require further subtasks a Changing the display for the list of patterns b Adding a pattern to a standard c Creating a new pattern d Editing a pattern 2 Enabling pattern search if Auto mode is disabled 3 Optionally defining the offset of the pattern with respect to the useful part of the burst The specified number of symbols in the signal are ignored during the pattern search To add a pattern to the signal description 1 In the VSA Settings Overview dialog box select Signal Description 2 Select the Pattern option Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 194 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements To select a predefined pattern for a search This task can also be performed by remote control see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC CATalog on page 306 and SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect on page 310 Depending on whether a dialog box is already displayed there are different ways to select a pattern 1 If th
403. the BER measurement and can also be used for the fine synchronization See chapter 3 3 7 Working With Known Data Files on page 199 for details Setting parameters lt KnownDataState gt ON OFF RST OFF Mode VSA Manual operation See Known Data on page 153 SENSe DDEMod KDATa NAME lt FileName gt This command selects the Known Data file Setting parameters lt FileName gt string the path and file name of the xml file containing known data sequences Example SENS DDEM KDAT NAME D MyData xml Mode VSA Manual operation See Load Data File on page 153 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 290 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 RRE SENSe subsystem SENSe DDEMod MAPPing CATalog This command queries the names of all mappings that are available for the current mod ulation type and order A mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Example DDEM MAPP CAT Queries the list of mappings Usage Query only Mode VSA Manual operation See Modulation Mapping on page 149 SENSe DDEMod MAPPing VALue lt Mapping gt This command selects the mapping designated by mapping name for the digital demodulation The mapping describes the assignment of constellation points to symbols Setting parameters Mapping string lt string gt Example SENS DDEM MAPP GSM Sets mapping to GSM Mode VSA Manual opera
404. the results of the phase error measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix n 1 4 screen number m 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters type none Phase error in degree AVG RMS phase error value over several sweeps RPE Peak value of phase error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of phase error values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum phase error of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum phase error values over several sweeps TPE Maximum phase error over several sweeps PSD Standard deviation of maximum phase error values over several sweeps PPCT 95 percentile of maximum RMS values over several sweeps RST PEAK Usage Query only Mode VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic QERRor lt type gt This command queries the results of the Quadratur error measurement performed for digital demodulation Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 236 R amp S FSV K70 SSS SUE SS SS ee c Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Mode Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt quadrature error for current sweep AVG Average quadrature error over several sweeps RPE Peak quadrature error over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of quadrature error PCTL 95 percentile value of quadra
405. the usable UO bandwidth Note that this is a read only field Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 158 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Configuring VSA measurements Maximum Bandwidth Defines the maximum bandwidth to be used by the R amp S FSV for I Q data acquisition This function is only available if the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is instal led and no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 14 For details on the maximum bandwidth see chapter 2 2 Filters and Bandwidths During Signal Processing on page 11 Auto Default The maximum available bandwidth is used for all sample rates If the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 is installed it is also activated if no other restrictions for its use apply see chapter 2 2 2 1 Restrictions on page 14 Thus sample rates up to 1 28 GHz and an UO bandwidth up to 160 MHz are possible Note that using the bandwidth extension may cause more spurious effects 40 MHz Deactivates use of the bandwidth extension option R amp S FSV B160 thus reducing possible spurious effects while restricting the analysis bandwidth to 40 MHz Sample rates higher than 128 MHz can only be achieved using the bandwidth extension Remote command TRACe IQ WBANd STATe on page 326 Swap UO Swaps the and Q values of the signal Swapping and Q inverts the sideband ON and Q are exch
406. thms see chapter 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 55 are calculated over the Estimation range see also chapter 2 6 1 2 Estimation on page 57 Table 3 2 Results calculated over the estimation range PSK MSK QAM FSK Carrier Frequency Error FSK Deviation Error UO Offset FSK Measurement Deviation UO Imbalance Carrier Frequency Error Gain Imbalance Carrier Frequency Drift Quadrature Error Amplitude Droop Current value In the Current column the value evaluation for the current evaluation is displayed For example the EVM Peak value in the current sweep corresponds to the peak of the trace values within the evaluation range for the current sweep as indicated by marker 1 in figure 3 18 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 98 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Measurement Result Display Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM_NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input RF SGL BURST PATTERN A Result Summary 0 42 0 42 0 00 1 12 1 12 0 00 0 21 0 21 0 21 0 00 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 00 28 82 28 82 28 82 0 00 0 999983 0 999983 0 999983 0 000000 68 95 68 95 68 95 0 00 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 00 0 03 0 03 0 03 0 00 0 000428 0 000428 0 000428 0 000000 e 1 Cirw 1 119 60 500 sy Fig 3 18 Example for result summary with current EVM peak value marked If you want to compare the trace values to th
407. tion R amp S FSV K70 e STATus QUEStionable SYNC lt n gt contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during burst detection e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt provides information on any limit vio lations that occur after demodulation in one of the 4 windows e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt EVM limit violations in EVM evalua tion e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt PHASe limit violations in Phase Error evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt MAGnitude limit violations in Mag nitude Error evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt CFRequency limit violations in Car rier Frequency evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulation lt n gt IQRHO limit violations in l Q Offset and RHO evaluation e STATus QUESTionable MODulationcn FSK limit violations in FSK evaluation The status of the STATus QUESTionable MODulation register is indicated in bit 7 of the STATus QUESTionable register It can be queried using the STA Tus QUEStionable EVENt command The commands to query the contents of the following status registers are described in chapter 4 12 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem on page 318 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 331 R amp S FSV K70 Status Reporting System Option R amp S FSV K70 eo logical OR of all bits DigitallQ C s
408. tion See Modulation Mapping on page 149 SENSe DDEMod MFILter ALPHa lt MeasFilterAlphaBT gt This command sets the alpha value of the measurement filter Setting parameters MeasFilterAlphaBT numeric value Range 0 1 to 1 0 RST 0 22 Default unit NONE Example SENS DDEM MFIL ALPH 0 8 Sets alpha to 0 8 Mode VSA Manual operation See Alpha BT on page 150 SENSe DDEMod MFILter AUTO lt MeasFilterAuto gt If this command is set to ON the measurement filter is defined automatically depending on the Transmit filter Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 291 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Setting parameters lt MeasFilterAuto gt Example Mode Manual operation SENSe subsystem ON OFF RST ON SENS DDEM MFIL AUTO ON VSA See Auto on page 179 SENSe DDEMod MFILter NAME Name This command selects a measurement filter and automatically switches it on For more information on measurement filters refer to chapter 2 2 6 Measurement Fil ters on page 17 Setting parameters lt Name gt Example Mode Manual operation Name of the measurement filter or User for a user defined filter An overview of available measurement filters is provided in table 2 4 SENS DDEM MFIL NAME RRC Selects the RRC measurement filter VSA See Type on page 179 See Load User Filter on page 179 SENSe
409. tion lt n gt register contributes to the sum bit of the STATus QUEStionable register Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Setting parameters lt Enable gt 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit 1 if the associated EVENT bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well Usage SCPI confirmed Mode all STATus QUEStionable MODulation n CONDition Contains the sum bit of the next lower register STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt lt ResultType gt Its contents reflect the evaluation status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n gt EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 319 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 Eee eee i STATus QUEStionable Subsystem Possible events limit violations are described in chapter 5 3 STATus QUEStiona ble MODulation lt n gt Register on page 334 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode VSA STATus QUEStionable MODulation lt n
410. to the exceeded SER 1 The Known Data file was used Usage Query only Mode VSA Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 177 SENSe DDEMod FSYNc MODE lt FineSync gt This command defines the fine synchronization mode used to calculate results e g the bit error rate Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 289 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 LILLIE eee es SENSe subsystem Note You can define a maximum symbol error rate SER for the known data in reference to the analyzed data If the SER of the known data exceeds this limit the default syn chronization using the detected data is performed See SENSe DDEMod FSYNc LEVel on page 289 Setting parameters lt FineSync gt KDATa PATTern DDATa KDATa The reference signal is defined as the data sequence from the loaded Known Data file that most closely matches the measured data PATTern The reference signal is estimated from the defined pattern This setting requires an activated pattern search see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC STATe on page 310 DDATa Default The reference signal is estimated from the detected data RST DDATa Example SENS DDEM FSYN MODE KDATa Mode VSA Manual operation See Fine Synchronization on page 177 SENSe DDEMod KDATa STATe lt KnownDataState gt This command activates the usage of known data The usage of known data is a pre requisite for
411. trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 3 1 1 7 Real Imag UO Real and imaginary part of the measurement or reference signal in separate measure ment diagrams the x axis scaled in time units or symbols is identical for both diagrams The scaling of the capture buffer is e relative to the current reference level if you are using the RF input and Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 81 3 1 1 8 Measurement Result Display e relative to the full scale level if you are using the UO input Available for source types e Capture Buffer e Meas amp Ref Signal e Error Vector Ref Level 10 00 dBm Att 30 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Start 5 0 sym Fig 3 7 Result display Real Imag l Q in normal mode SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz 158 Input RF Stop 153 0 sym to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM RIMag to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe n DATA on page 325 Eye Diagram Real I The eye pattern of the inphase I channel the x axis value range is from 1 to 1 symbols MSK 2 to 2 Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display un V Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 27
412. trol Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Single Meas remote control ssssss Single Sweep s essere Single Sweep remote control Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 385 R amp S FSV K70 Index Trace Mode remote control sssss 260 Trg Gate Source remote control 327 328 329 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Hysteresis ccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteteeeeneeeaee Trigger Offset nentes MWIGW M Softkeys Lower Level Hysteresis Upper Level Hysteresis s elfe Special characters s essen Spectral e EE Standard Defaults rli EE Standards Predefined nre treten SAVING EC Saving remote control us Statistical display AE Statistics COUDL 1 reet tent neni Status registers STATus QUEStionable eee 333 Status reporting system esse 331 SWAP Qe m anes 159 Sweep Continue single sweep 123 Continuous derisi Ie qe Switching on the option sssssssseeeee Symbol mapping sis Symbol alte niece ini recette ete icone Remote Control 1 etes Symbols Display Configuration 181 Symbol tables RESUIDTYPE anis e Eee ned 88 Syntax Known data files s
413. ts for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value Range 0 0 to 1000000 RST 1 kHz Default unit Hz Example CALC2 FEED XTIM DDEM MACC Switch on result summary in screen 2 CALC2 LIM MACC FDER PEAK VAL 1050 define a limit of 1050 Hz Mode VSA Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 222 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 a SSS SSS EE a ee ee a ee a now CALCulate subsystem CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor PPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RCURrent VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RMEan VALue lt LimitValue gt CALCulate lt n gt LIMit MACCuracy FERRor RPEak VALue lt LimitValue gt This command defines the value for the current peak or mean frequency error peak or RMS limit Note that the limits for the current and the peak value are always kept identical This command is available for FSK modulation only Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Setting parameters lt LimitValue gt numeric value the value x x gt 0 defines the interval x x Range 0 0 to 100 RST 1 5 mean 1 0 Defaul
414. tte tte tette tens 300 I SENSe DBEMOGUSSBANO i Leer teret rh SEENEN dE etre rei a Ee 301 SENSe DBEMod SEARCh BURSEGAU IQ un Eed deed ccce rna Dann duo ee nena Ege me eR RETE ui 301 SENSe DDEMod SEARCh BURSt CONFigure AUTO essent 301 ISENSel DDEMod SEARch BURSCGLENobtMiNimum tts 302 IENSGel DDE Mod GEARch BURGCLENGhMAvimum EE 302 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSEtLENGth MiNmmum ANE 302 ISENSe DBEMed SEARCMBURSEMODE ciinii reden a eua deer panni e Eee ia 303 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSE GKIDEALL mg 303 SENSe EDBEMod SEARGCh BURSESKIP RISIDQ 2 2n 12r doni dd ARENS 303 SENSeF DBEMod SEARCRBURSES TATO itii ree eorr reae onere SEENEN sc 304 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt TOLErance nennen nnns 304 I SENSe FDBEMod SEARChMBU RSEUGCALG idee RENRE dE SSES dee 304 ISENZGelt DDEMod SEARch DAT Term CONFioure AUTO 305 ISENZGelt DDEMod SEARch PDATTem SvNMCTSTATel esee 305 SENSe DDEMod SEARch PATTern SYNC AUTO c cccceece cece cence eee sea enne n nennen nnn 305 SENSe subsystem I SENSe DDEMod SEARcCh S YNCHAD TO iii er eutec esee uae nate co ieu eth cenu un En dene cence tetenects 305 SENSeEDDEMod SEARGh S YNO CA Talgg iu re 2d eta pe Men AEN EE 306 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent 2sseessessessiessseeee nennen nnne nnn nnn 306 I SENSeEDDEMOd SEARCDISYNOIOOBPY EE 307 SENSe EDBEMod SEARGh S d Le DATA TEE 307 SENSe E DBEMod SEARch S YNG DEL te 2 1I ccee tecnico r
415. tterns use the scrollbar beneath the input area The number beneath the scrollbar at the right end indicates the sequential number of the last symbol field the number in the center indicates the sequential number of the currently selected symbol field To remove a symbol field select it and press Remove Example Defining a pattern xl Name TETRA_SA Description Special Continuous Downlink Burst Mod Order 4 Symbols Format Binary Hex Decimal a s Le e Le Le Size 3 o 2 2 1 1 3 1 1 Remove E Remove Comment Fig 3 34 Pattern definition Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 197 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements This task can also be performed by remote control Example SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC NAME TETRA SA see SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME on page 309 SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC NST 4 See SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate on page 309 SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC DATA 00030001000000000003000200020001000300010001 See SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA on page 307 SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC COMM see SENSe DEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent on page 306 SENS DDEM SEAR SYNC TEXT Special Continuous Downlink Burst
416. ttt ttt 306 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC COMMent cett ttt ttt 306 ISENSelDDEMod SEARch SY SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DATA ettet ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC DELete SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC IQCThreshold ttt 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC MODE tette ttt ttt 308 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NAME ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 309 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC NSTate ttt ttt ttt 309 ISENSelDDEMod SEARch SvNC PATTem ADD ttt ttt 309 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC PATTermn REMoVve ettet 310 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC SELect ettet ttt ttt 310 ISENSelDDEMod SEARch SvC ST ATe ttt ttt ttt ttt tto 310 SENSe DDEMod SEARch SYNC TEXT SENSe DDEMod SIGNaL PATTern ettet ttt ttt ttt SENSe DDEMod SIGNal VALue ett ttt ttt SENSe DDEMOod SRATe sette errant ISENSetDDEMod ST ANdard COMMent ttt ttt ttt tto SENSe DDEMod STANdard DELete ett ttt ee Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 379 IEN Gel DDEMod STANdard PDPREselvVAL ue 312 SENSeE DDEMOGd STANdatd SAVE ndr err eed eie qe caeteri pe EENEG 313 IEN Gel DDEMod STANdard GvNC OFtGerGTATe renes 313 SENSe DDEMod STANdard SYNC OFFSet VALue esses 313 IEN Gel DDEMod Elter AL PHa nennen rennen rennen enne 314 SENSe DDEMod TFILter NAME SENSe DDEMod TFILter USER SENSeEDDEMOG TFILEter STATE
417. ture error RST PEAK Query only VSA CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic RHO lt type gt This command queries the results of the Rho factor measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Query parameters lt type gt Usage Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 1 4 screen number 1 4 irrelevant lt none gt Rho factor for current sweep AVG Average rho factor over several sweeps RPE Peak rho factor over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of rho factor PCTL 95 percentile value of rho factor RST PEAK Query only 237 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 ee see e L ci R mQsaq CALCulate subsystem Mode VSA CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic SNR type This command queries the results of the SNR error measurement performed for digital demodulation Suffix n 1 4 screen number m 1 4 irrelevant Query parameters type none Average SNR value of current sweep AVG RMS Average SNR value over several sweeps RPE Peak value of SNR over several sweeps SDEV Standard deviation of SNR values over several sweeps PCTL 95 percentile of RMS value over several sweeps PEAK Maximum SNR over all symbols of current sweep PAVG Average of maximum SNR values over several sweeps TPE Maximum SNR over all symbols over several sweeps
418. tures are necessary to obtain the number of results defined by Statistics Count cannot be edited directly For more information on general measurement settings displayed in the channel bar see the description of basic operations in the base unit Result Ranges and Evaluation Ranges The defined result and evaluation ranges are included in the result displays where useful to visualize the basis of the displayed values and traces Result ranges In some cases the data in the capture buffer contains parts that are not relevant for the evaluation task at hand For example bursted signals have intervals between the bursts that are not of interest when analyzing peaks or overshoots Thus you can exclude them from the result range seechapter 3 3 2 Defining the Result Range on page 186 The result ranges are indicated by green bars along the time axis of the capture buffer result diagrams Depending on the type of signal and your result range definition the result ranges may be continuous or discrete Bursted signals commonly have several discrete result ranges TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 108 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Deg Measurement Result Display at the bursts with intervals during the noise periods which should not be included in the results C Mag CapBuf 20 dBm 40 d amp m sd ai du a Ai A ll P M Mu ul Start 0 sym Stop 10000 sym Fig 3 22 Resu
419. u For details see the base unit description Further Information chapter 3 4 1 Trace Mode Overview on page 205 chapter 3 4 2 ASCII File Export Format for VSA Data on page 206 3 1 Measurement Result Display eene n nennen 73 akt Result e 75 3 1 2 Normal Time Symbol Displays ssssssssssee eene 101 31 3 Spectral Displays ainina aadi aaa ORARE A RE CER E aaa e Ran 102 3 14 Statistical Displays 1 Ete Ele tr admet NEEE EAR A Dro a das RS 105 3 1 5 Displayed Measurement Gettngs m ems 107 3 1 6 Result Ranges and Evaluation HRanges m 108 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 72 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 1 7 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 3 2 8 3 2 9 3 2 10 3 2 11 3 2 12 3 2 13 3 2 14 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 1 Measurement Result Display Saving Measurement Results 110 Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 112 Softkeys of the VSA menu R amp S ESVkoOn ne 112 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu R amp S FSV K70 seen 114 SoftkeySoftkeys of the Amplitude Menu R amp S FSV K70 eseese 115 Softkeys of the Auto Set Menu R amp S EOVkKOO 121 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu R amp S FSV K70 ccc eeceeeeeeeeeeencneeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeaaas 122 Softkeys of the Trace Menu R amp S FSV K70
420. u can set the estimation points manually or let the R amp S FSV decide which estimation points to use If you define the estimation points manually you can set the estimation points to 1 or 2 per symbol or the value of the Capture Oversampling per symbol Setting the estimation points to 1 means that the estimation algorithm takes only the symbol time instants into account while setting the estimation points to Capture Oversampling means that all sample time instants are weighted equally If you select the automatic routine the R amp S FSV uses 2 estimation points per symbol for Offset QPSK modulation and 1 estimation point per symbol for other PSK and QAM modulated signals For MSK and FSK modulated signals the estimation points corre spond to the capture oversampling Remote command SENSe DDEMod EPRate AUTO on page 286 SENSe DDEMod EPRate VALue on page 286 Coarse Synchronization It is not only possible to check whether the pattern is part of the signal but also to use the pattern for synchronization in order to obtain the correct reference signal Depending on the signal making use ofthe pattern for synchronization speeds up your measurement considerably and makes it more robust against high carrier frequency offsets However in case the parameter is set to Pattern you should make sure that the pattern is suitable for synchronization e g a pattern that was made for synchronization purposes like
421. ugenl ZS and ve ASdY 9L zs and EN ele Megi gd ende 08L Gen RO ZHW0z Wvo4Jesn 9L zs gAa _ _ Ss ven bf dg zs Sud Sd ende 06 seo oud ZHW OZ Sd8 8 ZS g a ZS 8AG Old ce euo eJnje ea 91 d SN N IemeN eigeuod aimdeg vey dt 1930 ox MSWD ZHN ZSL Saz zed 103a peBuo B dd co iss Old dd 1930 9UON IEN uedpex4 E 3 66 0 aumdeg vey dd 1930 g0 MSWD ZHN ZSL wSdz zed 1930 1oad M c KR 191092 9UON jenjen GL L987 Z o sung 0492 q 0 REN ZHW L ASZ SHa d j iS Jejue3 9UON E Jn EN S G 619L Z 0j sung ZZ9L q 0 SNO ZHW Siz Ha Les Jet spot 3 Da obuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet Bug dem D uonenjeaq jueuiuBiv ynsey UuJ9jjed 10 u2ue9S 104 uouJeas 1g eudiv jyusueJJ 9je1joqui S uone npo N puepuejs JopjoJ4 O Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Predefined Standards and Settings 46 WL fa Wopz we Jojuo2 MSdO dOO 338 0 suNg 000L E 5 S SUIS UEL ZHW L J SHO SIZ ht 9uON jenjen 009 wate Jojuo2 dg 339 R 0 suNg 000L S I DL OH ZH 009 Sda SIZ 49314 Sea obuey u16ue UuJ9jjed sung Jet Bug dem uonenj e 3 3ueuiuBi v ynsoy ulayed 10 Q2JeoS 104 yoleas l1g eudiv juusueJ 9je1jJoqui S uoneinpoly puepuejs JopjoJ Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 Demodulation Overview 2 5 Demodulation Overview K70 Kernel Settings IQ Captur
422. ult unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 302 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 El SENSe subsystem Setting parameters lt UsefulLength gt numeric value Range 10 to 15000 RST 98 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS LENG 140 us The minimum burst length is 140 us Mode VSA SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt MODE lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt This command sets the vector analyzer so that a measurement is performed only if a burst is found BURSt The command is available only if the burst search is activated beforehand using the DDEM SEARch BURSt STATe ON command see SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt STATe on page 304 Setting parameters lt MeasOnlyOnBurst gt MEAS BURS RST MEAS Example DDEM SEAR BURS MODE BURS Measurement is performed only if burst is found Mode VSA Manual operation See Meas only if burst was found on page 163 SENSe DDEMod SEARch BURSt SKIP FALLing lt RunOut gt This command defines the length of the falling burst edge which is not considered when evaluating the result The default unit is symbols The value can also be given in seconds Setting parameters lt RunOut gt numeric value Range 0 to 15000 RST 1 Default unit SYM Example DDEM SEAR BURS SKIP FALL 5US 5 us of the rising burst edge are not considered M
423. um is not displayed in the logarithmic domain Solution e 1 Press the key to select the measurement screen 2 Press the AMPT key 3 Press the Unit softkey 4 Press the Y Axis Unit softkey 5 Select dB Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 351 R amp S FSV K70 Support Frequently Asked Questions Problem The Vector I Q result display and the Constellation UO result display look different Spectrum VSA Ref Level 1 96 dBm Std EDGE_8PSK SR 270 833 kHz Att 22 dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 148 SGL BURST PATTERN A EYM i Crw B Const I1 Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 0 sym i sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 C Mag CapBuf e1ciw D Vector I Q Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw Start 0 sym Stop 1500 sym Start 2 91 Stop 2 91 1 rj 16 03 2010 CLLLLLLLD tg TET Date 16 MAR 2010 10 08 34 Reason e The Vector UO diagram shows the measurement signal after the measurement filter and synchronization e The Constellation UO diagram shows the de rotated constellation i e for a rr A DQPSK 4 instead of 8 points are displayed The inter symbol interference has been removed In case the measurement filter does not remove the inter symbol interference the screens show measurements that are significantly different Problem The Constellation UO measurement result display has a different number of constellation points in the R amp S FSQ K70 and the R amp S FSV K70 Reason In the FSQ K70 the Constellation UO measuremen
424. urrent unit The y axis is adapted so that it crosses the x axis at the reference value Example If you want to analyze the probabilities of occurrence for errors greater than 95 enter the reference value 95 A Statistics EVM Error 1 Clrw 2 Clrw l Start 95 0 Stop 100 0 Fig 3 33 Defining the x axis scaling using a reference point To define the x axis range manually 1 Focus the result screen 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt X Axis Range see X Axis Range on page 117 3 Enter the range in the current unit The diagram is adapted to display the probabilities for the specified range To define the scaling automatically 1 Focus the result screen Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 191 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis 3 3 4 Configuring VSA measurements 2 Select AMPT gt Ranges gt Adjust Settings see Adjust Settings on page 118 The x axis is adapted to display the current results optimally only once not dynam ically To define the y axis range manually With this method you define the upper and lower limits of the displayed probability range Values on the y axis are normalized which means that the maximum value is 1 0 The y axis scaling is defined via the y Unit Abs softkey see y Unit Abs on page 118 If the y axis has logarithmic scale the distance between max and min value must be at least one decade 1 Focus the result
425. ut via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 161 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 130 See Trigger Mode on page 159 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Value This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 161 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 328 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 TRIGger subsystem TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis Value This command sets the limit that the hyster
426. value to the right of the current value Usage Event Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Search Direction on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command positions the marker on the current trace maximum The corresponding marker is activated first or switched to the marker mode If no maximum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MAX Positions marker 2 to the maximum value of the trace Usage Event Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 240 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 CALCulate subsystem Manual operation See Search Settings on page 136 See Search Direction on page 136 See Peak on page 136 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command positions a marker to the next higher trace minimum on the left of the current value i e in descending X direction If no next higher minimum value is found on the trace level spacing to adjacent values lt peak excursion an execution error error code 200 is produced Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC MARK2 MIN Positions marker 2 to the minimum value of the trace CALC MARK2 MIN LEFT Positio
427. weep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Statistic Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 269 Refresh Repeats the evaluation of the data currently in the capture buffer without capturing new data This is useful after changing settings for example filters patterns or evaluation ranges Remote command INITiate REFMeas on page 271 Statistics Count Opens a dialog box to define sweep characteristics The behavior depends on whether you have set the R amp S FSV to single sweep mode or continuous sweep mode Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 123 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Softkeys and Menu Overview for Vector Signal Analysis R amp S FSV K70 Statistic Count xj C Auto Manual f ke Visualization Example for bursted Signal Single Captures Q data until 1 evaluation is completed Sweep Burst gt Result ng Capture Buffer Continuous Continuously captures Q data LU Sliding window length for averaging is 1 Activate Description to display a visualization of the behavior of the current settings Auto In single sweep mode captures the UO data once and evaluates
428. weep would immediately overwrite the loaded input data If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The application is displayed with the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp SGDiglConf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp SGEX IQ BOX Digital In
429. wo sided display for complex input signals 3 1 4 Statistical Displays Statistical evaluations can be carried out for all result displays that show the time or sym bols on the x axis They show the distribution i e probabilities of occurrence of the values as a set of bars o Note that only samples within the evaluation range contribute to the statistic measure ment In all statistical displays a vertical line shows the value of the 9596 percentile Table 3 5 Available statistical displays depending on source type Source Type Result Type Capture Buffer Magnitude Absolute Real Imag I Q Meas amp Ref Signal Magnitude Absolute Magnitude Relative Phase Wrap Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 105 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Source Type Result Type Phase Unwrap Frequency Absolute Frequency Relative Real Imag l Q Error Vector EVM Real Imag I Q Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative For complex displays REAL IMAG and Error REAL IMAG a separate statistics diagram is calculated for the real and imaginary parts The input signal of the basic display is quantized and the probability of occurrence is shown by a bargraph The quantization can be set via the number of bars in the displa
430. ws the reference deviation you have set in Hz SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK RDEViation on page 232 Carrier Frequency Error Shows the mean carrier frequency offset in Hz SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic CFERror on page 227 Carrier Frequency Drift Shows the mean carrier frequency drift in Hz per symbol SCPI command CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic FSK CFDRift on page 230 Power TEE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 97 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Measurement Result Display Shows the power of the measured signal SCPI command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion DDEMod STATistic MPOWer on page 234 Basis of evaluation The majority of the values that are displayed in the Result Summary are calculated over the Evaluation Range see Evaluation Range on page 171 They are evaluated according to the setting of the Display Points Sym parameter For example if Display Points Symbol is 1 only the symbol instants contribute to the result displayed in the result summary Table 3 1 Results calculated over the evaluation range PSK MSK QAM FSK EVM Frequency Error MER Magnitude Error Phase Error Power Magnitude Error Rho Power The following results that are based on internal estimation algori
431. y area by using the Range gt X Axis Quantize parameter see Ranges statistic meas urements on page 117 In the basic setting 101 bars are used The figure 3 21 shows an example of a statistical evaluation The lower window C shows the basic diagram EVM while the upper window A shows the associated distribution of the EVM Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 106 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis El Measurement Result Display VSA Ref Level 10 00 dBm Std GSM NormalBurst SR 270 833 kHz Att 10dB Freq 1 0 GHz Res Len 200 Input RF SGL Count 100 100 BURST PATTERN A Statistics EVM 1 Clrw 2Clrw Start 26 sym Stop 174 sym Fig 3 21 Error vector magnitude bottom EVM distribution top 3 1 5 Displayed Measurement Settings The channel bar above the result screens displays the most important measurement settings Depending on the result type the following information may be displayed in the channel bar Spectrum VSA Ref Level 8 00 dBm Offset 2 00 dB Std GSM_NormalBurst Att 10 dB Freq 15 0 GHz Res Len 148 Input SGL Editing settings in the channel bar Some settings that are displayed in the channel bar can easily be edited by touching the setting in the display with a finger or mouse pointer The corresponding edit dialog box is displayed in which you can edit the setting For some settings a context sensitive menu is also available see chapter
432. y half a symbol period against the component in the time domain Hence the symbol time instants of the and the Q component do not coincide The concept of Offset QPSK is illustrated in the diagrams below Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 29 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis Symbol Mapping Derivation of OQPSK Table 2 13 I Q diagram and constellation diagram QPSK OQPSK delayed Q component Quadratu re Quadratur a time 6 amb symbols symbols PSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 OQPSK vector diagram with alpha 0 35 Quadrature Quadrature Inphase Inphase Offset QPSK reduces the dynamic range of the modulated signal with respect to nor mal QPSK and therefore the demands on amplifier linearity by avoiding zero crossings A distinction is made in the analyzer display In the Vector I Q result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is not compensated for The display corresponds to the physical diagram shown in table 2 13 In the Constellation UO result display of the measurement or reference signal the time delay is compensated for The display corresponds to the logical mapping as in fig ure 2 22 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 30 R amp S FSV K70 Brief Description of Vector Signal Analysis a PP ue Symbol Mapping OQPSK Fig 2 22 Constellation diagram for OQSK GRAY including t
433. ySsteim ccccccccesseeeceeseeseeeeseeseeeeeeeseneneseeeeseeeseseeeeesessesseeeesenseeseeneeees 278 OUT PUt Subsysterm 5 ence eer AEE 280 SENSe subsystem rnit einer trade eda aure E recension a Leva Rar erui 281 STATus QUEStionable Subsystem esee enne nnn 318 SYSTem Subsystem 5 eerie ce ccceeseet EAA 325 LTE cred esetceccexa ideo cicncral i ce Rua eso ODD Re v Ede 325 UL Ee DIE TE 327 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the indi vidual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 208 R amp S FSV K70 Remote Control Commands R amp S FSV K70 REESEN Notation The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7
434. ye Diagram Frequency Constellation UO Vector UO Constellation Frequency Vector Frequency Symbols Binary Octal Decimal Hexadecimal Error Vector EVM Real Imag l Q Vector UO Modulation Errors Magnitude Error Phase Error Frequency Error Absolute Frequency Error Relative Modulation Accuracy Result Summary Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 Result Type Transformation The result type transformation parameters set the evaluation method ofthe measurement results These settings are not available for the following source types see Source on page 181 e Symbols e Modulation Accuracy For more information see chapter 3 1 Measurement Result Display on page 73 Normal X axis displays time values Spectrum X axis displays frequency values PE Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 182 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis Configuring VSA measurements Statistics X axis displays former y values Y axis displays statistical information e Trace 1 the probability of occurrence of a certain value is plotted against the value e Trace 2 the cumulated probability of occurance is plotted against the value Remote command CALCulate n DDEM SPECtrum STATe on page 247 CALCulate lt n gt STATistics CCDF STATe on page 252 Display Points Sym Sets the number of display points that
435. ye Diagram Frequency Shows the eye diagram of the currently measured frequencies and or the reference sig nal The time span of the data depends on the evaluation range capture buffer Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM FEYE to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 325 Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 84 R amp S FSV K70 Instrument Functions for Vector Signal Analysis a ae Measurement Result Display 3 1 1 11 Constellation UO The complex source signal without inter symbol interference as an X Y plot only the de rotated symbol decision instants are drawn and not connected Available for source types e Meas amp Ref Signal MSK QPSK A I Q Const Meas amp Ref 1M Clrw A I Q Const Meas amp Ref 6 1M Clrw Start 2 43 Stop 2 43 Start 2 535 Stop 2 535 SCPI commands CALC FEED XTIM DDEM MEAS to define the required source type see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 249 CALC FORM CONS to define the result type see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 250 TRAC DATA TRACE1 to query the trace results see TRACe lt n gt DA
436. zation takes place at the sample instants specified by the Estimation Points Sym parameter i e t n Tg with Tg the sampling period used for estimation Details on the estimation model and also the parameter vector can be found in chap ter 2 6 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation Errors on page 55 Subsequently the measurement signal is corrected with the determined parameter vec tor Note that with a subset of the parameters you can enable or disable correction see Demodulation on page 173 Estimation ranges The estimation ranges are determined internally according to the signal description e Forcontinuous signals the estimation range corresponds to the entire result range since it can then be assumed that the signal consists of valid modulated symbols at all time instants e Forbursted signals the estimation range corresponds to the overlapping area of the detected burst and the Result Range Furthermore the Run In Run Out ranges see Continuous Signal Burst Signal on page 151 are explicitly excluded from the estimation range In the special case that the signal is indicated as a burst signal but is so highly distorted that the burst search cannot detect a burst the estimation range corresponds to the pat tern and if an offset of the pattern is indicated the useful part of the burst from its start to the pattern start Operating Manual 1176 7578 02 01 57 Signal Model Estimation and Modulation

R&S FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSV-K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating